Home

Agilent Technologies 1660AS TV Converter Box User Manual

1. BEEPer las 2 BEEPer gt Me CAPobi lity gt I CARDcage w CESE space 9 value gt CESE gt m CESR gt EOI space OFF 2 01 wm LER gt space OFF LOCKout gt Y 4 Mainframe Commands Syntax Diagram 9 3 Figure 9 1 continued Mainframe Commands Y ENU space ee module E VESE gt index ee space enable value ESE wm index gt ESR gt index E gt space SINGIe REPetitive e RMoDe gt RTC space day gt month year hour N SELect space module gt SELect gt SETColor DEFault space color gt hue C sat lum gt ING eG 01660506 Mainframe Commands Syntax Diagram continued Table 9 1 Mainframe Commands Mainframe Parameter Values Parameter value module menu enable_value index day month year hour minute second color hue sat lum Values An integer from 0 to 65535 An integer 0 through 2 3 through 10 unused An integer An integer from 0 to 255 An integer from 0 to 5 An integer from 1 through 31 An integer from 1 through 12 An intege
2. Figure 3 2 e5 pin F 25 pin M q m 2 gt 3 3 uU 2 5 4 i 20 6 4 m 20 i RB 5 6 54600M26 25 pin F to 25 pin M Cable Figure 3 3 shows the schematic of a 25 pin male to 25 pin male cable 5 meters in length The following cable supports this configuration e HP 13242G DB 25 M to DB 25 M 5 meter Figure 3 3 25 pin M 25 pin M 1 q gt 2 gt 3 3 e 4 gt 3 5 lt 20 6 4 u m 8 q 4 12 4 19 11 Ho 19 gt 12 20 Bm 5 6 54600M24 25 pin M to 25 pin M Cable 3 7 Programming Over RS 232C Configuring the Logic Analzer Interface Figure 3 4 shows the schematic of a 9 pin female to 25 pin male cable The following cables support this configuration BEE e HP 24542G DB 9 F to DB 25 M 3 meter e HP 24542H DB 9 F to DB 25 M 3 meter shielded e HP 45911 60009 DB 9 F to DB 25 M 1 5 meter Figure 3 4 9 pin F 25 pin M lt 4 2 c4 2 3 gt 3 4 Be 5 u 5 4 gt 6 20 8 q 7 m 3 54600M25 9 pin F to 25 pin M Cable Configuring the Logic Analzer Interface The RS 232C menu field in the System Configuration Menu allows you access to the RS 232C Configuration menu where the RS 232C interface is configured If you are not familiar with how to configure the RS 232C interface refer to the Agilent Technologies 1660 Series Logic Analyzer User s Reference 3 8 Programming Over RS 232C
3. slot_ 1 label_str gt LAB D channel_ I LaBe13 wm channel_ I MINus 4 space jr ebel id SJ slot s Bat PLUS space i gt label_id M slot_ zat gt label id M99 He OVER ay space g epel id label_id We slots bel Y REM EMove 16532517 id H gt lobel id 9 ni DISPlay Subsystem Syntax Diagram 30 3 Command Example Query Returned Format Example DISPlay Subsystem ACCumulate DISPlay Parameter Values Parameter Value slot a number from 1 or 2 identifying the oscilloscope analyzer card slot 1 analyzer 2 oscilloscope bit id an integer from 0 to 31 channel an integer from 1 to 2 label str up to five characters enclosed in single quotes making up a label name label id a string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character for the oscilloscope or 6 characters for the timing modules ACCumulate DISPlay ACCumulate on oFF o The ACCumulate command works in conjunction with the commands in the Acquisition Subsystem In the Normal mode the ACCumulate command turns the infinite persistence on or off OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY ACC ON DISPLAY ACCumulate The ACCumulate query reports if accumulate is turned on or off DISPlay ACCumulate 1 0 lt NL g
4. 33 6 34 TRIGger Subsystem Introduction The commands of the Trigger Subsystem allow you to set all the trigger conditions necessary for generating a trigger Many of the commands in the Trigger subsystem may be used in either the EDGE or the PATTern trigger mode If a command is a valid command for the chosen trigger mode then that setting will be accepted by the oscilloscope However if the command is not valid for the trigger mode an error will be generated None of the commands of this subsystem except Mode are used in conjunction with Immediate trigger mode See Figure 34 1 for the TRIGger Subsystem Syntax Diagram The EDGE Trigger Mode In the EDGE trigger mode the oscilloscope triggers on an edge of a waveform specified by the SOURce DELay LEVel and SLOPe commands If a source is not specified then the current source is assumed The DELay value corresponds to the Count field displayed on the TRIGger menu The PATTern Trigger Mode In the pattern trigger mode the oscilloscope triggers when a pattern is generated using the CONDition DELay LEVel LOGic and PATH commands The CONDition command allows the oscilloscope to trigger when entering the specified pattern or exiting the pattern The DELay value corresponds to the Count field displayed on the TRIGger menu The LOGic command defines the pattern The PATH command is used to change the trigger pattern and level The path consists of two chan
5. SERVICE C RQS VV VV REQUEST lt 7 6 esslmv 3 2 1 e GENERATION MSS i i LOGICAL OR Service Request Enabling Status Reporting Serial Poll 8 READ BY SERIAL POLL STATUS BYTE REGISTER 8 READ BY STB SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE REGISTER SRE lt NRf gt SRE 16508 8124 Serial Poll The 1660 series logic analyzer supports the IEEE 488 1 serial poll feature When a serial poll of the instrument is requested the RQS bit is returned on bit 6 of the status byte Status Reporting Serial Poll Using Serial Poll GPIB This example will show how to use the service request by conducting a serial poll of all instruments on the GPIB bus In this example assume that there are two instruments on the bus a Logic Analyzer at address 7 and a printer at address 1 The program command for serial poll using HP BASIC 6 2 is Stat SPOLL 707 The address 707 is the address of the logic analyzer in the this example The command for checking the printer is Stat SPOLL 701 because the address of that instrument is 01 on bus address 7 This command reads the contents of the GPIB Status Register into the variable called Stat At that time bit 6 of the variable Stat can be tested to see if it is set bit 6 1 The serial poll operation can be conducted in the
6. ALL i gt space Mm msus COPY PB space 9 name Ru Y name eo msus M space Hr msus DOWN oad space name gt msus a msus Lo description FOET block_data Mmemory Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram sl 01660507 11 4 MMEMory Subsystem Figure 11 1 Y He INITialize gt H r space LIF el Se msus gt Loan space gt name gt Y E JT Loan e IASSemb Ier space i ao name FN TD Om Des MSI gt space msus J e usi u space gt gt nsus E A 91660508 Mmemory Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram Continued 11 5 MMEMory Subsystem Figure 11 1 Y space gt name msus E space gt name ES eC gt msus gt MEM new name gt e SToRe space name FX gt CONF ig Omar ER description JT module UPLoad space name gt msus gt gt VOLume space gt msus
7. space rs offset_arg OFFSet PROBE gt space Far probe_arg PROBe RANGE space rn range_arg RANGE TO CHANnel Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16532586 29 3 Table 29 1 Command lt N gt Example CHANnel Subsystem COUPling CHANnel Parameter Values Parameter channel_number offset_arg Value An integer from 1 to 2 a real number defining the voltage atthe center of the display The offset range is as follows for a 1 1 probe setting Vertical Sensitivity Vertical Range Offset Voltage 4 mV 100 mV div 16 mV 400 mV 42V 2100 mV 400 mV div 2400 mV 1 6 V 10 V gt 400 mV 2 5 V div 21 6 V 10V 50 V gt 2 5 V 10 V div gt 10 V 40V 250 V probe_arg range_arg an integer from 1 through 1000 specifying the probe attenuation with respect to 1 a real number specifying vertical sensitivity The allowable range is 16 mV to 40 V for a probe attenuation of 1 The specified range is equal to 4 times Volts Div COUPling CHANnel lt N gt COUPling DC AC DCFifty The COUPling command sets the input impedance for the selected channel The choices are 1M Ohm DC DC 1M Ohm AC AC or 50 Ohms DC DCFifty An integer from 1 to 2 OUTPUT XXX CHANNI EL1 COUPLING DC 29 4 Query Returned Format Example Command
8. 36 27 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 Programming Examples Transferring waveform data in Byte format Transferring waveform data in Byte format This program sets up the oscilloscope module to move oscilloscope waveform data from the 1660 series to a controller in Byte format Transferring Waveform Data Byte Format CLEAR 707 pkokckckckckckckckckckckckckok Select the oscilloscope ckckckckck kckckckckckckckckckckckckck KEK OUTPUT 707 SELECT 2 pk k kk kkkkkkkk Set EOI on and Headers Off kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkx k OUTPUT 707 EOI ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF pckk ck k kk kk kkkk k k Get up the Oscilloscope ckckckckckckckckckck ckck ckck kock kk kk kk OUTPUT 707 ACQUIRE TYPE NORMAL OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM SOURCE CHANNELS OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM FORMAT BYTE OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM RECORD FULL pkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Start Waveform Acquisition kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkx k OUTPUT 707 AUTOSCALE I ckckckckckck kckc kck ko k kk k Dimension a string for the data Xokckck ckck kck kk kk kk DIM Header 20 Digitize the data and display Waveform menu OUTPUT 707 DIGITIZE OUTPUT 707 MENU 2 3 WAIT 5 Length 8000 ALLOCATE INTEGER Waveform 1 Length pkckckckckckckckckckckckckckok Transfer the wa
9. qual_num gt auo level SFORmat Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16550510 15 3 SFORmat Subsystem Figure 15 1 Y e REMo ve space a name e SETHo1d space Ham pod num I s gt set hold value M H SETHo I d J space H r pod_num SLAVe space clock_id c clock_spec stave space gt clock_id S0PQua i space Hr clock_pair_id LHC gt aual_operation M H SoPaua 1 J space clock_pair_id H saual J space qual num e clock id ee qual_level gt squat H space LJ qual num e THResho d N gt space eT om value THResho I d lt N gt 16550808 SFORmat Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 15 4 Table 15 1 SFORmat Subsystem SFORmat Parameter Values Parameter lt N gt label_name polarity clock_bits upper_bits lower_bits clock_id clock_spec clock_pair_id qual_operation qual_num qual_level pod_num set_hold_value value Values 1231 3141516 0783 String of up to 6 alphanumeric characters Positive NEGative Format integer from 0 to 63 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order Format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned i
10. 17 24 18 SWAVeform Subsystem Introduction The commands in the State Waveform subsystem allow you to configure the display so that you can view state data as waveforms on up to 96 channels identified by label name and bit number The 11 commands are analogous to their counterparts in the Timing Waveform subsystem However in this subsystem the x axis is restricted to representing only samples states regardless of whether time tagging is on or off As a result the only commands which can be used for scaling are DELay and RANge The way to manipulate the X and O markers on the Waveform display is through the State Listing SLISt subsystem Using the marker commands from the SLISt subsystem will affect the markers on the Waveform display The commands in the SWAVeform subsystem are e ACCumulate e ACQuisition e CENter e CLRPattern e CLRStat e DELay e NSert e RANGe e REMove e TAKenbranch e TPOSition 18 2 SWAVeform Subsystem Figure 18 1 Da swaveform Im ACcuru late spoce we A gt D m ACCumulate gt H ACau isi tion space me i gt CTD H ACQuisition CENTer space oe mark_type H r CLRPattern j space 00 9 H CLRstat gt DE L ay space number of samples I e INser C space abel name eC J bitid e H Rance J space
11. Command SLISt Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 SLISt REMove The REMove command removes all labels except the leftmost label from the listing menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST REMOVE RUNTil MACHine 1 2 SLISt RUNTil run until spec The RUNTIl run until command allows you to define a stop condition when the trace mode is repetitive Specifying OFF causes the analyzer to make runs until either the display s STOP field is touched or when the STOP command is issued There are four conditions based on the time between the X and O markers Using this difference in the condition is effective only when time tags have been turned on see the TAG command in the STRace subsystem These four conditions are as follows e The difference is less than LT some value e The difference is greater than GT some value e The difference is inside some range INRange e The difference is outside some range OUTRange End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 8 ns apart since this is the minimum time resolution of the time tag counter 17 15 lt run until_ spec gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem RUNTIl There are two conditions which are based on a comparison of the acquired state data and the compare data image The analyzer can run until one of the following conditions is true e Every channel of every label has
12. Example CHANnel Subsystem ECL CHANnel N COUPling The COUPling query returns the current input impedance for the specified channel CHANnel lt N gt COUPling DC AC DCFifty lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 COUPLING ECL CHANnel lt N gt ECL The ECL command sets the vertical range offset and trigger levels for the selected input channel for optimum viewing of ECL signals The set ECL values are Range 2 0 V 500 mV per division Offset 1 3 V Trigger level 1 3 V An integer from 1 to 2 OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 ECL To return to Preset User change the CHANnel RANGe CHANnel OFFSet or TRIGger LEVel value 29 5 Command lt N gt lt value gt Example Query lt N gt Returned Format Example CHANnel Subsystem OFFSet OFFSet CHANnel lt N gt OFFSet value The OFFSet command sets the voltage that is represented at center screen for the selected channel The allowable offset voltage value is shown in the table below The table represents values for a Probe setting of 1 1 The offset value is recompensated whenever the probe attenuation factor is changed An integer from 1 to 2 allowable offset voltage value shown in the table below Vertical Range Offset Voltage 16 mV 400 mV 2V gt 400 mV 1 6 V 10 V 1 6V 10V 50 V gt 10 V 40V 250 V OUTPUT XXX CHAN1 OFFS 1 5 CHANnel1 N OFFS
13. 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 stop pattern B 0 1 Fa 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B c p g F ia raster ei ue ad pat num of levels integer from 2 to 12 lev of trig integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 store qualifier qualifier state tag qualifier qualifier timer num 1 2 timer_value 400 ns to 500 seconds term_id A B C D E F G H 1 7 pattern B O 1 xX 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F x 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 qualifier see Qualifier on page 16 7 post value integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage 16 6 lt qualifier gt lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionla_ term gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionlb_ term gt lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expression2d gt lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt expression2h gt lt boolean_op gt lt term3a gt STRigger STRace Subsystem Qualifier Qualifier The qualifier for the state trigger subsystem can be terms A through J Timer 1 and 2 and Range 1 and 2 In addition qualifiers can be the NOT boolean function of terms timers and ranges The qualifier can also be an expression or combination of expressions as shown below and figure 16 2 Com
14. The MESE command sets the Module Event Status Enable register This register is the enable register for the MESR register The N index specifies the module and the parameter specifies the enable value For the 1660 series logic analyzer the lt N gt index 0 1 or 2 refers to system logic analyzer or oscilloscope respectively An integer 0 through 2 3 through 10 unused An integer from 0 through 255 OUTPUT XXX MESE1 3 MESE lt N gt The query returns the current setting Tables 9 6 9 7 and 9 8 list the Module Event Status Enable register bits bit weights and what each bit masks for the mainframe logic analyzer and oscilloscope respectively MESE lt N gt enable value NL OUTPUT XXX MESE1 Table 9 6 Table 9 7 Mainframe Commands MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable 1660 Series Mainframe Intermodule Module Event Status Enable Register Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Weight 128 84 32 16 8 4 2 1 Enables not used not used not used not used not used not used RNT Intermodule Run Until Satisfied MC Intermodule Measurement Complete 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Module Event Status Enable Register Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Weight 128 84 32 16 8 4 2 1 Enables not used not used not used not used Pattern searches failed Trigger found RNT Run Until Satisfied MC Measurement Comp
15. XSEarch MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The XSEarch command defines the search criteria for the X Marker which is then with associated XPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger or with the start of data The occurrence parameter determines which occurrence of the XPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin the marker actually searches for An occurrence of 0 places a marker on the selected origin integer from 8191 to 8191 TRIGger STARt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XSEARCH 10 TRIGGER 24 20 Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format state num Example TLISt Subsystem XSTate MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSEarch The XSEarch query returns the search criteria for the X marker MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSEarch occurrence lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XSI EARCH XSTate MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSTate The XSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the X marker resides 8191 to 8191 If data is not valid the query returns 32767 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSTate state num NL an integer from 8191 to 8191 or 32767 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XSTATE 24 21 Command time value Example Query Returned Format TLISt Subsystem XTAG
16. XTAG MACHine 1 2 TLISt XTAG time value The XTAG command specifies the tag value on which the X Marker should be placed The tag value is time If the data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XTAG 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XTAG The XTAG query returns the X Marker position in time regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid tagged data the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XTAG time value NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XTAG 24 22 25 SYMBol Subsystem Introduction The SYMBol subsystem contains the commands that allow you to define symbols on the controller and download them to the 1660 series logic analyzers The commands in this subsystem are e BASE e PATTern e RANGe e REMove e WIDTh 25 2 SYMBol Subsystem Figure 25 1 CN Nad yY SYMBo 2 BASE space H r label name 2 BINary sweet oe C e Ces u I gt PATTern J space H abel name Lm symbo _name me rn pattern_value M gt RANGE space Iobel_nome LC symbo _name Z co MH GN start value 7 6 Ye stop_value BD eir e space Hr label name gt width value 4 16510 SX10
17. run until Spec values Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem RUNTIl RUNTil MACHine 1 2 TLISt RUNTil run until spec The RUNTII run until command allows you to define a stop condition when the trace mode is repetitive Specifying OFF causes the analyzer to make runs until either the display s STOP field is touched or until the STOP command is issued There are four conditions based on the time between the X and O markers as follows e The difference is less than LT some value e The difference is greater than GT some value e The difference is inside some range INRange e The difference is outside some range OUTRange End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 8 ns apart since this is the minimum time resolution of the time tag counter OFF LT value GT value INRange value value OUTRange value value real number from 9E9 to 9E9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST RUNTIL GT 800 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TLISt RUNTil The RUNTil query returns the current stop criteria MACHine 1 2 TLISt RUNTil lt run_until_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST RUNTIL 24 15 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example TLISt Subsystem TAVerage TAVerage MACHine 1 2 TLISt TAVerage The TAVerage query re
18. OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM CLRPATTERN ALL CLRStat MACHine 1 2 Twaveform CLRStat The CLRStat command allows you to clear the waveform statistics without having to stop and restart the acquisition OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM CLRSTAT DELay MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform DELay delay value The DELay command specifies the amount of time between the timing trigger and the horizontal center of the the timing waveform display The allowable values for delay are 2500 s to 2500 s If the acquisition mode is automatic then in glitch acquisition mode as delay becomes large in an absolute sense the sample rate is adjusted so that data will be acquired in the time window of interest In transitional acquisition mode data may not fall in the time window since the sample period is fixed and the amount of time covered in memory is dependent on how frequent the input signal transitions occur 23 9 lt delay_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example EE module spec label name bit id Example TWAVeform Subsystem INSert real number between 2500 s and 2500 s OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY 100E 6 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform DELay The DELay query returns the current time offset delay value from the trigger MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform DELay delay value NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM DELAY INSert MACHine 1 2
19. 80 ENTER 707 USING 200A Mes 90 PRINT USING 4 200A Me 100 END 36 32 Programming Examples Using Sub routines in a measurement program Using Sub routines in a measurement program This program example shows a measurement example using sub routines in HP BASIC The tasks perfumed in this example are e Initializing the interface and the oscilloscope e Digitizing the acquired signal data e Measuring and printing the frequency and peak to peak voltage of the acquired signal 10 Measurement Example Using Sub routines 20 30 IMAIN PROGRAM 40 50 CLEAR SCREEN 60 PRINT This example program will perform the following tasks 70 PRINT a initialize the interface and oscilloscope 80 PRINT b digitize the signal i 90 PRINT c measure and print the frequency ii 100 PRINT 110 PRINT The program assumes the system is configured as 120 PRINT GPIB address 7 130 PRINT Oscilloscope address 7 140 PRINT Oscilloscope card is in slot 2 150 PRINT Signal attached to channel 1 160 PRINT 170 PRINT If the addresses are not correct for your configuration change 180 PRINT the ASSIGN statements in the Initialize function 190 PRINT 200 PRINT Press Continue when ready to start program or Shift Break to terminate 210 PAUSE 220 GOSUB Initialize initialize interface and oscilloscope 230 GOSUB Get waveform digitize signal 240 GOSUB Measure measure and print frequency 250 STOP
20. Error Messages Device Dependent Errors Device Dependent Errors 200 201 202 208 300 Label not found Pattern string invalid Qualifier invalid Data not available RS 232C error Command Errors 100 101 110 111 120 121 123 129 130 131 132 133 134 139 142 143 144 Command error unknown command generic error Invalid character received Command header error Header delimiter error Numeric argument error Wrong data type numeric expected Numeric overflow Missing numeric argument Non numeric argument error character string or block Wrong data type character expected Wrong data type string expected Wrong data type block type D required Data overflow string or block too long Missing non numeric argument Too many arguments Argument delimiter error Invalid message unit delimiter Error Messages Execution Errors Execution Errors 200 201 202 203 211 212 221 222 232 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Can Not Do generic execution error Not executable in Local Mode Settings lost due to return to local or power on Trigger ignored Legal command but settings conflict Argument out of range Busy doing something else Insufficient capability or configuration Output buffer full or overflow Mass Memory error generic Mass storage device not present No media Bad media Media full Directory full File name not f
21. OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST LINE 0 17 9 Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_mode gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem MMODe MACHine 1 2 SLISt LINE The LINE query returns the line number for the state currently in the box at the center of the screen MACHine 1 2 SLISt LINE line num mid_screen gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST LINE MMODe MACHine 1 2 SLISt MMODe marker mode The MMODe command Marker Mode selects the mode controlling the marker movement and the display of marker readouts When PATTern is selected the markers will be placed on patterns When STATe is selected and state tagging is on the markers move on qualified states counted between normally stored states When TIME is selected and time tagging is enabled the markers move on time between stored states When MSTats is selected and time tagging is on the markers are placed on patterns but the readouts will be time statistics OFF PATTern STATe TIME MSTats OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST MMODE TIME MACHine 1 2 SLISt MMODe The MMODe query returns the current marker mode selected MACHine 1 2 SLISt MMODe lt marker_mode gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 SLIST MMODE 17 10 Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Examples Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem OPATt
22. SYSTem ERRor NUMeric STRing The ERRor query returns the oldest error from the error queue The optional parameter determines whether the error string should be returned along with the error number If no parameter is received or if the parameter is NUMeric then only the error number is returned If the value of the parameter is STRing then the error should be returned in the following form error number error message string gt A complete list of error messages for the 1660A series logic analyzer is shown in chapter 7 Error Messages If no errors are present in the error queue a zero No Error is returned Numeric SYSTem ERRor error number NL String SYSTem ERROor error number error string NL An integer A string of alphanumeric characters Numeric 10 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM ERROR 20 ENTER XXX Numeric String 50 OUTPUT XXX SYST ERR STRING 60 ENTER XXX String 10 7 Command Example Query Returned Format Example SYSTem Subsystem HEADer HEADer SYSTem HEADer ON 1 OFF o The HEADer command tells the instrument whether or not to output a header for query responses When HEADer is set to ON query responses will include the command header OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER ON SYSTem HEADer The HEADer query returns the current state of the HEADer command SYSTem HEADer 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER He
23. Skew for oscilloscope real number OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE HTIME INPort INPort ON 1 OFF 0 The INPort command causes intermodule acquisitions to be armed from the Input port OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE INPORT ON 12 6 Query Returned Format Example Command lt module gt Examples INTermodule Subsystem INSert INPort The INPort query returns the current setting INTermodule INPort 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE INPORT INSert INSert lt module gt OUT GROUP lt module gt The INSert command adds PORT OUT to the Intermodule configuration The first parameter selects the logic analyzer or PORT OUT to be added to the intermodule configuration and the second parameter tells the instrument where the logic analyzer or PORT OUT will be located A 1 corresponds the slot location of the logic analyzer and a 2 corresponds to the slot location of the oscilloscope An integer 1 through 10 3 through 10 unused OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE INSERT 1 GROUP OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE INSERT 2 GROUP OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE INSERT OUT 2 to 12 7 Command lt N gt lt setting gt Example Query Returned Format Example INTermodule Subsystem SKEW lt N gt SKEW lt N gt SKEW lt N gt lt setting gt The SKEW command sets the skew value for amodule The lt N gt index value is the module num
24. Voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 Default value of 1 6 V Default value of 1 3 V OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT THRESHOLD1 4 0 MACHine 1 2 SFORmat THReshold lt N gt The THReshold query returns the current threshold for a given pod MACHine 1 2 SFORmat THReshold lt N gt lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 SFORMAT THRESHOLD4 15 18 16 STRigger STRace Subsystem Introduction The STRigger subsystem contains the commands available for the State Trigger menu in the 1660A series logic analyzers The State Trigger subsystem will also accept the STRace Command as used in previous 1650 series logic analyzers to eliminate the need to rewrite programs containing STRace as the Command keyword The STRigger subsystem commands are ACQuisition BRANch CLEar FIND RANGe SEQuence STORe TAG TAKenbranch TCONtrol TERM TIMER TPOSition 16 2 Figure 16 1 STRigger STRace Subsystem Y OA een sooo G E aa H BRANch lt N gt Je space branch_qualifier 7 to level num H r H BRANch lt N gt Im m F IND lt N gt 39 space gt proceed quo tier occurrence Ht I FINDEN gt RANGE gt space nu label name stor t_pattern aS stop_pattern M Le RANGE m SEQuence 5 gt sp
25. 14 11 WLISt Subsystem XTIMe Query WLISt XTIMe The XTIMe query returns the X Marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 Returned Format WLISt XTIMe time value NL time value Arealnumber Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST XTIME 14 12 15 SFORmat Subsystem Introduction The SFORmat subsystem contains the commands available for the State Format menu in the 1660A series logic analyzers These commands are e CLOCk e LABel e MASTer e MODE e MOPQual e MQUal e REMove e SETHold e SLAVe e SOPQual e SQUal e THReshold 15 2 Figure 15 1 SFORmat Subsystem f SFoRmat mC Pe CLOCK lt N gt space e wasTer DEMultiplex I CLOCK lt N gt m LABe space gt abel_name ara polarity gt clock_bits I teC Fl upper_bits IR J Nower bits IN LABel Space MASTer space 3 clock id Lm Je clock_spec MASTer space M label name gt MODE space eru clock_id DEEPmemor y clock_pair_id qual_operation clock_pair_id Que gt space MQUa space Jd qual_num C clock_id
26. INRange time lt time gt OUTRange lt time gt lt time gt The RUNTil command allows you to set a stop condition based on the time interval between the X marker and the O marker In repetitive runs when the time specification is met the oscilloscope stops acquiring data and the advisory Stop condition satisfied will be displayed on screen a real number specifying the time in seconds between the X and O markers OUTPUT XXX MARKER RUNTIL LT 1MS MARKer RUNTi1 The RUNTil query will return the current Run Until Time X O RUNTi setting MARKer RUNTil OFF LT lt time gt GT lt time gt INRange lt time gt lt time gt OUTRange lt time gt lt time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER RUNTIL 31 11 Example Query Returned Format lt time value gt Example MARKer Subsystem SHOW SHOW MARKer SHOW SAMPle MARKer The SHOW command allows you to select either SAMPle rate or MARKer data when markers are enabled to appear on the oscilloscope menus above the waveform area The SAMPle rate or MARKer data appears on the channel trigger display and auto measure menus Marker data is always present on the marker menu While sample rate data is only present on the marker menu when time markers are turned off OUTPUT XXX MARKER SHOW MARKER TAVerage MARKer TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the average time between the X and O markers If
27. OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TWAVEFORM MMODE 23 11 Command Example Query Returned Format TWAVeform Subsystem OCONdition OCONdition MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OCONdition ENTering EXITing The OCONdition command specifies where the O marker is placed The O marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the OPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OCONDITION ENTERING MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OCONdition The OCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TWAVEFORM OCONDITION 23 12 Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem OPATtern OPATtern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The OPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the O marker which is then used with the OSEarch criteria and OCONdition when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several invocations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and Dan 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt
28. Programmer s Guide Publication number 01660 97033 Second edition January 2000 For Safety information Warranties and Regulatory information see the pages behind the index Copyright Agilent Technologies 1992 2000 All Rights Reserved Agilent Technologies 1660A AS Series Logic Analyzers il In This Book This programmer s guide contains general information mainframe level commands logic analyzer commands oscilloscope module commands and programming examples for programming the 1660 series logic analyzers This guide focuses on how to program the instrument over the GPIB and the RS 232C interfaces Instruments covered by the 1660 Series Programmer s Guide The 1660 series logic analyzers are available with or without oscilloscope measurement capabilities The 1660A series logic analyzers contain only a logic analyzer The 1660AS series logic analyzers contain both a logic analyzer and a digitizing oscilloscope What is in the 1660 Series Programmer s Guide The 1660 Series Programmer s Guide is organized in five parts Part 1 Part 1 consists of chapters 1 through 7 and contains general information about programming basics GPIB and RS 232C interface requirements documentation conventions status reporting and error messages Introduction to Programming Programming Over GPIB Programming Over RS 232C Programming and Documentation Conventions Message Communication and System Fu
29. Qualifier The qualifier for the timing trigger subsystem can be terms A through J Timer 1 and 2 and Range 1 and 2 In addition qualifiers can be the NOT boolean function of terms timers and ranges The qualifier can also be an expression or combination of expressions as shown below and figure 22 2 Complex Qualifier on page 22 11 The following parameters show how qualifiers are specified in all commands of the TTRigger subsystem that use qualifier ANYSTATE NOSTATE lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla gt OR lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla gt AND lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla_term gt lt expressionla_term gt OR expressionla term lt expressionla_term gt AND expressionla term lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expression2d gt lt expressionlb_term gt expressionlb term OR expressionlb term expressionlb term AND expressionlb term lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt expression2h gt lt term3a gt lt term3b gt lt term3a gt boolean op lt term3b gt lt term3c gt lt range3a gt lt term3c gt boolean op lt range3a gt lt term3d gt lt gledge3a lt term3d gt boolean op lt gledge3a gt lt term3e gt lt timer3a gt lt term3e gt boolean op lt timer3a gt lt term
30. Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MODE MODE MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MODE acq mode The MODE command allows you to select the acquistion mode of the state analyzer The modes are either full channel with 4 Kbit of memory depth per channel or half channel with 8 Kbit of memory depth per channel FULL DEEPmemory OUTPUT XXX MACHinel SFORMAT MODE FULL MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MODE The MODE query returns the current acquistion mode MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MODE acq mode NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 SFORMAT MODE 15 10 Command lt clock_pair_id gt qual operation Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MOPQual MOPQual MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MOPQual clock pair id qual operation The MOPQual master operation qualifier command allows you to specify either the AND or the OR operation between master clock qualifier pair 1 and 2 or between master clock qualifier pair 3 and 4 For example you can specify a master clock operation qualifer 1 AND 2 112 AND OR OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT MOPQUAL 1 AND MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MOPQUal clock pair id The MOPQual query returns the operation qualifier specified for the master clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MOPQUal clock pair id qual operation NL OUTPUT XXX MACHinel SFORMAT MOPQUAL 1 15 11 Command lt qual_num gt lt
31. Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem PERiod PERiod MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PERiod The PERiod query makes a period measurement on the selected channel The measurement is equivalent to the inverse of the frequency MEASure PERiod lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 waveform period in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL1 PERIOD PREShoot MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PREShoot The PREShoot query makes the preshoot measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding a distortion which precedes the first major transition on screen The result is the ratio of PREshoot vs VAMPlitude MEASure PREShoot lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 ratio of preshoot to Vamplitude OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL2 PRES 32 8 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem PWIDth PWIDth MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PWIDth The PWIDth query makes a positive pulse width measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding the time difference between the 5096 points of the first rising and the next falling edge displayed on screen MEASure PWIDth lt value gt lt
32. lt line_number gt lt NL gt integer from 1 to 8192 integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE FIND 26 Command lt line_num gt Example Query Returned Format lt line_num gt Example Command Example COMPare Subsystem LINE LINE MACHine 1 2 COMPare LINE line num The LINE command allows you to center the compare listing data about a specified line number An integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE LINE 511 MACHine 1 2 COMPare LINE The LINE query returns the current line number specified MACHine 1 2 COMPare LINE line num gt lt NL gt An integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE4 COMPARE LINE MENU MACHine 1 2 COMPare MENU REFerence DIFFerence The MENU command allows you to display the reference or the difference listings in the Compare menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE MENU REFERENCE 20 10 COMPare Subsystem RANGe RANGe Command MACHine 1 2 COMPare RANGe FULL PARTial start line stop line The RANGe command allows you to define the boundaries for the comparison The range entered must be a subset of the lines in the acquire memory start line integer from 8191 to 48191 stop line integer from start line to 8191 Examples OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RANGE PARTIAL 511 512 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RANGE
33. rn N PRINt space w SCReen gt space block data SETup 16500511 Figure 10 1 System Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram 10 3 Table 10 1 SYSTem Subsystem System Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram Continued SYSTem Parameter Values Parameter Values block data Data in IEEE 488 2 format string A string of up to 68 alphanumeric characters 10 4 Command Example lt block_data gt lt block_length_ specifier gt lt length gt lt section gt lt section_ header gt section data SYSTem Subsystem DATA DATA SYSTem DATA block data The DATA command allows you to send and receive acquired data to and from a controller in block form This helps saving block data for e Reloading to the logic analyzer or oscilloscope e Processing data later in the logic analyzer or oscilloscope e Processing data in the controller The format and length of block data depends on the instruction being used and the configuration of the instrument This chapter describes briefly the syntax of the Data command and query Because the mainframe by itself does not have acquired data and the capabilities of the DATA command and query vary for each module the DATA command and query are described in detail in the respective modules command section See chapter 26 DATA and SET
34. value lt value gt real number 24 6 TLISt Subsystem TLISt TLISt Selector MACHine 1 2 TLISt The TLISt selector is used as part of a compound header to access those settings normally found in the Timing Listing menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINEl TLIST LINE 256 COLumn Command MACHine 1 2 TLISt COLumn col num module num MACHine 1 2 1abel name base The COLumn command allows you to configure the timing analyzer list display by assigning a label name and base to one of the 61 vertical columns in the menu A column number of 1 refers to the left most column When a label is assigned to a column it replaces the original label in that column When the label name is TAGS the TAGS column is assumed and the next parameter must specify RELative or ABSolute A label for tags must be assigned in order to use ABSolute or RELative state tagging 24 7 lt col_num gt lt module_num gt lt label_name gt lt base gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example TLISt Subsystem CLRPattern integer from 1 to 61 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 through 10 unused a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol TASSemb1er for labels or ABSolu
35. 17 4 SLISt Subsystem Figure 17 1 continued Y e XPATtern space H r label name L label pattern H xPAT tern gt space H r label name Im xSEar ch gt space 9 occurrence zc u TRIGger E STARt xta space C time_value gt state_value 9 xor ime 16550807 SLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 17 5 Table 17 1 SLISt Subsystem SLISt Parameter Values Parameter module_num mach_num col_num line_number label_name base line_num_mid_screen label pattern occurrence time value state value run until spec value Values 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 through 10 not used 112 Integer from 1 to 61 Integer from 8191 to 8191 A string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOSs Asci i SYMBol IASSembler forlabels or ABSolute RELative for tags Integer from 8191 to 8191 HB 0 1 X 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 Integer from 8191 to 8192 Real number Real number OFF LT value GT value INRange lt value gt value OUTRange value lt value gt Real number 17 6 Selector Example Command SLISt Subsystem SLISt SLISt MACHine 1 2 SLISt The SLISt sele
36. 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 Programming Examples Printing to the disk Printing to the disk This program prints acquired data to a disk file The file can be either on a LIF or DOS disk If you print the file to a DOS disk you will be able to view the file on a DOS compatible computer using any number of file utility programs PRINTING TO A DISK FILE 4exx I This program prints the acquired data to a disk file I will print to either a LIF or DOS file using the PRINT ALL command I KKK KK KK KK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 23 OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 Always a 1 for the 1660 series logic analyzers OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 7 Selects the Listing 1 menu Print to disk will only work in Listing and Disk menus OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM PRINT ALL DISK DISKFILE RK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 Now display catalog to see that the file has been saved on the disk I DIM File 100 DIM Specifier 2 OUTPUT 707 EOI ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG ALL ENTER 707 USING 2A Specifier ENTER 707 USING 8D Length FOR I 1 TO Length STEP 70 ENTER 707 USING 70A File PRINT File NEXT I ENTER 707 USING A Specifier END
37. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK Set the marker mode MMODE to time so that time tags are available for marker measurements Place the X marker on 03 hex and the O marker on 07 hex Then tell the timing analyzer to find the first occurrence of 03h after the trigger and the first occurrence of 07h after the X marker is found OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM MMODE TIME OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XPATTERN COUNT H03 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OPATTERN COUNT H07 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XCONDITION ENTERING OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OCONDITION ENTERING OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XSEARCH 1 TRIGGER OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 1 XMARKER T en 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KK KEK KK KK EK Turn the longform and headers on dimension a string for the query data send the XOTIME query and print the string containing the XOTIME query data OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER ON DIM Mtime 100 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XOTIME ENTER 707 Mtime PRINT Mtime END 36 4 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 Programming Examples M
38. 260 270 INITIALIZE INTERFACE AND OSCILLOSCOPE 280 290 Initialize 300 ASSIGN Scope TO 707 System address 310 ASSIGN Isc TO 7 GPIB address 36 33 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 Programming Examples Using Sub routines in a measurement program CLEAR Isc clear GPIB interface OUTPUT Scope SELECT 2 select the oscilloscope OUTPUT Scope RST set oscilloscope to default config OUTPUT Scope AUTOSCALE AUTOSCALE OUTPUT Scope SYST HEADER OFF turn headers off CLEAR SCREEN clear screen RETURN IDIGITIZE waveform to acquire data and stop oscilloscope for further measurement Measurement is NOT displayed on the front panel Get waveform OUTPUT Scope WAVEFORM SOURCE CHAN1 set source to channel 1 OUTPUT Scope DIGITIZE Imacro to acquire data amp stop RETURN have oscilloscope do a frequency measurement and read results into computer Measure OUTPUT Scope MEASURE FREQUENCY IFREQUENCY query ENTER Scope Value read from oscilloscope PRINT FREQUENCY Value Hz OUTPUT Scope MEASURE VPP Vpp query ENTER Scope Value PRINT Vpp Value V RETURN END 36 34 Index CLS command 8 5 ESE command 8 6 ESR command 8 7 DN command 8 9 ST command 8 9 OPC command 8 11 OPT command 8 12 PRE c
39. 27 5 STARt 9 23 ECL 29 5 STOP 9 24 FORMat 35 10 STORe 16 17 NSert 30 5 30 6 STORe CONFig 11 19 LABel 30 7 SWAVeform 18 4 LEVel 34 8 34 9 SYMBol 25 4 LOGic 34 10 SYStem DATA 10 5 26 2 26 4 MINus 30 8 SYStem SETup 10 11 26 2 26 15 MODE 33 5 34 11 TAG 16 18 MSTats 31 8 TAKenbranch 16 19 18 9 OAUTo 31 9 TCONtrol 16 20 22 19 OFFset 29 6 TERM 16 21 22 20 OTIMe 31 10 TFORmat 21 4 OVERIay 30 8 THReshold 15 18 21 8 PATH 34 12 TIMER 16 22 22 21 PLUS 30 9 TLISt 24 7 PROBe 29 7 TPOSition 16 23 18 10 22 22 23 20 RANGe 29 8 33 6 TREE 12 9 RECord 35 12 TTL 29 9 REMove 30 9 30 10 TYPE 13 10 28 4 RUNTII 31 11 VAXis 19 7 SHOW 31 12 WIDTh 25 8 SOURce 34 13 35 12 WLISt 14 4 TMODe 31 14 XAUTo 31 18 TTL 29 9 XCONdition 23 22 24 18 TYPE 28 4 28 5 XPATtern 17 20 23 23 24 19 VMODe 31 15 XSEarch 17 21 23 24 24 20 XAUTo 31 18 XTAG 17 22 24 22 XTIMe 14 11 23 25 31 19 XTIMe 31 19 31 20 Common commands 1 9 4 6 8 2 Index 2 Index Communication 1 3 compare program example 36 9 COMPare selector 20 4 COMPare Subsystem 20 1 20 3 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 20 8 20 9 20 10 20 11 20 12 20 13 Complex qualifier 16 11 22 11 Compound commands 1 8 CONDition 34 5 34 6 CONDition 34 6 Configuration file 1 4 CONNect 30 5 connect dots 30 5 CONNect 30 5 Controller mode 2 3 Controllers 1 3 Conventions 4 5
40. 29 5 inrange_greater than 31 5 inrange_less than 31 5 Sert 30 5 30 6 Sert command 12 7 14 6 18 8 23 10 nstruction headers 1 6 nstruction parameters 1 7 nstruction syntax 1 5 nstruction terminator 1 7 nstructions 1 5 nstrument address 2 4 nterface capabilities 2 3 RS 232C 3 9 nterface clear 2 6 nterface code GPIB 2 4 nterface selectcode RS 232C 3 10 NTermodule subsystem 12 2 nternal errors 7 4 K Keyword data 1 13 Keywords 4 3 L LABel 30 7 LABel command query 15 7 15 8 21 6 label string 30 7 LABel 30 7 label_id 30 4 label_string 30 4 LCL 6 6 LER command 9 11 less than_argument 31 5 level 31 5 34 8 34 9 LEVel 34 9 LEVelarm command query 13 6 LINE command query 14 7 17 9 20 10 24 9 Linefeed 1 7 4 5 LOAD CONFig command 11 14 LOAD IASSembler command 11 15 Local 2 5 Local lockout 2 5 LOCKout command 3 11 9 12 LOGic 34 10 logic pattern 34 5 LOGic 34 10 Longform 1 11 LONGform command 1 16 10 9 Lowercase 1 11 M Machine selector 13 4 MACHine Subsystem 13 1 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 Mainframe commands 9 2 Marker data 31 12 marker placement 31 18 MARKer Subsystem 31 2 32 2 marker to center 31 8 marker_time 31 5 MASTer command query 15 9 MAV 6 4 maximum voltage measurement 32 12 measurement complete program example 36 21 Measurement parameters Falltime 32 2 Frequency 32 2 ega
41. 31 13 TMINimum 17 18 23 20 24 17 31 13 TMINimum 31 13 TMODe 31 14 TPOSition 16 24 18 11 22 22 23 21 TREE 12 9 TTIMe 12 10 TYPE 13 10 28 5 35 13 TYPE 28 5 35 13 UPLoad 11 20 VALid 35 14 VALid 35 14 VAMPlitude 32 11 VAMPlitude 32 11 23 16 29 8 33 6 VAXis 19 7 RANGe 29 8 33 6 VBASe 32 11 RECord 35 12 VBASe 32 11 RECord 35 12 VMAX 32 12 REName 13 8 VMAX 32 12 RESource 13 9 VMIN 32 12 RISetime 32 9 VMIN 32 12 RISetime 32 9 VMODe 31 15 RMODe 9 19 VOTime 31 16 RUNTIL 17 16 20 13 23 17 24 15 31 11 VPP 32 13 RUNTIP 31 11 VPP 32 13 SELect 9 21 VRUNS 17 18 23 21 24 17 31 16 SEQuence 16 16 22 17 VRUNS 31 16 SETColor 9 22 VTOP 32 13 SETup 10 12 26 16 VTOP 32 13 SKEW 12 8 VXTime 31 17 SLAVe 15 15 XAUTo 31 18 LOPe 34 13 XAUTo 31 18 SLOPe 34 13 XCONdition 23 22 24 18 SOURce 32 10 34 13 35 13 Xincrement 35 15 SOURce 32 10 34 13 35 13 XORigin 35 16 SPERiod 22 18 23 18 35 13 XORigin 35 16 SPERiod 35 13 XOTag 17 19 24 18 STORe 16 17 XOTime 14 10 17 19 23 22 24 19 Index 6 Index 31 19 XOTime 31 19 XPATtern 17 20 23 23 24 20 Xreference 35 16 XREFerence 35 16 XSEarch 17 21 23 24 24 21 XSTate 14 11 17 22 24 21 XTAG 17 23 24 22 XTIMe 14 12 23 25 XTIMe 31 20 XVOLt 31 17 YINCrement 35 17 YINCrement 35 17 YORigin 35 17 YORigin 35 17 YREFerence 35 18 YREFerence 35 18 Query errors
42. 8 11 OPT 8 12 PRE 8 13 SRE 8 15 STB 8 16 checking for measurement complete 36 21 TST 8 18 compare 36 9 getting ASCII data with PRINt ALL query 36 24 sending queries to the logic analyzer 36 22 ACQMode 21 5 state analyzer 36 5 SYSTem DATA command 36 17 SYSTem DATA query 36 17 SYSTem SETup command 36 14 SYSTem SETup query 36 14 iming analyzer 36 3 ransferring configuration to analyzer 36 14 ransferring configuration to the controller 36 14 ransferring setup and data to the analyzer 36 17 ransferring setup and data to the controller 36 17 ransferring waveform data 36 28 36 30 using AUTOscale and the MEASure ALL Query 36 32 Using Sub routines 36 33 Program examples 4 16 36 2 Program message syntax 1 5 Program message terminator 1 7 Program syntax 1 5 Programming conventions 4 5 Protocol 3 9 5 4 ABVolt 31 7 ACCumulate 18 5 19 5 23 7 30 4 30 7 ACCumulate 30 4 ACQuisition 16 9 22 9 ALL 32 5 ALL 32 5 ARM 13 5 ASSign 13 6 AUToload 11 8 AVOLt 31 6 BEEPer 9 6 BRANch 16 11 22 11 BVOLt 31 8 CAPability 9 7 CATalog 11 9 CESE 9 9 CESR 9 10 CLOCK 15 7 CMASk 20 6 COLumn 17 8 24 8 CONDition 34 6 CONDition 34 6 CONNect 30 5 CONNect 30 5 COUNt 28 4 COUNt 28 4 35 9 COUPling 29 5 Index 5 Index DATA 10 6 17 9 20 8 24 9 26 5 35 9 DATA 35 9 DELay 14 5 18 7 23 10 33 4 34 7 DELay 33 4 34 7 EOI
43. 970 980 The compare range is now from line 0 to 508 990 1000 KKK KK KK KK KK KK KEK KK KK KEK KK KK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 1010 Change the Glitch jumper settings on the training board so that the 1020 data changes reacquire the data and compare which states are different 1030 PRINT Change the glitch jumper settings on the training board so that the 1040 PRINT data changes reacquire the data and compare which states are different 1050 1060 PRINT Press CONTINUE when you have finished changing the jumper 1070 1080 PAUSE 1090 1100 KKK KK KK KK KK KK KEK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KEK KK KEK KEK KEK KK KEK KEK KEK KK KEK KK KK KK KEK 1110 Start the logic analyzer to acquire new data and then stop it to compare 1120 the data When the acquistion is stopped the Compare Listing Menu will 1130 be displayed 1140 1150 OUTPUT 707 START 1160 OUTPUT 707 STOP 1170 OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 10 1180 1190 KKK KK KK KK KK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1200 Dimension strings in which the compare find query COMPARE FIND 36 11 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1
44. Interface Capabilities Interface Capabilities The baud rate stopbits parity protocol and databits must be configured exactly the same for both the controller and the logic analyzer to properly communicate over the RS 232C bus The RS 232C interface capabilities of the 1660 series logic analyzers are listed below e Baud Rate 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19 2k e Stop Bits 1 1 5 or2 e Parity None Odd or Even e Protocol None or XON XOFF e Data Bits 8 Protocol NONE With a three wire interface selecting NONE for the protocol does not allow the sending or receiving device to control dataflow No control over the data flow increases the possibility of missing data or transferring incomplete data With an extended hardwire interface selecting NONE allows a hardware handshake to occur With hardware handshake the hardware signals control dataflow XON XOFF XON XOFF stands for Transmit On Transmit Off With this mode the receiver controller or logic analyzer controls dataflow and can request that the sender logic analyzer or controller stop dataflow By sending XOFF ASCII 19 over its transmit data line the receiver requests that the sender disables data transmission A subsequent XON ASCII 17 allows the sending device to resume data transmission Data Bits Data bits are the number of bits sent and received per character that represent the binary code of that character Characters consist of ei
45. MACHINEI1 SLIST TMAXIMUM 17 17 Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt Example SLISt Subsystem TMINimum TMINimum MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O Markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMINimum time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST TMINIMUM VRUNs MACHine 1 2 SLISt VRUNs The VRUNSs query returns the number of valid runs and total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 SLISt VRUNs lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt lt NL gt zero or positive integer zero or positive integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST VRUNS 17 18 Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt XO states Example Query Returned Format XO time XO states Example SLISt Subsystem XOTag XOTag MACHine 1 2 SLISt X0Tag The XOTag query returns the time from the X to O markers when the marker mode is time or number of states from the X to O markers when the marker mode is state If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 If there is no data in the state mode the query returns 32767 MACHine
46. MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XCONdition ENTering EXITing The XCONdition command specifies where the X marker is placed The X marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the XPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XCONDITION ENTERING MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XCONdition The XCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XCONDITION XOTime MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X marker to the O marker If data is not valid the query returns 9 9537 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XOTime lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XOTIME 23 22 Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem XPATtern XPATtern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The XPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the X marker which is then used with the XSEarch criteria and XCONdition when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several iterations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In
47. Pod6 Pod Pod Pod3 Pod2 Pod 1 unused 1 also unused in the 1661A 1662A and 1663A 2 also unused in the 1662A and 1663A 3 also unused in the 1663A Example xx10 0000 0001 111x indicates pods 1 through 4 are assigned to this analyzer x unused bit 25 1 byte This byte returns which chip is used to store the time or state tags when an unassigned pod is available to store tag data This chip is available in state data mode with an unassigned pod and state or time tags on Byte 21 2 in this mode 26 7 Byte Position 26 1 also unused in the 1663A DATA and SETup Commands Data Preamble Description 1 byte Master chip for this analyzer This decimal value returns which chip s time tag data is valid in a non transitional mode for example state with time tags 5 pods 1 and 2 2 pods 7 and g 4 pods 3 and 4 1 unused 3 pods 5 and 6 0 unused 1 nochip 2 also unused in the 1662A and 1663A 3 also unused in the 1661A 1662A and 1663A 27 33 Example 00000000 00000000 H H 50 51 59 6 bytes Unused 8 bytes A decimal integer representing sample period in picoseconds timing only The following 64 bits in binary would equal 8 000 picoseconds or 8 nanoseconds 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000 8 bytes Unused 1 byte Tag type for state only in one of the following decimal values 0 off 1 time tags 2 stat
48. STATUS BYTE REGISTER STB PARALLEL POLL ENABLE REGISTER PRE PRE 16509 BL20 8 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Common Commands OPC Operation Complete OPC Operation Complete OPC The OPC command will cause the instrument to set the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending device operations have finished The commands which affect this bit are the overlapped commands An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress The overlapped commands for the 1660 series logic analyzers are STARt and STOP OUTPUT XXX OPC OPC The OPC query places an ASCII 1 in the output queue when all pending device operations have been completed 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX OPC Query Returned Format lt option gt lt module gt Example Common Commands OPT Option Identification OPT Option Identification OPT The OPT query identifies the software installed in the 1660 series logic analyzer This query returns nine parameters The first parameter indicates whether you are in the system The next two parameters indicate any software options installed and the next parameter indicates whether intermodule is available for the system The last five parameters list the installed softwa
49. SYMBol Subsystem Syntax Diagram 25 3 SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol Table 25 1 SYMBol Parameter Values Parameter Values label_name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters symbol_name string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters pattern_value B O 1 x 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 start value B O 1 8 amp 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ol l2 sjals e 7 s ls stop value B O 1 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 width value integer from 1 to 16 SYMBol Selector MACHine 1 2 SYMBol EE The SYMBol selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the commands used to create symbols It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL BASE DATA BINARY 25 4 Command lt label_name gt lt base_value gt Example SYMBol Subsystem BASE BASE MACHine 1 2 SYMBol BASE label name base value The BASE command sets the base in which symbols for the specified label will be displayed in the symbol menu It also specifies the base in which the symbol offsets are displayed when symbols are used BINary is not available
50. clock when both are used 1 2 3 a 5 6 7 8 1 through 8 for the HP 1660A 1 through 6 for the HP 16614 1 through 4 for the HP 1662A and 1 through 2 for the HP 1663A MASTer SLAVe DEMultiplex OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT CLOCK2 MASTER 15 6 Query Returned Format Example Command lt name gt SFORmat Subsystem LABel MACHine 1 2 SFORmat CLOCk lt N gt The CLOCK query returns the current clocking mode for a given pod MACHine 1 2 SFORmat CLOCK lt N gt clock mode gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT CLOCK2 LABel MACHine 1 2 SFORmat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt clock bits upper bits lower bits upper bits lower bits The LABel command allows you to specify polarity and assign channels to new or existing labels If the specified label name does not match an existing label name a new label will be created The order of the pod specification parameters is significant The first one listed will match the highest numbered pod assigned to the machine you re using Each pod specification after that is assigned to the next highest numbered pod This way they match the left to right descending order of the pods you see on the Format display Not including enough pod specifications results in the lowest numbered pod s being assigned a value of zero all channels excluded If you include more pod specifications than there are pods f
51. e AUToscale e DIGitize 27 2 Oscilloscope Root Level Commands AUToscale Figure 27 1 DIGitize 16530 5X09 Root Level Command Syntax Diagram AUToscale Command AUToscale The AUToscale command causes the oscilloscope to automatically select the vertical sensitivity vertical offset trigger source trigger level and timebase settings for optimum viewing of any input signals The trigger source is the lowest channel on which the trigger was found If no trigger is found the oscilloscope defaults to auto trigger The display window configuration is not altered by AUToscale Example OUTPUT XXX AUTOSCALE To demonstrate a quick oscilloscope setup we will use the AC CAL OUTPUT signal available at the rear panel of the card This square wave is normally used for calibration and probe compensation Connect the AC CAL OUTPUT signal from the rear panel output connector to CHAN 1 also on the rear panel Ensure that the mainframe is connected to a controller Enter the program listed on the next page and execute it 27 3 Oscilloscope Root Level Commands AUToscale Example 10 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 2 20 OUTPUT XXX AUTOSCALE 25 WAIT 5 30 DIM Me 200 40 OUTPUT MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL1 ALL 50 ENTER XXX Me 60 PRINT Me 70 END The three Xs XXX after the OUTPUT and ENTER statements in the above example refer to the device address required for programming over either GPIB or RS 232
52. lt label gt 30 5 lt module number gt lt label gt Example Command lt slot no gt lt label gt lt bit id gt Example DISPlay Subsystem INSert Always 2 string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY INSERT C1 To insert a waveform from a logic analyzer module to the oscilloscope display DISPlay INSert slot no gt lt label gt lt bit id gt card slot number of the module from which waveform is to be taken always 1 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters enclosed by single quotes integer from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY INSERT 1 WAVE 10 For a complete explanation of the label name and the bit id for the logic analyzer refer to chapter 15 SFORmat Subsystem 30 6 Command lt N gt lt label_str gt Example Query Returned Format Example DISPlay Subsystem LABel LABel DISPlay LABel CHANnel lt N gt lt label_string gt The LABel command is used to assign a label string to an oscilloscope channel For single channel traces the label string up to five characters appears on the left of the waveform area of the display Note that the label string cannot be used in place of the channel number when programming the oscilloscope module an integer from 1to 2 a string of up to five characters enclosed in single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY LABEL CHANNEL1 CLK
53. lt time gt Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem CONDition When LT less than is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELAY command The first event in the sequence will occur when the specified pattern is true for a time less than that indicated by the trigger specification All other pattern true occurrences in the event count are independent of the pattern duration time real number between 20 ns and 160 ms OUTPUT XXX TRIG COND ENT The oscilloscope cannot be programmed for a pattern duration GT LT or RANge trigger if it is being armed by another module via an IMB Intermodule Bus measurement TRIGger CONDition The CONDition query returns the present condition TRIGger CONDition ENTer EXIT GT time LT time RANGe time lt time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG COND 34 6 Command lt count gt Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem DELay DELay TRIGger DELay EVENt lt count gt The DELay command is used to specify the number of events at which trigger occurs The time delay see TIMe DELay is counted after the events delay The DELay command cannot be used in the IMMediate trigger mode integer from
54. state_tag_qualifier timer_num timer_value term_id pattern qualifier post store time val Values qualifier integer from 1 to last level qualifier number from 1 to 1048575 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string consisting of R F E G R F and E represents rising falling either edge respectively G represents a glitch and a period represents a don t care B O 1 890 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 fol 2 3 B 0 1 2 2 8 9 A B Cc D E F N als le 7 s s 0 0 1 H 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 integer from 1 to 10 8 9 A B c D E F w HA uo OY Q integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels lt qualifier gt lt qualifier gt 112 400 ns to 500 seconds a B C D B F G H zg B ol lx 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 14J 5 e 7 8 9 see Qualifier on page 22 6 integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage integer from 0 to 500 representing seconds 22 5 lt qualifier gt lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionla_ term gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionlb_ term gt lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expression2d gt lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt expression2h gt TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Qualifier
55. 01660509 Mmemory Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram Continued 11 6 Table 11 1 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory Parameter Values Parameter auto_file msus name description type block data ia name new name module Values A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters An integer refer to table 11 2 Data in IEEE 488 2 format A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN An integer 0 through 2 11 7 Command lt auto_file gt lt msus gt Examples Returned Format MMEMory Subsystem AUToload AUToload MMEMory AUToload OFF O lt auto_file gt lt ms
56. 1 2 SLISt X0Tag XO time XO states NL real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XOTAG XOTime MACHine 1 2 SLISt XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X to O markers when the marker mode is time or number of states from the X to O markers when the marker mode is state If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 If there is no data in the state mode the query returns 32767 MACHine 1 2 SLISt X0Time XO time XO states NL real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XOTIME 17 19 lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Examples Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem XPATtern XPATtern MACHine 1 2 SLISt XPATtern label name label pattern The XPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the X Marker which is then used with the XSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several invocations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and puc 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the 1abel pattern parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string
57. 1 to 32000 OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER DELAY 5 TRIGger DELay The DELay query returns the current trigger events count TRIGger DELay lt count gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG DEL 34 7 Command lt N gt lt value gt Example TRIGger Subsystem LEVel LEVel For EDGE trigger mode TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANne1 lt N gt LEVel lt value gt For PATTern trigger mode TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt LEVel lt value gt The LEVel command sets the trigger level voltage for the selected source or path This command cannot be used in the IMMediate trigger mode In EDGE trigger mode the SOURce command is used in PATTern mode the trigger PATH is used for the trigger level source The LEVel command in PATTern trigger mode sets the high low threshold for the pattern An integer from 1 or 2 Trigger level in volts For EDGE trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIG MODE EDGE SOUR CHAN1 LEV 1 0 For PATTern trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIG MODE PATTERN PATH CHANNEL2 LEVEL 1 0 34 8 Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem LEVel For EDGE trigger mode TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt LEVel For PATTern trigger mode TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt LEVel The LEVel query returns the trigger level for the current path or source TRIGger LEVel lt value gt lt NL gt For EDGE trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TR
58. 100 poo kckckckckckck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 36 22 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 Programming Examples Sending queries to the logic analyzer Send the query In this example the MENU query is sent All queries except the SYSTem DATA and SYSTem SETup can be sent with this program OUTPUT 707 MENU poockckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck KEK The two lines that follow transfer the query response from the query buffer to the controller and then print the response ENTER 707 Query PRINT Query END 36 23 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 Programming Examples Getting ASCII Data with PRINt ALL Query Getting ASCII Data with PRINt ALL Query This program example shows you how to get ASCII data from a state listing usingthe PRINt ALL query There are two things you must keep in mind e You must select the logic analyzer which is always SELECT 1 forthe 1660 series logic analyzers e Youmust select the proper menu The only menus that allow you to use the PRINt ALL query are the listing menus and the disk menu ASCII DATA This program gets STATE Listi
59. 20 22 21 22 22 TWAVeform 23 1 23 3 23 4 23 5 23 6 23 7 23 8 23 9 23 10 23 11 23 12 23 13 23 14 23 15 23 16 23 17 23 18 23 19 23 20 23 21 23 22 23 23 23 24 23 25 WAVeform 35 1 35 2 35 3 35 4 35 5 35 6 35 7 35 8 35 9 35 10 35 11 35 12 35 13 35 14 35 15 35 16 35 17 35 18 WLISt 14 1 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 14 12 Subsystem commands 4 6 subtracting waveforms 30 8 Suffix multiplier 5 9 Suffix units 5 10 SWAVeform selector 18 4 SWAVeform Subsystem 18 1 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 18 11 SYMBol selector 25 4 SYMBol Subsystem 25 1 25 3 25 4 25 5 25 6 25 7 25 8 Syntax diagram Common commands 8 4 gt COMPare Subsystem 20 3 INTermodule subsystem 12 3 12 4 MACHine Subsystem 13 3 Mainframe commands 9 3 9 4 MMEMory subsystem 11 4 11 5 11 7 SCHart Subsystem 19 3 SFORmat Subsystem 15 3 SLISt Subsystem 17 3 STRigger Subsystem 16 3 SWAVeform Subsystem 18 3 SYMBol Subsystem 25 3 SYSTem subsystem 10 3 TFORmat Subsystem 21 3 TLISt Subsystem 24 3 TTRigger Subsystem 22 3 TWAVeform Subsystem 23 4 23 5 WLISt Subsystem 14 3 Syntax diagrams IEEE 488 2 5 5 System commands 4 6 SYSTem subsystem 10 2 SYSTem DATA 26 4 26 5 SYSTem DATA command program example 36 17 SYSTem DATA query program example 36 17 SYStem SETup 26 15 26 16 SYSTem SETup command pro gram example 36 14 SYSTem SE
60. 23 14 24 12 OSTate query 14 8 17 13 24 13 OTAG command query 17 13 24 14 OTIMe 31 6 31 7 31 10 OTIMe command query 14 8 23 15 OTIMe 31 10 Output buffer 1 10 Output queue 5 3 OUTPUT statement 1 3 27 4 outrange greater than 31 5 outrange less than 31 5 Overlapped command 8 11 8 19 9 23 9 24 Overlapped commands 4 4 OVERIay 30 8 OVERIay command query 17 14 overlaying waveforms 30 8 OVERshoot 32 7 overshoot measurement 32 7 OVERshoot 32 7 OVOLt 31 16 P PACK command 11 17 Parameter syntax rules 1 12 Parameters 1 7 Parity 3 9 Parse tree 5 8 Parser 5 3 PATH 34 12 PATH 34 12 PATTern command 25 6 pattern duration 34 5 PATTern trigger 34 2 34 11 PATTern Trigger Mode 34 2 peak to peak voltage measurement 32 13 PERiod 32 8 period measurement 32 8 PERiod 32 8 PLUS 30 9 POINts 35 10 points on screen 35 10 POINts 35 10 PON 6 5 positive pulse width measurement 32 9 preamble 35 2 35 11 Preamble description 26 6 PREamble 35 11 preset user 29 5 29 9 PREShoot 32 8 preshoot measurement 32 8 PREShoot 32 8 PRINt command 10 10 Printer mode 2 3 Printing to the disk 36 27 PROBe 29 7 PROBe 29 7 probe argument 29 4 program example None 3 9 XON XOFF 3 9 Protocol exceptions 5 5 Protocols 5 3 PURGe command 11 17 PWIDth 32 9 PWIDth 32 9 Q Query 1 6 1 10 1 16 ESE 8 6 ESR 8 7 IDN 8 9 IST 8 9 OPC
61. 29 5 29 6 29 7 29 8 29 9 COMPare 20 2 DISPlay 30 1 30 2 30 3 30 4 30 5 30 6 30 7 30 8 30 9 30 10 Index 7 Index NTermodule 12 2 MACHine 13 2 MARKer 31 1 31 2 31 3 31 4 31 5 31 6 31 7 31 8 31 9 31 10 31 11 12 31 13 31 14 31 15 31 16 31 17 31 18 31 19 31 20 MEASure 32 1 32 2 32 3 32 4 32 5 32 6 32 7 32 8 32 9 32 10 32 11 32 12 32 13 MMEMory 11 2 SCHart 19 2 SFORmat 15 1 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 17 15 18 w nen I SLISt 17 1 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 10 17 11 17 12 17 13 17 14 17 15 17 16 17 17 17 18 17 19 17 20 17 21 17 22 11 23 STRigger STRace 16 1 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 16 14 16 15 16 16 16 17 16 18 16 19 16 20 16 21 16 22 16 23 16 24 SWAVeform 18 2 SYMBol 25 1 25 3 25 4 25 5 25 6 25 7 25 8 SYSTem 10 2 TFORmat 21 1 21 3 21 4 21 5 21 6 21 7 21 8 TIMebase 33 1 33 2 33 3 33 4 33 5 33 6 TLISt 24 1 24 3 24 4 24 5 24 6 24 7 24 8 24 9 24 10 24 11 24 12 24 13 24 14 24 15 24 16 24 17 24 18 24 19 24 20 24 21 24 22 TRIGger 34 1 34 2 34 3 34 4 34 5 34 6 34 7 34 8 34 9 34 10 34 11 34 12 34 13 TTRigger TTRace 22 1 22 3 22 4 22 5 22 6 22 7 22 8 22 9 22 10 22 11 22 12 22 13 22 14 22 15 22 16 22 17 22 18 22 19 22
62. 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer configuration ockkek sek ek ek ke ke ee see x SEND THE SETUP COMMAND kk RK kk kk kk kk ek kk ke ke de ke ee Send the Setup command I OUTPUT Comm USING ff 15A SYSTEM SETUP PRINT SYSTEM SETUP command has been sent PAUSE I kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SEND THE BLOCK SETUP ck ck ce ce ce ce ce ce e ec e ce kx ck ck kk ke ke kx ko ck ko kk Send the block setup header to the logic analyzer in the proper format I Byte LEN VALS Numbytes OUTPUT Comm USING B Byte 48 IF Byte 1 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING A VALS Numbytes F Byte 2 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING i AA VAL Numbytes F Byte 3 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING AAA VALS Numbytes F Byte 4 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING i AAAA VAL Numbytes Byte 5 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING AAAAA VALS Numbytes F Byte 6 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING i AAAAAA VAL Numbytes F Byte 7 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING it AAAAAAA VAL Numbytes F Byte 8 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING i AAAAAAAA VAL Numbytes Fd HE oH H H H H d okckckckckek KK e ke e ke kok SAVE BUFFER POINTERS k kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk k Save the transfer buffer pointer so it can be restored after the transfer STATUS GBuff
63. 9 11 ERRor 10 7 FALLtime 32 6 FALLtime 32 6 FIND 16 14 20 9 22 14 FORMat 35 10 FORMat 35 10 FREQuency 32 6 FREQuency 32 6 FTIMe 12 6 GLEDge 22 15 HAXis 19 6 HEADer 10 8 NPort 12 7 LABel 15 8 21 7 LABel 30 7 LER 9 11 LEVel 34 9 LEVel 34 9 LEVelarm 13 6 LINE 14 7 17 10 20 10 24 10 LOCKout 9 12 LOGic 34 10 LOGic 34 10 LONGform 10 9 MASTer 15 9 MENU 9 14 MESE 9 14 MESR 9 16 MMODe 17 10 23 11 24 10 31 14 31 15 MODE 33 5 34 11 MODE 33 5 34 11 MSI 11 16 MSTats 31 9 MSTats 31 9 AME 13 7 WIDth 32 7 WIDth 32 7 OAUTo 31 10 OAUTo 31 10 OCONdition 23 12 24 11 OFFset 29 6 OPATtern 17 11 23 13 24 12 OSEarch 17 12 23 14 24 13 OSTate 14 8 17 13 24 13 OTAG 17 14 24 14 OTIMe 14 9 23 15 31 10 OTIMe 31 10 OVERshoot 32 7 OVERshoot 32 7 OVOLt 31 7 31 16 PATH 34 12 PATH 34 12 PERiod 32 8 PERiod 32 8 POINts 35 10 POINts 35 10 PREamble 35 11 PREamble 35 11 PREShoot 32 8 PREShoot 32 8 PRINt 10 10 PROBe 29 7 PROBe 29 7 PWIDth 32 9 PWIDth 32 9 RANGe 14 9 16 15 18 9 20 11 22 16 SYSTem DATA 10 6 26 5 SYStem SETup 10 12 26 16 TAG 16 18 TAKenbranch 16 19 18 10 TAVerage 17 17 23 19 24 16 31 12 TAVerage 31 12 TCONtrol 16 20 22 19 TERM 16 22 22 21 THReshold 15 18 21 8 TIMER 16 23 22 21 TMAXimum 17 17 23 19 24 16
64. A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 4 5 e6 7 8 9 p OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM A DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM B ABC HHBXXXX1101 16 21 Returned Format Example Command time value Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TIMER MACHine 1 2 STRigger TERM term id label name The TERM query returns the specification of the term specified by term identification and label name MACHine 1 2 STRAce TERM lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM B DATA TIMER MACHine 1 2 STRigger TIMER 1 2 time value The TIMER command sets the time value for the specified timer The limits of the timer are 400 ns to 500 seconds in 16 ns to 500 us increments The increment value varies with the time value of the specified timer There are two timers and they are independently available for either machine Neither timer can be assigned to both machines simultaneously A real number from 400 ns to 500 seconds in increments which vary from 16 ns to 500 us OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TIMER1 100E 6 16 22 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Command lt poststore gt Examples STRigger STRace Subsystem TPOSition MACHine 1 2 STRigger TIMER 1 2 The TIMER query returns the current time value for the specified timer MACHine 1 2 S
65. COPY command 11 10 20 6 COUNt 28 3 28 4 35 9 COUNt 28 4 35 9 count_argument 28 3 count_number 34 4 COUPlng 29 4 COUPlng 29 5 D DATA 10 5 26 4 35 9 command 10 5 State no tags 26 10 26 11 data acquisition 28 3 Data acquisition type 35 2 Data and Setup Commands 26 1 26 3 26 4 26 5 26 6 26 7 26 8 26 9 26 10 26 11 26 12 26 13 26 14 26 15 26 16 26 17 data averaging 35 3 Data bits 3 9 8 Bit mode 3 9 Data block Analyzer 1 data 26 7 Analyzer 2 data 26 9 Data preamble 26 6 Section data 26 6 Section header 26 6 Data Carrier Detect DCD 3 5 DATA command query 10 5 20 7 20 8 data conversion 35 6 35 7 35 8 Data mode 2 3 Data preamble 26 6 26 7 26 8 26 9 DATA query 17 9 24 9 Data Terminal Equipment 3 3 Data Terminal Ready DTR 3 5 data to time conversion 35 6 data transfer 35 2 35 12 data transfer format 35 4 35 5 data transmission mode 35 10 data value to trigger point conversion 35 6 DATA 35 9 DataCommunications Equipment 3 3 DataSet Ready DSR 3 5 DCE 3 3 DCL 2 6 DDE 6 5 Definite length block response data 1 20 DELay 33 4 34 7 DELay command query 14 5 18 7 23 9 DELay 33 4 34 7 delay_argument 33 3 DELete command 12 5 delta voltage measurement 31 7 Device address 1 6 GPIB 2 4 RS 232C 3 10 Device clear 2 6 Device dependent errors 7 3 DIGitize 27 5 display of waveforms 30 5 DISPlay Subsystem 30 2 Documentation conventions
66. Command lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt Example Mainframe Commands RTC Real time Clock RMODe The query returns the current setting RMODe SINGle REPetitive lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX RMODE RTC Real time Clock RTC lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt DEFault The real time clock command allows you to set the real time clock to the current date and time The DEFault option sets the real time clock to 01 January 1990 12 00 00 24 hour format integer from 1 to 31 integer from 1 to 12 integer from 1990 to 2089 integer from 0 to 23 integer from 0 to 59 integer from 0 to 59 This example sets the real time clock for 1 January 1992 20 00 00 8 PM OUTPUT XXX RTC 1 1 1992 20 0 0 Query Returned Format Example Command lt module gt Example Mainframe Commands SELect RTC The RTC query returns the real time clock setting RTC lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt OUTPUT XXX RTC SELect SELect module The SELect command selects which module or system will have parser control SELect defaults to System 0 at power up The appropriate module or system must be selected before any module or system specific commands can be sent SELECT 0 selects the System SELECT 1 selects the logic
67. Description 26 6 Acquisition Data Description 26 10 Time Tag Data Description 26 12 Glitch Data Description 26 14 SYSTem SETup 26 15 RTC_INFO Section Description 26 17 Oscilloscope Commands Oscilloscope Root Level Commands AUToscale 27 3 DIGitize 27 5 ACQuire Subsystem COUNt 28 4 TYPE 28 4 CHANnel Subsystem COUPling 29 4 ECL 29 5 OFFSet 29 6 PROBe 29 7 RANGe 29 8 TTL 29 9 DISPlay Subsystem ACCumulate 30 4 CONNect 30 5 INSert 30 5 Contents 11 31 32 Contents LABel 30 7 MINus 30 8 OVERlay 30 8 PLUS 30 9 REMove 30 9 MARKer Subsystem AVOLt 31 6 ABVolt 31 7 BVOLt 31 7 CENTer 31 8 MSTats 31 8 OAUTo 31 9 OTIMe 31 10 RUNTi 31 11 SHOW 31 12 TAVerage 31 12 TMAXimum 31 13 TMINimum 31 13 TMODe 31 14 VMODe 31 15 VOTime 31 16 VRUNs 31 16 VXTime 31 17 XAUTo 31 18 XOTime 31 19 XTIMe 31 19 MEASure Subsystem ALL 32 5 FALLtime 32 6 FREQuency 32 6 NWIDth 32 7 OVERshoot 32 7 PERiod 32 8 PREShoot 32 8 Contents 12 33 34 35 PWIDth 32 9 RISetime 32 9 SOURce 32 10 VAMPlitude 32 11 VBASe 32 11 VMAX 32 12 VMIN 32 12 VPP 32 13 VTOP 32 13 TIMebase Subsystem DELay 33 4 MODE 33 5 RANGe 33 6 TRIGger Subsystem CONDition 34 5 DELay 34 7 LEVel 34 8 LOGic 34 10 MODE 34 11 PATH 34 12 SLOPe 34 12 SOURce 34 13 WAVeform Subsystem Format for Data Transfer 35 4 Data Conversion 35 6 COUNt 35 9 DATA 35 9 FORMat 35 10 POINts 35 10 PREam
68. Device Clear DC1 DT Device Trigger DTI C Any Controller C0 E Electrical Characteristic E2 Query Returned Format lt ID gt lt assign gt Example Mainframe Commands CARDcage CARDcage CARDcage The CARDcage query returns a series of integers which identify the modules that are installed in the mainframe The returned string is in two parts The first five two digit numbers identify the card type The identification number for the logic analyzer is 32 The identification number for the oscilloscope is 13 A 1 in the first part of the string indicates no card is installed in the slot The five single digit numbers in the second part of the string indicate which slots have cards installed The module assignment for the logic analyzer will always be 1 The second number will contain a 0 unless the oscilloscope module is installed 1660A5 in which case it will return a 1 The possible values for the module assignment are 0 and 1 where 0 indicates the module software is not recognized or not loaded CARDcage lt ID gt lt ID gt lt ID gt lt ID gt lt ID gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt NL gt An integer indicating the card identification number An integer indicating the module assignment OUTPUT XXX CARDCAGE 9 8 Command lt value gt Example Query Returned Format Example Table 9 3 Mainframe Commands
69. ENTER 707 USING 2A Specifier read in 8 ENTER 707 USING 8D Length read in block length I Read and print each file in the directory I FOR I 1 TO Length STEP 51 ENTER 707 USING 51A Files PRINT File NEXT I ENTER 707 USING A Specifier read in final line feed END 36 25 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 Programming Examples Reading the Disk with the CATalog Query Reading the Disk with the CATalog Query This example program uses the CATALOG query without the ALL option to read the catalog of the disk currently in the logic analyzer disk drive However if you do not use the ALL option the query only returns a 51 character field Keep in mind if you use this program with a DOS disk each filename entry will be truncated at 51 characters DISK CATALOG KKKKKK using the CATALOG query DIM Files 100 DIM Specifier s 2 OUTPUT 707 EOI ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG send CATALOG query ENTER 707 USING 2A Specifiers read in 8 ENTER 707 USING 8D Length read in block length I Read and print each file in the directory I FOR I 1 TO Length STEP 51 ENTER 707 USING 51A Files PRINT File NEXT I ENTER 707 USING A Specifier read in final line feed END 36 26 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
70. Es channel_ t VAMP i tude VMAX VMIN VTOP MEASure Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16530 Sx02 MEASure Parameter Values Parameter channel_ Value An integer from 1 to 2 32 4 MEASure Subsystem ALL ALL Query MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt ALL The ALL query makes a set of measurements on the displayed waveform using the selected source lt N gt Aninteger from 1 to Z Returned Format MEASure ALL PERiod real number RISetime real number FALLtime real number FREQuency real number PWIDth real number NWIDth real number VPP real number VAMPlitude real number PREShoot real number OVERshoot real number gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL1 ALL 32 5 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem FALLtime FALLtime MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt FALLtime The FALLtime query makes a fall time measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made between the 90 to the 10 voltage point of the first falling edge displayed on screen MEASure FALLtime lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 time in seconds between the 90 and 10 voltage points of the first falling edge displayed on th
71. FULL Query MACHine 1 2 COMPare RANGe The RANGe query returns the current boundaries for the comparison Returned Format MACHine 1 2 COMPare RANGe FULL PARTial start line stop line NL start line integer from 8191 to 48191 stop line integer from start line to 8191 Example OUTPUT 707 MACHINEI1 COMPARE RANGE 20 11 Command lt value gt COMPare Subsystem RUNTil RUNTII MACHine 1 2 COMPare RUNTil OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt v alue EQUal NEQual The RUNTII run until command allows you to define a stop condition when the trace mode is repetitive Specifying OFF causes the analyzer to make runs until either the display s STOP field is touched or the STOP command is issued There are four conditions based on the time between the X and O markers Using this difference in the condition is effective only when time tags have been turned on see the TAG command in the STRace subsystem These four conditions are as follows e The difference is less than LT some value e The difference is greater than GT some value e The difference is inside some range INRange e The difference is outside some range OUTRange End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 8 ns apart since this is the minimum time resolution of the time tag counter There are two conditions wh
72. If a file extension is not specified one is appended automatically to the file name The PRINT PARTIAL option allows you to specify a START and END state number A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN when the file resides in the present working directory or a string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following forms NNNNNNNN NNN or NAME DIRIFILENAME when the file does not reside in the present working directory An integer specifying a state number This instuctrion prints the screen to the printer OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM PRINT SCREEN This instruction prints all to a file named STATE OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM PRINT ALL DISK STATE This instruction prints partial data to a file named LIST OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM PRINT PARTIAL 9 30 DISK list SYSTem PRINt SCReen ALL The PRINt query sends the screen or listing buffer data over the current CONTROLLER communication interface to the controller 10 10 Command lt block_data gt lt block_length_ specifier gt lt length gt lt section gt lt section_ header gt section data SYSTem Subsystem SETup The print query should NOT be sent with any other command or query on the same command line The print query never returns a header Also since response data from a print query may be sent directly to a printer without modification the data is not returned in block mode Example OUTPUT 7
73. LEVelarm query returns the current sequence level receiving the arming for a specified machine 18 6 Returned Format arm level Example Command machine name gt Example Query Returned Format machine name gt Example MACHine Subsystem MACHine 1 2 LEVelarm arm level NL An integer from 1 to 11 representing sequence level OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 LEVELARM NAME NAME MACHine 1 2 NAME machine name The NAME command allows you to assign a name of up to 10 characters to a particular analyzer machine for easier identification A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME DRAMTEST MACHine 1 2 NAME The NAME query returns the current analyzer name as an ASCII string MACHine 1 2 NAME machine name NL A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME 13 7 Command lt res_id gt new text Example Query Returned Format res id E Sa Example MACHine Subsystem REName REName MACHine 1 2 REName res id new text DEFault The REName command allows you to assign a specific name of up to eight characters to terms A through J Range 1 and 2 and Timer 1 and 2 in the state analyzer In the timing analyzer GLEDge glitch edge 1 and Z can be renamed in addition to the terms available in the state analyzer The DEFault o
74. Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Diagrams Figure 5 1 i GMACHine gt ARM space arm_source _ we ARM Le Assi gn gt space H r pod_ ist M H r ASSIGN Level arm space rJ arm level et gt NAME space rJ mach ine_name M9 NAME Em REName e space mw res_id gt CEY DEFaul t He RENome e space res id m RESource m space res terms M H r RESource TEE space OFF TIMing TYPE 16550502 Example syntax diagram 5 6 Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Syntax Overview This overview is intended to give a quick glance at the syntax defined by IEEE 488 2 It will help you understand many of the things about the syntax you need to know IEEE 488 2 defines the blocks used to build messages which are sent to the instrument A whole string of commands can therefore be broken up into individual components Figure 5 1 is an example syntax diagram and figure 5 2 shows a breakdown of an example program message There are a few key items to notice e A semicolon separates commands from one another Each program message unit serves as a container for one command The program messag
75. N gt lt level gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem AVOLt AVOLt MARKer AVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt The AVOLt command moves the A marker to the specified voltage on the indicated channel An integer from 1to2 the desired marker voltage level ranging from 2 x maximum offset OUTPUT XXX MARKER AVOLT CHANNEL1 2 75 MARKer AVOLt The AVOLt query returns the current voltage and channel selection for the A marker MARKer AVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER AVOLT 31 6 Query Returned Format lt level gt Example Command lt level gt Example MARKer Subsystem ABVolt ABVolt MARKer ABVolt The ABVolt query returns the difference between the A marker voltage and the B marker voltage Vb Va MARKer ABVolt lt level gt lt NL gt level in volts of the B marker minus the A marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER ABVOLT BVOLt MARKer BVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt The BVOLt command moves the B marker to the specified voltage on the indicated channel An integer from 1 to 2 the desired marker voltage level ranging from 2 x maximum offset OUTPUT XXX MARKER BVOLT CHANNEL1 2 75 Query Returned Format Example Command Example Command Example MARKer Subsystem CENTer MARKer BVOLt The BVOLt query return
76. NL lt progrom messoge unit white spoce white spoce DELAY 3 8 ns P dd lt white space gt NL lt program heoder lt progrom Br Seporotor program data gt DELAY 3 8 ns p ME t white space decimal progrom doto suffix progrom dato SP ns lt white space suffix multiplier suffix unit n 16500 BL31 lt program message gt Parse Tree Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Upper Lower Case Equivalence Upper and lower case letters are equivalent The mnemonic SINGLE has the same semantic meaning as the mnemonic single lt white space gt lt white space gt is defined to be one or more characters from the ASCI set of 0 32 decimal excluding 10 decimal NL lt white space gt is used by several instrument listening components of the syntax It is usually optional and can be used to increase the readability of a program Suffix Multiplier The suffix multipliers that the instrument will accept are shown in table 5 1 Table 5 1 lt suffix mult gt Value Mnemonic 1E18 EX 1E15 PE 1E12 T 1E9 G 1E6 MA 1E3 K 1E 3 M 1E 6 U 1E 9 N 1E 12 P 1E 15 F 1E 18 A Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Suffix Unit The suffix units that the instrument will accept are shown in table 5 2 Table 5 2 lt suffix unit gt Suffix Referenced Unit V Volt S Second Status Reporting Introduction Stat
77. REGISTER MESR ENABLE REGISTER MESE LOGICAL OR o OAC mxm m o EVENT REGISTERS ESR V looux OVO rom NOTE UR RQC NOT IMPLEMENTED ENABLE 1 REGISTERS ESE ICAL OR QUEUES O OUTPUT M MESSAGE Q vana 5 lt gt Za c Free onogzm NOD On Z j STB SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE 15500802 REGISTER SRE Status Byte Structures and Concepts 6 3 Status Reporting Event Status Register Event Status Register The Event Status Register is an IEEE 488 2 defined register The bits in this register are latched That is once an event happens which sets a bit that bit will only be cleared if the register is read Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is an 8 bit register Each bit enables the corresponding bit in the status byte to cause a service request The sixth bit does not logically exist and is always returned as a zero To read and write to this register use the SRE and SRE commands Bit Definitions The following mnemonics are used in figure 6 1 and in chapter 8 Common Commands MAV message available Indicates whether there is a response in the output queue ESB event status bit Indicates if any of the conditions in the Standard Event Status Register are set and
78. RMODe RTC RUNTII SELect SEQuence SET SETColor SETHold SETup SHOW SKEW SLAVe SLOPe SOPQual SOURce SPERiod SQUal STARt STOP STORe TAG TAKenbranch TAVerage TCONtro TERM THReshold TIMER TMAXimum TMINimum TMODe Subsystem SFORmat SLISt SWAVeform SYMBol TFORmat TLISt TWAVeform DISPlay MACHine MMEMory MACHine MEASure Mainframe Mainframe COMPare SLISt TLISt TWAVeform MARKer Mainframe STRigger TTRigger COMPare Mainframe SFORmat SYSTem MARKer INTermodule SFORmat TRIGger SFORmat MEASure TRIGger WAVeform TTRigger TWAVeform WAVeform SFORmat Mainframe Mainframe MMEMory STRigger STRigger STRigger SWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform MARKer STRigger TTRigger STRigger TTRigger SFORmat TFORmat STRigger TTRigger SLISt TLISt TWAVeform MARKer SLISt TLISt TWAVeform MARKer MARKer Command TPOSition TREE TTIMe TTL TYPE UPLoad VALid VAMPlitude VAXis VBAse VOLume VRUNs WIDTh XCONdition XOTag X0Time XPATtern XSEarch XSTate XTAG XTIMe Subsystem STRigger SWAVeform TTRigger TWAVeform Intermodule INTermodule CHANnel MACHine ACQuire WAVeform MMEMory WAVeform MEASure SCHart MEASure MMEMory SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SYMBol TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt WLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt Table 4 2 continued P
79. Sending queries to the logic analyzer Getting ASCII data with PRINt All query Reading a disk catalog Printing to the disk using PRINT ALL Transferring waveform data in Byte format Transferring waveform data in Word format Using AUToscale and the MEASure ALL Query Using subroutines in a measurement program 36 2 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 for 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 Programming Examples Making a Timing analyzer measurement Making a Timing analyzer measurement This program sets up the logic analyzer to make a simple timing analyzer measurement This example can be used with E2433 60004 Logic Analyzer Training board to acquire and display the output of the ripple counter It can also be modified to make any timing analyzer measurement KKKKK KK keke eee TIMING ANAI LYZER EXAMPLE kkk kkk kk kk kk kk ke k for the 1660A Logic Analyzer kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Select the module slot in which the logic analyzer is installed Always a 1 for the 1660 series logic analyzers OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Name Machine 1 TIMING configure Machine 1 as a timing analyzer and assign pod 1 to Machine 1 OUTPUT 707 MACH1 NAME TIMING OUTPUT 707 MACH1 TYPE TIMING OUTPUT 707 MACH1 ASSIGN 1
80. TWAVeform INSert module spec label name bit id OVERlay ALL The INSert command allows you to add waveforms to the state waveform display Waveforms are added from top to bottom on the screen When 96 waveforms are present inserting additional waveforms replaces the last waveform Bit numbers are zero based so a label with 8 bits is referenced as bits 0 through 7 Specifying OVERlay causes a composite waveform display of all bits or channels for the specified label If you do not specify the third parameter ALL is assumed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 through 10 unused string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters integer from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM INSERT 1 WAVE 10 23 10 Command Example Query Returned Format marker mode Example TWAVeform Subsystem MMODe MMODe MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MMODe OFF PATTern TIME MSTats The MMODe Marker Mode command selects the mode controlling marker movement and the display of the marker readouts When PATTern is selected the markers will be placed on patterns When TIME is selected the markers move on time In MSTats the markers are placed on patterns but the readouts will be time statistics OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM MMODE TIME MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MMODe The MMODe query returns the current marker mode MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MMODe marker mode NL OFF PATTern TIME MSTats
81. Waveform Channel and Timebase subsystems The Acquire subsystem determines the acquisition type and the average count the Waveform subsystem sets the number of points and format mode for sending waveform data over the remote interface and the Channel and Timebase subsystems set all the X Y parameters Refer to Figure 35 3 for the Waveform Subsystem Syntax Diagram Data Acquisition Types The two acquisition types that may be chosen are Normal or Average Normal Mode In the Normal mode with ACCumulate command OFF the oscilloscope acquires waveform data and then displays the waveform When the oscilloscope takes a new acquisition the previously acquired waveform is erased from the display and replaced by the newly acquired waveform When the ACCumulate is set ON the oscilloscope displays all the waveform acquisitions without erasing the previously acquired waveform 35 2 WAVeform Subsystem Average Mode In the Average mode the oscilloscope averages the data points on the waveform with previously acquired data Averaging helps eliminate random noise from the displayed waveform In this mode ACCumulate is set to OFF When Average mode is selected the number of averages must also be specified using the COUNt command Previously displayed waveform data is erased from the display and the newly averaged waveform is displayed 35 3 Figure 35 1 WAVeform Subsystem Format for Data Transfer Format for Data Transfe
82. a description of the command its arguments and the command syntax Programming and Documentation Conventions Subsystems Subsystems There are 23 subsystems in this instrument In the command tree figure 4 1 they are shown as branches with the node above showing the name of the subsystem Only one subsystem may be selected at a time At power on the command parser is set to the root of the command tree therefore no subsystem is selected The 23 subsystems in the 1660 series logic analyzers are e SYSTem controls some basic functions of the instrument e MMEMory provides access to the internal disk drive e INTermodule provides access to the Intermodule bus IMB e MACHine provides access to analyzer functions and subsystems e WLISt allows access to the mixed timing state functions e SFORmat allows access to the state format functions e STRigger allows access to the state trigger functions e SLISt allows access to the state listing functions e SWAVeform allows access to the state waveforms functions e SCHart allows access to the state chart functions e COMPare allows access to the compare functions e TFORmat allows access to the timing format functions e TTRigger allows access to the timing trigger functions e TWAVeform allows access to the timing waveforms functions e TLISt allows access to the timing listing functions e SYMBol allows access to the symbol specificati
83. acquistion is now stopped the Compare menu is displayed and the data is now in the compare reference listing RK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 203 Display line 4090 of the compare listing and start the analyzer in a repetitive mode OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE LINE 4090 OUTPUT 707 START 36 10 Programming Examples Making a State Compare measurement 780 790 Line 4090 of the listing is now displayed at center screen 800 in order to show the last four states acquired In this 810 example the last four states are stable However in some 820 cases the end points of the listing may vary thus causing 830 a false failure in compare To eliminate this problem a 840 partial compare can be specified to provide predicable end 850 points of the data 860 870 PRINT Press CONTINUE to send the STOP command 880 PAUSE 890 OUTPUT 707 STOP 900 910 IE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 920 The end points of the compare can be fixed to prevent false failures 930 In addition you can use partial compare to compare only sections 940 of the state listing you are interested in comparing 950 960 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE RANGE PARTIAL 0 508
84. after the last error I 36 12 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 Programming Examples Making a State Compare measurement Error_line IVAL Line 10 IF Error line Error line2 THEN GOTO 1780 Error line2 Error line l RRR RK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK Print the error numbers and the corresponding line numbers on the controller screen PRINT Error number Error is on line number Error line I NEXT Error PRINT PRINT PRINT Last error found GOTO 1850 PRINT No errors found 36 13 10 20 30 KKK 50 55 56 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer configuration Transferring the logic analyzer configuration This program uses the SYSTem SETup query to transfer the configuration of the logic analyzer to your controller This program also uses the SYSTem SETup command to transfer a logic analyzer configuration from the controller back to the logic analyzer The configuration data will set up the logic analyzer according to the data It is useful for getting configurations for setting up the logic analyzer by the controller This query differs from the SYSTem DATA
85. analyzer state and timing and SELECT 2 selects the oscilloscope module Select 2 1 and 3 through 10 are accepted but no action will be taken When a module is selected the parser recognizes the module s commands and the System Intermodule commands When SELECT 0 is used only the System Intermodule commands are recognized by the parser Figure 9 2 shows the command tree for the SELect command The command parser in the 1660 series logic analyzers is designed to accept programs written for the 16500A logic analysis system with a 16550A logic analyzer module however if the parameters 3 through 10 are sent the 1660 series logic analyzer will take no action An integer 0 through 2 2 1 and 3 through 10 unused OUTPUT XXX SELECT 0 Query Returned Format Example Figure 9 2 Mainframe Commands SELect SELect The SELect query returns the current module selection SELect lt module gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SELECT SELECT SELECTS SYSTEM INTERMODULE 1 SELECTS MODULE IN SLOT A 2 SELECTS MODULE IN SLOT B Not Used Select Command Tree 9 21 Command lt color gt lt hue gt lt sat gt mE u Example Query Returned Format Example Mainframe Commands SETColor SETColor SETColor lt color gt lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt DEFault The SETColor command is used to change one of the selections on t
86. and hold value the query will return 3 5 0 0 ns as an ASCII string when you have one clock and one edge specified 15 13 SFORmat Subsystem SETHold pod num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 through 8 for the HP 1660A 1 through 6 for the HP 16614 1 through 4 for the HP 16624 and 1 through 2 for the HP 1663A lt set_hold_ Aninteger 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 representing the setup and hold value values in table 15 2 Table 15 2 Setup and hold values For one clock and one For one clock and both For multiple clocks edge edges 0 3 5 0 0 ns 0 4 0 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 1 3 0 0 5 ns 1 3 5 0 5 1 4 0 0 5 2 2 5 1 0 ns 2 3 0 1 0 2 3 5 1 0 3 2 0 1 5 ns 3 2 5 1 5 3 3 0 1 5 4 1 5 2 0 ns 4 2 0 2 0 4 2 5 2 0 5 1 0 2 5 ns 5 1 5 2 5 5 2 0 2 5 6 0 5 3 0 ns 6 1 0 3 0 6 1 5 3 0 7 0 0 3 5 ns 7 0 5 3 5 7 1 0 3 5 N A 8 0 0 4 0 8 0 5 4 0 N A N A 9 0 0 4 5 Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SETHOLD 1 2 Query MACHine 1 2 SFORMAT SETHOLD pod num The SETHold query returns the current setup and hold settings Returned Format MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SETHold lt pod_num gt lt set_hold_value gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SETHOLD 3 15 14 Command lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem SLAVe SLAVe MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SLAVe lt clock_id gt lt clock
87. and the RANGe commands of the TIMEbase subsystem WAVeform SPERiod lt period gt lt NL gt time in seconds OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM SPERIOD TYPE WAVeform TYPE The TYPE query returns the presently acquisition type normal or average The acquisition type is specified in the ACQuire Subsystem using the ACQuire TYPE command WAVeform TYPE NORMal AVERage NL OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM TYPE 35 13 WAVeform Subsystem VALid VALid Query WAVeform VALid The VALid query checks the oscilloscope for acquired data Ifa measurement is completed and data has been acquired by all channels then the query reports al A 0is reported if no data has been acquired for the last acquisition Returned Format WAVeform VALid 0 1 NL o No data acquired 1 Data has been acquired ERBEN Example OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM VALID 35 14 WAVeform Subsystem XINCrement XINCrement Query WAVeform XINCrement The XINCrement query returns the X increment currently in the preamble This value is the time difference between the consecutive data points X increment is determined by the RECord mode as follows e In FULL record mode the X increment equals the time period between data samples or sample period e In WINDow record mode the X increment is the time between data points on the logic analyzer front panel The X increment for WINDow record data will be less than or equal
88. assembler into The optional lt module gt parameter is used to specify which slot the state analyzer in 1 refers to the logic analyzer If this parameter is not specified the state analyzer will be selected A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken An integer always 1 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD IASSEMBLER 168020 IP 1 OUTPUT XXX MMEM LOAD IASS 168020 IP INTERNALO 1 2 11 15 Command lt msus gt Examples Query Returned Format Example MMEMory Subsystem MSI Mass Storage Is MSI Mass Storage Is MMEMory MSI lt msus gt The MSI command selects a default mass storage device however it is not needed by 1660 series logic analyzers because they have only one disk drive If the 16500A lt msus gt is sent to the 1660 series logic analyzer it is accepted but no action is taken Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A msus is accepted but no action is taken OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY MSI OUTPUT XXX MMEM MSI INTERNALO MMEMory MSI The MSI query returns the current MSI setting Because the 1660 series logic analyzers have only one disk drive Internal0 is always returned MMEMory M
89. be entered White space is optional in many other places XXX lt NL gt Programming and Documentation Conventions Notation Conventions and Definitions Notation Conventions and Definitions The following conventions are used in this manual when describing programming rules and example Angular brackets enclose words or characters that are used to symbolize a program code parameter or a bus command is defined as For example A B indicates that A can be replaced by B in any statement containing A or Indicates a choice of one element from a list For example A B indicates A or B but not both An ellipsis trailing dots is used to indicate that the preceding element may be repeated one or more times Square brackets indicate that the enclosed items are optional When several items are enclosed by braces and separated by vertical bars 1 one and only one of these elements must be selected Three Xs after an ENTER or OUTPUT statement represent the device address required by your controller Linefeed ASCII decimal 10 The Command Tree The command tree figure 4 1 shows all commands in the 1660 series logic analyzers and the relationship of the commands to each other Parameters are not shown in this figure The command tree allows you to see what the 1660 series logig analyzer parser expects to receive All legal headers can be created by traversing down the tree adding keywords until the end of a b
90. by the TERM command The meaning of IN RANGE and OUT RANGE is determined by the RANGE command Within the limitations shown by the syntax definitions complex expressions may be formed using the AND and OR operators Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the Timing Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions on the next page show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the 22 9 Example lt N gt lt to_level_ number gt number of levels branch qualifier Examples TTRigger TTRace Subsystem BRANch expression is not changed Figure 22 2 on page 22 11 shows a complex expression as seen in the Timing Trigger menu The following statements are all correct and have the same meaning Notice that the conventional rules for precedence are not followed The expressions are evaluated from left to right OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND D OR FOR G 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND D OR F OR Gy I OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 F OR C AND D OR G 1 integer from 1 to number of levels integer from 1 to number of levels integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 10 qualifier see Qualifier on page 22 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 ANYSTATE 3 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TTRIGGER BRANCH2 A 7 OUTPUT XXX M
91. clock_id gt qual level Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MQUal MQUal MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MQUal lt qual_num gt lt clock_id gt lt qual_level gt The MQUal master qualifier command allows you to specify the level qualifier for the master clock 112 3 4 1 through 4 for HP 1660A HP 1661A HP 1662A or 1 or 2 for HP 1663A J K L M N P OFF LOW HIGH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MQUAL 1 J LOW MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MQUal qual num The MQUal query returns the qualifier specified for the master clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MQUal qual level NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MQUAL 1 15 12 Command lt name gt Examples Command SFORmat Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 SFORmat REMove lt name gt ALL The REMove command allows you to delete all labels or any one label for a given machine String of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT REMOVE A OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT REMOVE ALL SETHold MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SETHold lt pod_num gt lt set_hold_value gt The SETHold setup hold command allows you to set the setup and hold specification for the state analyzer Even though the command requires integers to specify the setup and hold the query returns the current settings in a string For example if you send the integer 0 for the setup
92. first In WORD format the 15 least significant bits represent the waveform data The possible range of data is divided into 32768 vertical increments The WORD data structure for normal and average acquisition types are shown in figure 35 2 If all 1 s are returned in the 15 least significant bits the waveform is clipped at the top of the screen If all 0 s are returned in the 15 least significant bits the waveform is clipped at the bottom of the screen WORD and ASCIT format data is more accurate than BYTE format data BYTE format simply truncates the 8 least significant bits of WORD format data Figure 35 2 NORMAL AND AVERAGE ACQUISITION TYPE MSB LSB 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 NOT USED DATA N DATA FRACTION 7 16532B16 Word Data Structure ASCII Format ASCII formatted waveform records are transmitted one value at a time separated by a comma The data values transmitted are the same as would be sent in the WORD format except that they are converted to an integer ASCII format six or less characters before being transmitted The header before the data is not included in this format 35 5 WAVeform Subsystem Data Conversion Data Conversion Data sent from the oscilloscope is raw data and must be scaled for useful interpretation The values used to interpret the data are
93. for a given pod to ECL TTL or a specific voltage from 6 00 V to 6 00 V in 0 05 volt increments pod number 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 default value of 1 6 V default value of 1 3 V OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT THRESHOLD1 4 0 MACHine 1 2 TFORmat THReshold lt N gt The THReshold query returns the current threshold for a given pod MACHine 1 2 TFORmat THReshold lt N gt lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT THRESHOLD2 22 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Introduction The TTRigger subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Trigger menu in the 1660 series logic analyzers The Timing Trigger subsystem will also accept the TTRace selector as used in previous 1650 series logic analyzers to eliminate the need to rewrite programs containing TTRace as the selector keyword The TTRigger subsystem commands are e ACQuisition e BRANch e CLEar e FIND e GLEDge e RANGe e SEQuence e SPERiod e TCONtrol e TERM e TIMER e TPOSition TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Figure 22 1 AUTomati c MANua m BRANch lt N gt space branch_qualifier I to level num Hr TTRi ager ACQu isi tion space RESource FIND lt N gt space proceed qualifier IHC occurrence m IM FIND lt N gt gt Ie GLEDge N space r M label
94. gt lt function gt lt white Space data function white space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt SYSTEM LONGFORM ON HEADER ON Duplicate Keywords Identical function keywords can be used for more than one subsystem For example the function keyword MMODE may be used to specify the marker mode in the subsystem for state listing or the timing waveforms e SLIST MMODE PATTERN sets the marker mode to pattern in the state listing e TWAVEFORM MMODE TIME sets the marker mode to time in the timing waveforms SLIST and TWAVEFORM are subsystem selectors and they determine which marker mode is being modified 1 9 Example Introduction to Programming Query Usage Query Usage Logic analyzer instructions that are immediately followed by a question mark are queries After receiving a query the logic analyzer parser places the response in the output buffer The output message remains in the buffer until it is read or until another logic analyzer instruction is issued When read the message is transmitted across the bus to the designated listener typically a controller Query commands are used to find out how the logic analyzer is currently configured They are also used to get results of measurements made by the logic analyzer This instruction places the current full screen time for machine 1 in the output buffer MACHINE TWAVEFORM RANGE In order to prevent the loss of data in the
95. input statement for receiving a response message from an logic analyzer s output queue usually has two parameters the device address and a format specification for handling the response message Allresults for queries sent in a program message must be read before another program message is sent For example when you send the query MACHINE1 ASSIGN you must follow that query with an input statement In Basic this is usually done with an ENTER statement The format for handling the response messages is dependent on both the controller and the programming language To read the result ofthe query command SYSTEM LONGFORM you can execute this Basic statement to enter the current setting for the long form command in the numeric variable Setting ENTER XXX Setting Examples Introduction to Programming Response Header Options Response Header Options The format of the returned ASCII string depends on the current settings of the SYSTEM HEADER and LONGFORM commands The general format is instruction header space data terminator The header identifies the data that follows the parameters and is controlled by issuing a SYSTEM HEADER ON OFF command If the state of the header command is OFF only the data is returned by the query The format of the header is controlled by the SYSTEM LONGFORM ON OFF command If long form is OFF the header will be in its short form and the header will vary in length d
96. larger probe attenuation factor multiply the range limit by the probe attenuation factor An integer from 1 to 2 16 mV to 40 V for a probe attenuation factor of 1 1 OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 RANGE 4 8 CHANne1 lt N gt RANGe The RANGe query returns the current range setting CHANnel lt N gt RANGe lt range gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 RANGE 29 8 CHANnel Subsystem TTL TTL Command CHANnel lt N gt TTL The TTL command sets the vertical range offset and trigger level for the selected input channel for optimum viewing of TTL signals The set TTL values are Range 6 0 V 1 50 V per division Offset 2 5 V Trigger Level 1 62 V lt N gt Aninteger from 1 to 2 Example OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 TTL To return to Preset User change the CHANnel RANGe CHANel OFFSet or TRIGger LEVel value 29 9 29 10 30 DISPlay Subsystem Introduction The Display Subsystem is used to control the display of data Refer to Figure 30 1 for the DISPlay Subsystem Syntax Diagram The DISPlay Subsystem commands are e ACCumulate e CONNect e INSert e LABel e MINus e OVERlay e PLUS e REMove 30 2 DISPlay Subsystem Figure 30 1 CorsP tay D Y Accumu ate space OFF ON pm ACCumulate gt CONNec space OFF gt ON Y CONNect E INSert spoce lobel id Le cbi t id gt
97. lt name gt parameter specifies the filename from the disk The optional lt module gt parameter specifies which module s to load the file into The accepted values are 0 for system 1 for logic analyzer and 2 for the oscilloscope Not specifying the lt module gt parameter is equivalent to performing a LOAD ALL from the front panel which loads the appropriate file for the system logic analyzer oscilloscope and any software option A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken An integer 0 through 2 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD CONFIG FILE OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD FILE 0 OUTPUT XXX MMEM LOAD CONFIG FILE A INTERNALO 1 11 14 Command lt IA_name gt lt msus gt lt module gt Examples MMEMory Subsystem LOAD IASSembler LOAD IASSembler MMEMory LOAD IASSembler IA name gt lt msus gt 1 2 lt module gt This variation of the LOAD command allows inverse assembler files to be loaded into a module that performs state analysis The lt IA_name gt parameter specifies the inverse assembler filename from the desired lt msus gt The parameter after the optional lt msus gt specifies which machine to load the inverse
98. lt program message gt The basic rule to remember is that the instrument will only talk when prompted to and it then expects to talk before being told to do something else Protocol Operation When the instrument is turned on the input buffer and output queue are cleared and the parser is reset to the root level of the command tree The instrument and the controller communicate by exchanging complete program message s and response message s This means that the controller should always terminate a program message before attempting to read a response The instrument will terminate response message gt s except during a hardcopy output If a query message is sent the next message passing over the bus should be the response message The controller should always read the complete response message associated with a query message before sending another program message to the same instrument The instrument allows the controller to send multiple queries in one query message This is referred to as sending a compound query As will be noted later in this chapter multiple queries in a query message are separated by semicolons The responses to each of the queries in a compound query will also be separated by semicolons Commands are executed in the order they are received Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Diagrams Protocol Exceptions If an error occurs during the information exchange the exc
99. must be a keyword The available keywords are always included with the instruction s syntax definition When sending commands either the longform or shortform if one exists may be used Uppercase and lowercase letters may be mixed freely When receiving responses upper case letters will be used exclusively The use of longform or shortform in a response depends on the setting you last specified via the SYSTem LONGform command see chapter 10 Example Introduction to Programming Selecting Multiple Subsystems Selecting Multiple Subsystems You can send multiple program commands and program queries for different subsystems on the same line by separating each command with a semicolon The colon following the semicolon enables you to enter a new subsystem lt instruction header gt lt data gt lt instruction header gt lt data gt lt terminator gt Multiple commands may be any combination of simple compound and common commands MACHINE1 ASSIGN2 SYSTEM HEADERS ON 1 14 Example Receiving Information from the Instrument After receiving a query logic analyzer instruction followed by a question mark the logic analyzer interrogates the requested function and places the answer in its output queue The answer remains in the output queue until it is read or until another command is issued When read the message is transmitted across the bus to the designated listener typically a controller The
100. name gt The LABel query returns the current specification for the selected by name label If the label does not exist nothing is returned The polarity is always returned as the first parameter Numbers are always returned in decimal format MACHine 1 2 SFORmat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt clock bits upper bits lt lower_bits gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT LABEL DATA 15 8 Command Syntax lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MASTer MASTer MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MASTer clock id lt clock_spec gt The MASTer clock command allows you to specify a master clock for a given machine The master clock is used in all clocking modes Master Slave and Demultiplexed Each command deals with only one clock J K L M N P therefore a complete clock specification requires six commands one for each clock Edge specifications RISing FALLing or BOTH are ORed Atleast one clock edge must be specified K L M N P OFF RISing FALLing BOTH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MASTER J RISING MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MASTer clock id The MASTer query returns the clock specification for the specified clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MASTer clock id clock spec NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MASTER clock id Command acq mode Example Query
101. of FILE1 to FILE2 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY COPY FILE1 FILEZ2 DOWNload MMEMory DOWNload lt name gt lt msus gt lt description gt type block data The DOWNload command downloads a file to the mass storage device The name parameter specifies the filename the description parameter specifies the file descriptor and the block data contains the contents of the file to be downloaded The lt msus gt is not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken Table 11 2 lists the file types for the type parameter 11 11 MMEMory Subsystem DOWNIoad lt name gt A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN lt msus gt Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A msus is accepted but no action is taken description A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters type An integer see table 11 2 lt block_data gt Contents of file in block data format Example OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY DOWNLOAD SETUP INTERNALO FILE CREATED FROM SETUP QUERY 16127 800000643 Table 11 2 File Types File File Type 1660 Series System Software 15608 1660 Series ROM Software 15609 1660 Series System Configuration 15605 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Configuration 16095 1660
102. on The TD Transmit Data line from the logic analyzer must connect to the RD Receive Data line on the controller Likewise the RD line from the logic analyzer must connect to the TD line on the controller The RTS Request To Send is an output from the logic analyzer which can be used to control incoming data flow A true on the RTS line allows the controller to send data and a false signals a request for the controller to disable data transmission The CTS Clear To Send DSR Data Set Ready and DCD Data Carrier Detect lines are inputs to the logic analyzer which control data flow from the logic analyzer Internal pull up resistors in the logic analyzer assure the DCD and DSR lines remain high when they are not connected If DCD or DSR are connected to the controller the controller must keep these lines along with the CTS line high to enable the logic analyzer to send data to the controller A low on any one of these lines will disable the logic analyzer data transmission Pulling the CTS line low during data transmission will stop logic analyzer data transmission immediately Pulling either the DSR or DCD line low during data transmission will stop logic analyzer data transmission but as many as two additional bytes may be transmitted from the logic analyzer 3 5 Figure 3 1 Programming Over RS 232C Cable Examples Cable Examples HP 9000 Series 300 Figure 3 1 is an example of how to connect the 1660 series lo
103. or programming commands do not affect the stored configuration SYSTem DATA block data gt lt NL gt See Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data in chapter 36 Programming Examples for an example Byte Position 1 11 12 13 17 19 20 DATA and SETup Commands Section Header Description Section Header Description The section header uses bytes 1 through 16 this manual begins counting at 1 there is no byte 0 The 16 bytes of the section header are as follows 10 bytes Section name DATA space space space space space space in ASCII for the DATA instruction 1 byte Reserved 1 byte Module ID 0010 0000 binary or 32 decimal for the 1660 series logic analyzers 4 bytes Length of section in number of bytes that when converted to decimal specifies the number of bytes contained in the section Section Data For the SYSTem DATA command the section data parameter consists of two parts the data preamble and the acquisition data These are described in the following two sections Data Preamble Description The block data is organized as 160 bytes of preamble information followed by a variable number of bytes of data The preamble gives information for each analyzer describing the amount and type of data captured where the trace point occurred in the data which pods are assigned to which analyzer and other information The values stored in the preamble represent the captur
104. query the individual fields For example see the FORmat command for an explanation of the format field 35 11 Command Example Returned Format Example Command Example WAVeform Subsystem RECord RECord WAVeform RECord FULL WINDow The RECord command specifies the data you want to receive over the bus The choices are FULL or WINdow When FULL is chosen the entire 8000 point record of the specified channel is transmitted over the bus In WINdow mode only the data displayed on screen will be returned OUTPUT XXX WAV SOUR CHAN1 REC FULL WAVeform RECord The RECord query returns the present mode chosen WAVeform RECord FULL WINDow lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM RECORD SOURce WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt The SOURce command specifies the channel that is to be used for all subsequent waveform commands An integer from 1 to 2 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM SOURCE CHANNEL1 35 12 Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt period gt Example Query Returned Format Example WAVeform Subsystem SPERiod WAVeform SOURce The SOURce query returns the presently selected channel WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM SOURCE SPERiod WAVeform SPERiod The SPERiod query returns the present sampling period The sample period is determined by the DELay
105. risetime is determined by measuring time at the 1096 and the 9096voltage points of the rising edge Falltime Falltime is measured between the 1096 and 9096 points of the first displayed falling edge To obtain the best possible measurement accuracy select the fastest sweep speed possible while keeping the falling edge on the display 32 2 MEASure Subsystem Preshoot and Overshoot Preshoot and overshoot measure the perturbation on a waveform above or below the top and base voltages Preshoot Is a perturbation before a rising or a falling edge and measured as a percentage of the top base voltage Overshoot Is a perturbation after a rising or falling edge and is measured as a percentage of the top base voltage For complete details of the measurement algorithms refer to the User s Reference Manual Refer to Figure 32 1 for the MEASure Subsystem Syntax Diagram Before using any of the Measure Subsystem queries note that the SOURce command is part of every query of this subsystem The SOURce command specifies the channel that is to be used for making the measurements If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9837 32 3 Figure 32 1 Table 32 1 MEASure Subsystem N N GMEASUre eC ALL Mei FALL t ime Mm FREQuency OVERshoot PERiod PWIDth gg ENS ee Pe Le Risstine RISetime source space
106. subsystem commands provide access to disk drive The 1600 series logic analyzers support both LIF Logical Information Format and DOS Disk Operating System formats The 1660 series logic analyzers have only one disk drive however programs written for the 16500A logic analysis system that contain the MSI Mass Storage Is parameter will be accepted but no action is taken Refer to figure 11 1 and table 11 1 for the MMEMory Subsystem commands syntax diagram The MMEMory subsystem commands are AUToload CATalog COPY DOWNload INITialize LOAD MSI PACK PURGe REName STORe UPLoad VOLume MMEMory Subsystem msus refers to the mass storage unit specifier however it is not needed for the 1660 series logic analyzers since they have only one drive The msus parameter is shown in the command syntax examples as a reminder that for the the 16500A logic analysis system can be used on the 1660 series logic analyzers If you are not going to store information to the configuration disk or if the disk you are using contains information you need it is advisable to write protect your disk This will protect the contents of the disk from accidental damage due to incorrect commands being mistakenly sent 11 3 MMEMory Subsystem Figure 11 1 or H MiEMor y 3 AUTO I oad space m AUTo load gt auto_file gt gt m CATalog
107. the GPIB interface can be placed in either talk only mode Printer connected to GPIB or in addressed talk listen mode Controller connected to GPIB see chapter 16 The RS 232 GPIB Menu in the Agilent Technologies 1660 Series Logic Analyzer User s Reference Talk only mode must be used when you want the logic analyzer to talk directly to a printer without the aid of a controller Addressed talk listen mode is used when the logic analyzer will operate in conjunction with a controller When the logic analyzer is in the addressed talk listen mode the following is true e Each device on the GPIB resides at a particular address ranging from 0 to 30 e The active controller specifies which devices will talk and which will listen e Aninstrument therefore may be talk addressed listen addressed or unaddressed by the controller 2 3 Programming Over GPIB Communicating Over the GPIB Bus HP 9000 Series 200 300 Controller If the controller addresses the instrument to talk it will remain configured to talk until it receives e an interface clear message IFC e another instrument s talk address OTA e its own listen address MLA e a universal untalk UNT command If the controller addresses the instrument to listen it will remain configured to listen until it receives e an interface clear message IFC e its own talk address MTA e a universal unlisten UNL command Communicating Over the GPIB Bus HP 90
108. the same value EQUal e Any channel of any label has a different value NE Qual The RUNTIl instruction for state analysis is available in both the SLISt and COMPare subsystems OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt EQUal NEQual real number from 9E9 to 9E9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST RUNTIL GT 800 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 SLISt RUNTil The RUNTIl query returns the current stop criteria MACHine 1 2 SLISt RUNTil run until spec NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST RUNTIL 17 16 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example SLISt Subsystem TAVerage TAVerage MACHine 1 2 SLISt TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the value of the average time between the X and O Markers If the number of valid runs is zero the query returns 9 9537 Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 SLISt TAVerage time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST TAVERAGE TMAXimum MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O Markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMAXimum time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX
109. the system the logic analyzer or the oscilloscope 2 refers to the oscilloscope 1 refers to the logic analyzer and 0 refers to the system If the optional module parameter is not specified the configurations for the system logic analyzer and oscilloscope are stored A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN Or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A msus is accepted but no action is taken A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters An integer 0 through 2 11 19 Examples Query lt name gt lt msus gt Returned Format MMEMory Subsystem UPLoad OUTPUT XXX MMEM STOR DEFAULTS SETUPS FOR ALL MODULES OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY STORE CONFIG STATEDATA INTERNALO ANALYZER 1 CONFIG 1 The appropriate module designator _X is added to all files when they are stored X refers to either an double underscore for the system or an A for the logic analyzer UPLoad MMEMory UPLoad lt name gt lt msus gt The UPLoad query uploads a file The lt name gt parameter specifies the file to be uploaded from the disk The contents of the file are sent out of the instrument in block data form This command should only be used for 16550A or 1660 series configuration files A string of up to 10 alphanum
110. to the sample period Returned Format WAVeform XINCrement lt value gt lt NL gt value X increment value currently in preamble Example OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM XINCREMENT 35 15 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Query Returned Format lt value gt Example WAVeform Subsystem XORigin XORigin WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt XORigin The XORigin query returns the X origin value currently in the preamble The value represents the time of the first data point in memory with respect to the trigger point WAVeform XORigin lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 X origin currently in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAV XOR XREFerence WNAVeform XREFerence The XREFerence query returns the current X reference value in the preamble This value specifies the X value of the first data point in memory and is always 0 WAVeform XREFerence lt value gt lt NL gt X reference value in the preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM XREFERENCE 35 16 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example WAVeform Subsystem YINCrement YINCrement WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt YINCrement The YINCrement query returns the Y increment value currently in the preamble This value is the voltage difference between consecutive d
111. whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and pua 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the 1abel pattern parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters HB 0 1 X H 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x gt amp 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XPATTERN A 511 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XPATtern label name The XPATtern query in pattern marker mode returns the pattern specification for a given label name In the time marker mode the query returns the pattern under the X marker for a given label If the X marker is not placed on valid data don t cares X are returned MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XPATtern label name label pattern NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XPATTERN A 23 23 Command lt origin gt lt occurrence gt Example mE Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem XSEarch XSEarch MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XSEarch occurrence origin The XSEarch command defines the search criteria for the X marker which is then used with the associated XPATtern recognizer specification and the XCONdition when moving markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger The occurrence parameter determines which occurr
112. you to clear the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM CLRPATTERN 18 6 Command Example Command number of samples Example Query Returned Format number of samples Example SWAVeform Subsystem CLRStat CLRStat MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform CLRStat The CLRStat command allows you to clear the waveform statistics without having to stop and restart the acquisition OUTPUT XXX MACHINEIl SWAVEFORM CLRSTAT DELay MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform DELay number of samples The DELay command allows you to specify the number of samples between the State trigger and the horizontal center of the screen for the waveform display The allowed number of samples is from 8191 to 8191 integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM DELAY 127 MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform DELay The DELay query returns the current sample offset value MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform DELay number of samples gt lt NL gt integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 SWAVEFORM DELAY 18 7 Command lt label_name gt lt bit_id gt lt bit_num gt Examples Command number of samples Example SWAVeform Subsystem INSert INSert MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform INSert label name bit id The INSert command allows you to add waveforms to the state waveform display Waveforms ar
113. your controller can use to operate over the RS 232C bus Also in this chapter you will find cable recommendations for hardware handshake 3 3 Programming Over RS 232C Minimum Three Wire Interface with Software Protocol Minimum Three Wire Interface with Software Protocol With a three wire interface the software as compared to interface hardware controls the data flow between the logic analyzer and the controller The three wire interface provides no hardware means to control data flow between the controller and the logic analyzer Therefore XON OFF protocol is the only means to control this data flow The three wire interface provides a much simpler connection between devices since you can ignore hardware handshake requirements The communications software you are using in your computer controller must be capable of using XON XOFF exclusively in order to use three wire interface cables For example some communications software packages can use XON XOFF but are also dependent on the CTS and DSR lines being true to communicate The logic analyzer uses the following connections on its RS 232C interface for three wire communication e Pin SGND Signal Ground e Pin2 TD Transmit Data from logic analyzer e Pin3 RD Receive Data into logic analyzer The TD Transmit Data line from the logic analyzer must connect to the RD Receive Data line on the controller Likewise the RD line from the logic analyzer must connec
114. 0 ns to 10 ks A real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST RANGE 100E 9 MACHine 1 2 WLISt RANGe The RANGe query returns the current full screen time MACHine 1 2 WLISt RANGe time value NL A real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 WLIST RANGE 14 9 Command Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example WLISt Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 WLISt REMove The REMove command deletes all waveforms from the display OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 WLIST REMOVE XOTime MACHine 1 2 WLISt XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X marker to the O marker If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 WLISt XOTime lt time_value gt lt NL gt A real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST XOTIME 14 10 WLISt Subsystem XSTate XSTate Query WLISt XSTate The XSTate query returns the state where the X Marker is positioned If data is not valid the query returns 32767 Returned Format WLISt XSTate state num NL state num Aninteger Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST XSTATE XTIMe Command WLISt XTIMe time value The XTIMe command positions the X Marker on the timing waveforms in the mixed mode display If the data is not valid the command performs no action time value Arealnumber Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST XTIME 40 0E 6
115. 0 us increments The increment value varies with the time value of the specified timer real number from 400 ns to 500 seconds in increments which vary from 16 ns to 500 us OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TIMER1 100E 6 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TIMER 1 2 The TIMER query returns the current time value for the specified timer MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TIMER 1 2 lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TIMER1 22 21 Command lt time_val gt lt poststore gt Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TPOSition TPOSition MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay time val POSTstore lt poststore gt The TPOSition trigger position command allows you to set the trigger at the start center end or at any position in the trace poststore Poststore is defined as 0 to 100 percent with a poststore of 100 percent being the same as start position and a poststore 0 percent being the same as an end trace real number from either 2 x sample period or 16 ns whichever is greater to 1048575 x sample period integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage of poststore OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TPOSITION END OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TPOSITION POSTstore 75 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger position setting MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END
116. 00 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data KKK KK ek ek kk kk kk x x SEND THE DATA k k kk kk kk KEK kk KK KK RK KERR kk kk e Make sure buffer is not empty I IF Numbytes 0 THEN PRINT BUFFER IS EMPTY GOTO 1170 END IF p ckckckckckckckckckckckck kc ck k kk kk k SEND THE DATA COMMAND kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Send the Setup command OUTPUT Comm USING 14A SYSTEM DATA PRINT SYSTEM DATA command has been sent PAUSE I kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SEND THE BLOCK DATA kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Send the block data header to the logic analyzer in the proper format I Byte LEN VAL Numbytes OUTPUT Comm USING B Byte 48 IF Byte 1 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING A VALS Numbytes F Byte 2 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING AA VALS Numbytes F Byte 3 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING AAA VALS Numbytes F Byte 4 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING i AAAA VAL Numbytes F Byte 5 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING AAAAA VALS Numbytes F Byte 6 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING i AAAAAA VAL Numbytes F Byte 7 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING it AAAAAAA VAL Numbytes F Byte 8 THEN OUTPUT Comm USING AAAAAAAA VALS Numbytes I okckckckckek ek e ke e ke kk kk kk SAVE BUFFER POINTERS k kk kk kk kk kk ck ck ck KK
117. 00 Series 200 300 Controller Because GPIB can address multiple devices through the same interface card the device address passed with the program message must include not only the correct instrument address but also the correct interface code Interface Select Code Selects the Interface Each interface card has its own interface select code This code is used by the controller to direct commands and communications to the proper interface The default is always 7 for GPIB controllers Instrument Address Selects the Instrument Each instrument on the GPIB port must have a unique instrument address between decimals 0 and 30 The device address passed with the program message must include not only the correct instrument address but also the correct interface select code Programming Over GPIB Local Remote and Local Lockout Example For example if the instrument address is 4 and the interface select code is 7 the instruction will cause an action in the instrument at device address 704 DEVICE ADDRESS Interface Select Code X 100 Instrument Address Local Remote and Local Lockout The local remote and remote with local lockout modes may be used for various degrees of front panel control while a program is running The logic analyzer will accept and execute bus commands while in local mode and the front panel will also be entirely active If the 1660 series logic analyzer is in remote mode the logic an
118. 07 SYSTEM HEADER ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM ON OUTPUT Comm SELECT 1 OUTPUT Comm SYSTEM SETUP I poko sk k ke ke ke kx ke x x x x x ENTER THE BLOCK SETUP HEADER xxxxkkkkk kk kk KK kk kk kk Enter the block setup header in the proper format I ENTER Comm USING B Byte PRINT CHRS Byte WHILE Byte lt gt 35 ENTER Comm USING B Byte PRINT CHRS Byte END WHILE ENTER Comm USING B Byte PRINT CHRS Byte Byte Byte 48 IF Byte 1 THEN ENTER Comm USING D Numbytes F Byte 2 THEN ENTER Comm USING DD Numbytes F Byte 3 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDD Numbytes F Byte 4 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDD Numbytes F Byte 5 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDD Numbytes F Byte 6 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDDD Numbytes F Byte 7 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDDDD Numbytes F Byte 8 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDDDDD Numbytes PRINT Numbytes pokkekskek ek ke ek TRANSER THE SETUP 4 RRR KK kk kk kk kk kk kk HE KEK Transfer the setup from the logic analyzer to the buffer I TRANSFER Comm TO Buff COUNT Numbytes WAIT ENTER Comm USING K Length PRINT LENGTH of Length string is LEN Length PRINT GOT THE SETUP PAUSE KKK KK ek ek ke ke eese x SEND THE SETUP kkk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk KK KK KK RK Make sure buffer is not empty IF Numbytes 0 THEN PRINT BUFFER IS EMPTY GOTO 1170 END IF 36 15 740 750 760 770 780 790
119. 07 SYSTEM PRINT SCREEN SETup SYStem SETup block data The SYStem SETup command configures the logic analyzer module as defined by the block data sent by the controller This chapter describes briefly the syntax of the Setup command and query Because of the capabilites and importance of the Setup command and query a complete chapter is dedicated to it The dedicated chapter is chapter 26 DATA and SETup Commands block length specifier section 8 lt length gt The total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits section header section data 16 bytes described in the Section Header Description section in chapter 26 Format depends on the type of data 10 11 Example Query Returned Format Example SYSTem Subsystem SETup The total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data So when calculating the value for lt length gt don t forget to include the length of the section headers OUTPUT XXX USING K SYSTEM SETUP block data SYStem SETup The SYStem SETup query returns a block of data that contains the current configuration to the controller SYStem SETup block data NL See Transferring the logic analyzer configuration in chapter 27 Programming Examples for an example 10 12 11 MMEMory Subsystem Introduction The MMEMory mass memory
120. 1 OPT Option Identification 8 12 PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable 8 13 RST Reset 8 14 SRE Service Request Enable 8 15 STB Status Byte 8 16 TRG Trigger 8 17 TST Test 8 18 WAI Wait 8 19 Mainframe Commands BEEPer 9 6 CAPability 9 7 CARDcage 9 8 CESE Combined Event Status Enable 9 9 CESR Combined Event Status Register 9 10 EOI End Or Identify 9 11 LER LCL Event Register 9 11 LOCKout 9 12 MENU 9 12 Contents 3 10 11 Contents MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable 9 14 MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register 9 16 RMODe 9 18 RTC Real time Clock 9 19 SELect 9 20 SETColor 9 22 STARt 9 23 STOP 9 24 SYSTem Subsystem DATA 10 5 DSP Display 10 6 ERRor 10 7 HEADer 10 8 LONGform 10 9 PRINt 10 10 SETup 10 11 MMEMory Subsystem AUToload 11 8 CATalog 11 9 COPY 11 10 DOWNload 11 11 INITialize 11 13 LOAD CONFig 11 14 LOAD IASSembler 11 15 MSI Mass Storage Is 11 16 PACK 11 17 PURGe 11 17 REName 11 18 STORe CONFig 11 19 UPLoad 11 20 VOLume 11 21 Contents 4 12 Part 3 13 14 INTermodule Subsystem INTermodule 12 5 DELete 12 5 HTIMe 12 6 INPort 12 6 INSert 12 7 SKEW lt N gt 12 8 TREE 12 9 TTIMe 12 10 Logic Analyzer Commands MACHine Subsystem MACHine 13 4 ARM 13 5 ASSign 13 5 LEVelarm 13 6 NAME 13 7 REName 13 8 RESource 13 9 TYPE 13 10 WLISt Subsystem WLISt 14 4 DELay 14 5 INSert 14 6 LIN
121. 1 STRIGGER RANGE 16 15 Command number of levels level of trigger Example Query Returned Format number of levels level of trigger Example STRigger STRace Subsystem SEQuence SEQuence MACHine 1 2 STRigger SEQuence number of levels level of trigger The SEQuence command redefines the state analyzer trace sequence First it deletes the current trace sequence Then it inserts the number of levels specified with default settings and assigns the trigger to be at a specified sequence level The number of levels can be between 2 and 12 when the analyzer is armed by the RUN key An integer from 2 to 12 An integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 4 3 MACHine 1 2 STRigger SEQuence The SEQuence query returns the current sequence specification MACHine 1 2 STRigger SEQuence number of levels level of trigger gt lt NL gt An integer from 2 to 12 An integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 16 16 Command lt N gt lt store_ qualifier gt Examples Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem STORe STORe MACHine 1 2 STRigger STORe lt N gt lt store qualifier gt The STORe command defines the store qualifier for a given sequence level A
122. 22 18 Command lt N gt lt timer_num gt Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TCONtrol TCONtrol MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TCONtrol lt N gt timer num OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue The TCONtrol timer control command allows you to turn off start pause or continue the timer for the specified level The time value of the timer is defined by the TIMER command integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 10 112 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TTRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 PAUSE MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TCONTROL lt N gt timer num The TCONtrol query returns the current TCONtrol setting of the specified level MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TCONTROL lt N gt timer num OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TTRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 22 19 Command Ss lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TERM TERM MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TERM term id label name pattern The TERM command allows you to a specify a pattern recognizer term in the specified machine Each command deals with only one label in the given term therefore a complete specification could require several commands Since a label can contain 32 or less bits the range of the pattern value will be between 27 1 and 0 When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it rep
123. 3 TRIGger Subsystem 34 2 riggered timebase mode 33 5 Truncation rule 4 3 TTIMe query 12 10 TTL 29 9 TTRigger 22 8 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem 22 1 22 3 22 4 22 5 22 6 22 7 22 8 22 9 22 10 22 11 22 12 22 13 22 14 22 15 22 16 22 17 22 18 22 19 22 20 22 21 22 22 TWAVeform selector 23 7 TWAVeform Subsystem 23 1 23 3 23 4 23 5 23 6 23 7 23 8 23 9 23 10 23 11 23 12 23 13 23 14 23 15 23 16 23 17 23 18 23 19 23 20 23 21 23 22 23 23 23 24 23 25 TYPE 28 4 31 5 35 13 TYPE command query 13 10 TYPE 28 5 35 13 U Units 1 12 UPLoad command 11 20 Uppercase 1 11 URQ 6 5 Using AUToscale and the MEASure ALL Query program example 36 32 Using Sub routines program example 36 33 V VALid 35 14 valid runs 31 16 VALid 35 14 VAMPlitude 32 11 VAMPlitude 32 11 XCONdition command query 23 22 24 18 Xincrement 35 15 Query 35 15 XORigin 35 16 XORigin 35 16 XOTag query 17 19 24 18 VAXis command query 19 7 VBASe 32 11 VBASe 32 11 vertical axis 29 8 vertical range 29 4 29 6 vertical sensitivity 29 4 Vlevel 31 5 XOTime 31 19 VMAX 32 12 XOTime query 14 10 17 19 23 22 24 19 VMAX 32 12 XOTime 31 19 VMIN 32 12 XPATtern command query 17 20 23 23 VMIN 32 12 24 19 VMODe 31 15 XREFerence 35 16 VMODe 31 15 XREFerence 35 16 XSEarch command query 17 21 23 24 24 20 XSTate query 14 11 17 22 24 21 XTAG command
124. 3d gt lt term3e gt lt term3f gt lt term3g gt lt term3h gt lt term3i gt lt term3j gt lt range3a gt lt range3b gt lt timer3a gt lt timer3b gt Examples STRigger STRace Subsystem Qualifier IN RANGE1 OUT RANGE1 IN RANGE2 OUT RANGE2 TIMER1 lt TIMER1 gt TIMER2 lt TIMER2 gt Qualifier Rules The following rules apply to qualifiers e Qualifiers are quoted strings and therefore need quotes e Expressions are evaluated from left to right e Parenthesis are used to change the order evaluation and therefore are optional e Anexpression must map into the combination logic presented in the combination pop up menu within the STRigger menu see figure 16 2 on page 16 12 yh A ORB A ORB AND C A ORB AND C AND IN RANGE2 A OR B AND C AND IN RANGE1 IN RANGE1 AND A OR B AND C 16 8 Selector Example Command Example Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem STRigger STRace STRigger STRace MACHine 1 2 STRigger The STRigger STRace State Trigger Command is used as a part ofa compound header to access the settings found in the State Trace menu It always follows the MACHine Command because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG TIME ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 STRigger AC
125. 3f gt lt term3g gt lt term3f gt boolean op term3g lt term3h gt lt range3b gt lt term3h gt boolean op lt range3b gt lt term3i gt lt gledge3b gt lt term3i gt boolean op lt gledge3b gt lt term3j gt lt timer3b gt lt term3e gt boolean op lt timer3b gt 22 6 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Qualifier boolean op AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR term3a A NOTA lt term3b gt B NOTB lt term3c gt C NOTC lt term3d gt D NOTD lt term3e gt E NOTE term3f F NOTF lt term3g gt G NOTG lt term3h gt H NOTH lt term3i gt I NOTI lt term3j gt J NOTI range3a IN RANGE1 OUT RANGE1 lt range3b gt IN RANGE2 OUT RANGE2 gledge3a GLEDgel NOT GLEDgel gledge3b GLEDge2 NOT GLEDge2 timer3a TIMER1 lt TIMER1 gt lt timer3b gt TIMER2 lt TIMER2 gt is optional such that it can be used zero or more times must be used at least once and can be repeated 22 7 Examples Selector Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TTRigger TTRace Qualifier Rules The following rules apply to qualifiers e Qualifiers are quoted strings and therefore need quotes e Expressions are evaluated from left to right e Parenthesis are used to change the order evaluation and therefore are optional e Anexpression must map into the combination logic presented in the combination p
126. 4 5 DOWNload command 11 11 DSP command 10 6 DTE 3 3 Duplicate keywords 1 9 E ECL 29 5 edge search 31 16 EDGE trigger 34 2 34 11 EDGE Trigger Mode 34 2 Ellipsis 4 5 Embedded strings 1 3 1 6 Enter statement 1 3 EOI command 9 11 ERRor command 10 7 Error messages 7 2 ESB 6 4 Event Status Register 6 4 Example Using AUToscale 27 4 Examples program 36 2 EXE 6 5 Execution errors 7 4 Exponents 1 12 Extended interface 3 4 F FALLtime 32 6 falltime measurement 32 6 FALLtime 32 6 File types 11 12 FIND command query 16 13 22 13 FIND query 20 9 FORMat 35 10 FORMat 35 10 Fractional values 1 13 FREQuency 32 6 frequency measurement 32 6 FREQuency 32 6 G GET 2 6 GLEDge command query 22 14 GPIB 2 2 2 3 6 8 GPIB address 2 3 GPIB device address 2 4 GPIB interface 2 3 GPIB interface code 2 4 GPIB interface functions 2 2 greater than argument 31 5 Group execute trigger 2 6 H HAXis command query 19 5 19 6 HEADer command 1 16 10 8 Headers 1 6 1 8 1 11 horizontal time range 33 6 Host language 1 6 HTIMe query 12 6 I Index 3 Index dentification number 9 8 dentifying modules 9 8 EEE 488 1 2 2 5 2 EEE 488 1 bus commands 2 6 EEE 488 2 5 2 FC 2 6 immediate trigger 34 11 infinite persistence 30 4 nfinity 4 4 nitialization 1 4 ITialize command 11 13 Port command 12 6 nput buffer 5 3 input impedance
127. 5 Streg I ockckckckckckckckckck ck k k kk kk TRANSFER SETUP TO THE 16550 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Transfer the setup from the buffer to the 1660A TRANSFER Buff TO Comm COUNT Numbytes WAIT pockckckckckckckckckck ck ck k ck k kk kk k RESTORE BUFFER POINTERS kkkkck kc k ck ckckckckckck ck k KEK Restore the transfer buffer pointer I CONTROL Buff 5 Streg po ockckckckckckckckckckck ck ck kk kk k SEND TERMINATING LINE FEED xxxxkkkkkkkkkkkkk ck k ck ko Send the terminating linefeed to properly terminate the setup string OUTPUT Comm PRINT SENT THE SETUP END 36 16 10 20 30 40 50 55 56 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data This program uses the SYSTem DATA query to transfer acquired data to your controller It is useful for getting acquired data for setting up the logic analyzer by the controller at a later time This query differs from the SYSTem SETup query because it transfers only the acquired data This program also uses the SYSTem DATA command to transfer the logic analyzer data from the controller back to the logic analyzer and load the analyzer with the acquired data The SYSTem DATA command differs from the SYSTem SETup command because it transfers both the configuration and the acquired data You should always pr
128. 520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 Programming Examples Making a State Compare measurement enters the line numbers and error numbers DIM Lines 20 DIM Errors 4 DIM Commas 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Display the Difference listing I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE MENU DIFFERENCE LK RR KK RK KK KK KK ce ke KK KK KK KEK kk KK KK KK kk kk kk che kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk KK kk kkk kkk kk kk k Loop to query all 508 possible errors I FOR Error 1 TO 508 Read the compare differences OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE FIND amp VALS Error kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Format the Error string data for display on the controller screen IF Error99 THEN GOTO 1580 IF Error9 THEN GOTO 1550 ENTER 707 USING 1A Error ENTER 707 USING 1A Comma ENTER 707 USING K Line Error return IVAL Error 10 IF Error return 0 THEN GOTO 1820 GOTO 1610 ENTER 707 USING 3A Errors ENTER 707 USING K Line GOTO 1610 ENTER 707 USING 4A Error ENTER 707 USING K Line l kckckckckckck 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 23 Test for the last error The error number of the last error is the same as the error number of the first number
129. 63A are organized as follows XXXX XXXX XXXX XXKJ 26 11 DATA and SETup Commands Time Tag Data Description Time Tag Data Description The time tag data starts at the end of the acquired data Each data row has an 8 byte time tag for each chip Z pod set The starting location of the time tag data is immediately after the last row of valid data maximum data byte 1 If an analyzer is in a non transitional mode the master chip byte 26 is the only chip with valid time tag data The time tag data is a decimal integer representing time in picoseconds for both timing and state time tags For state tags in the state analyzer tag data is a decimal integer representing the number of states Time Tag Block for the 1660A Byte 1 through 8 64 bits starting with the MSB First sample tag for pods 1 and 2 Byte 9 through 16 64 bits starting with the MSB Second sample tag for pods 1 and 2 Byte w through w 7 64 bits starting with the MSB Last sample tag for pods 1 and 2 Byte w 8 through w 15 64 bits starting with the MSB First sample tag for pods 3 and 4 Byte w 16 through w 23 64 bits starting with the MSB Second sample tag for pods 3 and 4 Byte x through x 7 64 bits starting with the MSB Last sample tag for pods 3 and 4 26 12 DATA and SETup Commands Time Tag Data Description Byte x 8 through x 15 64 bits starting with the MSB First sample tag for
130. 660 series logic analyzers whether they are sent over the bus as separate program messages or within other program messages If an instrument subsystem has been selected and a common command is received by the instrument the logic analyzer will remain in the selected subsystem Example Example Common Commands If the program message in this example is received by the logic analyzer it will initialize the disk and store the file and clear the status information This is not be the case if some other type of command is received within the program message MMEMORY INITIALIZE CLS STORE FILE DESCRIPTION This program message initializes the disk selects the module in slot A then stores the file In this example MMEMORY must be sent again in order to reenter the memory subsystem and store the file MMEMORY INITIALIZE SELECT 1 MMEMORY STORE FILE DESCRIPTION Status Registers Each status register has an associated status enable mask register By setting the bits in the status enable register you can select the status information you wish to use Any status bits that have not been masked enabled in the enable register will not be used to report status summary information to bits in other status registers Refer to chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of how to read the status registers and how to use the status information available from this instrument 8 3 Fi
131. 7 5 query program example 36 22 Query responses 1 15 4 4 Question mark 1 10 QYE 6 5 R RANGe 29 8 33 6 RANGe command 25 6 RANGe command query 14 9 16 14 16 15 18 8 20 11 22 15 22 16 23 16 RANGe 29 8 33 6 range argument 29 4 33 3 raw data 35 6 real time clock section data 26 17 Receive Data RD 3 4 3 5 ECord 35 12 ECord 35 12 emote 2 5 emote enable 2 5 EMove 30 9 30 10 EMove command 14 10 15 13 17 15 8 9 21 7 23 16 24 14 25 7 EN 2 5 EName command 11 18 EName command query 13 8 equest To Send RTS 3 5 ESource command query 13 9 Response data 1 20 Responses 1 16 DIT Dunn return X O marker data 31 19 returning preamble 35 11 returning waveform data record 35 9 RISetime 32 9 risetime measurement 32 9 RISetime 32 9 RMODe command 9 18 Root 4 6 RQC 6 5 RQS 6 4 RS 232C 3 2 3 10 5 2 RUNTil 31 11 RUNTil command query 17 15 17 16 20 12 23 17 24 15 RUNTII 31 11 S sample rate data 31 12 sampling period 35 13 SCHart selector 19 4 SCHart Subsystem 19 1 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6 19 7 SDC 2 6 Section data 26 6 Section data format 26 4 Section header 26 6 ELect command 9 20 elect command tree 9 21 elected device clear 2 6 EQuence command query 16 16 22 17 equential commands 4 4 erial poll 6 7 ervice Request Enable Register 6 4 ET command 20 13 ETColor command 9 22 setting logic 34 10 setting stop condit
132. 7 8 9 10 2through 10 unused integer from 0 to 31 string containing lt acquisition spec gt 1 2 A B C D E F G H I 3 slot where acquisition card is located string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B ol lx 0 0 1l2 3 a 5 6 7 x 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A C D E F X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X integer real number string of one alpha and one numeric character slot number in which the time base card is installed real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OFF LT value GT value INRange lt value gt value OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt greater than less than real number real number from 0 to 500 representing seconds 23 6 Selector Example Command lt setting gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem TWAVeform TWAVeform MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform The TWAVeform selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings found in the Timing Waveforms menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY 100E 9 ACCumulate MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACCumulate setting The ACCumulate command allows you to control whether the chart display gets erased between each individual run or whether subsequent waveforms are allowed to be displayed over the previous ones O OFF or 1 0N OUTPUT
133. ACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH3 A OR B OR NOTG T UL 22 10 Query Syntax Returned Format Example Figure 22 2 Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem BRANch MACHine 1 2 TTRigger BRANCh N The BRANch query returns the current branch qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHine 1 2 TTRigger BRANch lt N gt branch qualifier to level num NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TTRIGGER BRANCH3 Current Gualifier a b Cg h timer2 gt 400ns S Complex Qualifier glitch edge2 Figure 22 2 is a front panel representation of the complex qualifier a OR b And g OR h This example would be used to specify this complex qualifier OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 A OR B AND G OR H 2 22 11 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem CLEar eau a a l l a ER Terms A through E RANGE 1 GLITCH EDGE1 and TIMER 1 must be grouped together and terms F through J RANGE 2 GLITCH EDGE2 and TIMER 2 must be grouped together In the first level terms from one group may not be mixed with terms from the other For example the expression A OR IN RANGE2 AND C OR H is not allowed because the term C cannot be specified in the E through J group In the first level the operators you can use are AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR Either AND or OR may be used at the second level to join the two groups together It is acceptable for a group to consist
134. ANSMITTED 16508 BL22 Figure 1 2 Definite length Block Response Data The 8 states the number of digits that follow and 00000080 states the number of bytes to be transmitted which is 80 Example Example Example Introduction to Programming Multiple Queries Multiple Queries You can send multiple queries to the logic analyzer within a single program message but you must also read them back within a single program message This can be accomplished by either reading them back into a string variable or into multiple numeric variables You can read the result of the query SYSTEM HEADER LONGFORM into the string variable Results with the command ENTER XXX Results When you read the result of multiple queries into string variables each response is separated by a semicolon The response of the query SYSTEM HEADER LONGFORM with HEADER and LONGFORM turned on is SYSTEM HEADER 1 SYSTEM LONGFORM 1 If you do not need to see the headers when the numeric values are returned then you could use numeric variables When you are receiving numeric data into numeric variables the headers should be turned off Otherwise the headers may cause misinterpretation of returned data The following program message is used to read the query SYSTEM HEADERS LONGFORM into multiple numeric variables ENTER XXX Resultl Result2 1 21 Introduction to Programming Instrument Status Instrument
135. ATE OTAG MACHine 1 2 SLISt OTAG time value state value The OTAG command specifies the tag value on which the O Marker should be placed The tag value is time when time tagging is on or states when state tagging is on If the data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OTAG 40 0E 6 17 13 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt state value Example Command col num Module num label name Example SLISt Subsystem OVERlay MACHine 1 2 SLISt OTAG The OTAG query returns the O Marker position in time when time tagging is on or in states when state tagging is on regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 for time tagging or returns 327767 for state tagging MACHine 1 2 SLISt OTAG time value state value gt lt NL gt real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OTAG OVERlay MACHine 1 2 SLISt OVERlay col num module num MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt The OVERlay command allows you to add time correlated labels from other modules or machines to the state listing integer from 1 to 61 integer 1 through 10 2 through 10 unused string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OVERlay 25 5 MACHINE2 DATA 17 14 Command Example
136. AUTO is chosen Statistics mode allows you to make minimum maximum and mean time interval measurements from the X marker to the O marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMODE ON MARKer TMODe The TMODe query returns the current marker mode choice MARKer TMODe lt state gt lt NL gt ON or OFF or AUTO OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMODE For compatibility with older modules the MMODe command query will function the same as the TMODe command query 31 14 Command Example Query Returned Format lt state gt Example MARKer Subsystem VMODe VMODe MARKer VMODe OFF o ON 1 The VMODe command allows you to select the voltage marker mode The choices are OFF or ON When OFF voltage marker measurements cannot be made When the voltage markers are turned on the A and B markers can be moved to make voltage measurements When used in conjunction with the time markers TMODe both delta t and delta v measurements are possible OUTPUT XXX MARKER VMODE OFF MARKer VMODe The VMODe query returns the current voltage marker mode choice MARKer VMODe lt state gt lt NL gt lor0 OUTPUT XXX MARKER VMODE 31 15 Returned Format lt N gt lt level gt Example Query Returned Format lt valid runs gt lt total runs gt Example MARKer Subsystem VOTime VOTime MARKer VOTime CHANNEL lt N gt The VOTime query retur
137. AXis query returns the current horizontal axis label and scaling MACHine 1 2 SCHart HAXis STAtes state low value state high value label name label low value label high value OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART HAXIS 19 6 Command lt label_name gt lt low_value gt lt high_value gt Examples Query Returned Format Example SCHart Subsystem VAXis VAXis MACHine 1 2 SCHart VAXis label name low value high value The VAXis command allows you to choose which label will be plotted on the vertical axis of the chart and scale the vertical axis by specifying the high value and low value string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string from 0 to 2 1 HFFFF string from 1ow value to 2 1 HFFFF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SCHART VAXIS SUM1 O 99 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART VAXIS BUS HHOOFF 4H0500 MACHine 1 2 SCHart VAXis The VAXis query returns the current vertical axis label and scaling MACHine 1 2 SCHart VAXis label name low value high value NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART VAXIS 19 8 20 COMPare Subsystem Introduction Commands in the state COMPare subsystem provide the ability to do a bit by bit comparison between the acquired state data listing and a compare data image The commands are e CLEar e CMASk e COPY e DATA e FIND e LINE e MENU e RANG
138. C Refer to chapter 1 Introduction to Programming for information on initializing the interface Program Comments Line 10 selects the oscilloscope in slot B Line 20 causes the oscilloscope to execute the AUTOSCALE command Line 25 causes the oscilloscope to wait 5 seconds the time you allow for the measurement to be complete Line 30 dimensions and reserves memory for the string array Line 40 causes the oscilloscope to make all the parametric measurements of the Measure subsystem The source for the measurements is channel 1 Line 50 enters data from the oscilloscope Line 60 causes the data to be printed either on controller screen or hardcopy depending on the output device chosen For more information on the specific oscilloscope commands refer to RU chapters 28 through 35 of this manual 27 4 Command Example Oscilloscope Root Level Commands DiGitize DIGitize DIGitize The DIGitize command is used to acquire waveform data for transfer over GPIB The command initiates the Repetitive Run for the oscilloscope and any modules that are grouped together in Group Run through the Intermodule Bus If a RUNtil condition has been specified in any module the oscilloscope and the grouped modules will acquire data until the RUNtil conditions have been satisfied The Acquire subsystem commands may be used to set up conditions such as acquisition type and average count for the DIGitize command See the Ac
139. CESE Combined Event Status Enable CESE Combined Event Status Enable CESE value The CESE command sets the Combined Event Status Enable register This register is the enable register for the CESR register and contains the combined status of all of the MESE Module Event Status Enable registers of the 1660 series logic analyzer Table 9 3 lists the bit values for the CESE register An integer from 0 to 65535 OUTPUT XXX CESE 32 CESE The CESE query returns the current setting CESE lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CESE 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Combined Event Status Enable Register Bit Weight Enables 3to 15 not used 2 4 oscilloscope 1 2 logic analyzer 0 1 Intermodule Query Returned Format lt value gt Example Table 9 4 Mainframe Commands CESR Combined Event Status Register CESR Combined Event Status Register CESR The CESR query returns the contents of the Combined Event Status register This register contains the combined status of all of the MESRs Module Event Status Registers of the 1660 series logic analyzer Table 9 4 lists the bit values for the CESR register CESR lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 to 65535 OUTPUT XXX CESR 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Combined Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 3to 15 0 not used 2 4 Oscilloscope 0 No new status 1 Status to report 1 2 Logic
140. Conventions Either of the following examples turns on the headers and long form Long form OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER ON LONGFORM ON Short form OUTPUT XXX SYST HEAD ON LONG ON Example Example Introduction to Programming Parameter Data Types Parameter Data Types There are three main types of data which are used in parameters They are numeric string and keyword A fourth type block data is used only for a few instructions the DATA and SETup instructions in the SYSTem subsystem see chapter 10 the CATalog UPLoad and DOWNload instructions in the MMEMory subsystem see chapter 11 These syntax rules also show how data may be formatted when sent back from the 1660 series logic analyzers as a response The parameter list always follows the instruction header and is separated from it by white space When more than one parameter is used they are separated by commas You are allowed to include one or more white spaces around the commas but it is not mandatory Numeric data For numeric data you have the option of using exponential notation or using suffixes to indicate which unit is being used However exponential notation is only applicable to the decimal number base Tables 5 1 and 5 2 in chapter 5 Message Communications and System Functions list all available suffixes Do not combine an exponent with a unit The following numbers are all equal 28 0 28E2 280E 1 28000m 0 028
141. DELay time val POSTstore poststore NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TPOSITION 22 22 23 TWAVeform Subsystem Introduction The TWAVeform subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Waveforms menu in the 1660 series logic analyzer These commands are ACCumulate ACQuisition CENter CLRPattern CLRStat DELay INSert MMODe OCONdition OPATtern OSEarch OTIMe RANGe REMove RUNTi SPERiod TAVerage TMAXimum TMINimum TPOSition VRUNs XCONdition XOTime XPATtern XSEarch XTIMe 23 2 TWAVeform Subsystem Figure 23 1 E Y Twaveform e J gt Accumulate space ON gt OFF H r ACCumu late gt m cavis i tion m space Dp emen em He Acquisition gt He CLRrPattern gt space x gt 9 ALL DeLay gt space delay_value gt Insert gt space label nome bit_id N modu le_spec LC Ie woDe Space eorr gt He ocondit ion J space ENTer ing H r OCONdi tion gt Y 01660591 A TWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram 23 3 TWAVeform Subsystem Figure 23 1 continued Y OPAT tern Je space H r label_name e label pattern OPAT tern el space H r label name gt e OSE arch Dae space H r occurrence D S
142. DISPlay LABel CHANnel lt N gt The LABel query returns the label string assigned to the specified channel If no label has been assigned the default channel identifier single character and single number is returned DISPlay LABel CHANnel lt N gt lt label_str gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY LABEL CHANNEL2 30 7 Command module number labels Example Command label Example DISPlay Subsystem MINus MINus DISPlay MINus lt module_number gt lt label gt lt label gt The MINus command algebraically subtracts one channel from another and inserts the resultant waveform to the display The first parameter is an optional module specifier The module is identified by the slot number that contains the oscilloscope card always 2 The next two parameters are the label of the waveform selected to be added to the display The label names are defined in the same manner as the INSert command Always 2 string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY MINUS 2 C1 C2 OVERlay DISPlay OVERlay lt label gt lt label gt The OVERlay command overlays oscilloscope waveforms The syntax parameters are the labels of the waveforms that are to be overlaid Only waveforms sharing acommon card can be overlaid A label may be used only once with each OVERlay command string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quot
143. E FILE FILE DESCRIPTION or OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY INITIALIZE OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY STORE FILE FILE DESCRIPTION In this example the leading colon before SYSTEM tells the parser to go back to the root ofthe command tree The parser can then see the SYSTEM PRINT command OUTPUT XXX MMEM CATALOG SYSTEM PRINT ALL Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Figure 4 1 SELect x cA X Common SYSTem MMEMory NTermodule Commands CLS BEEPer DATA AUToload DELete ESE CAPability DSP CATalog HT IMe ESR CARDcage ERRor COPY NPor IDN CESE HEADer DOWN oad NSer IST CESR LONGform INITialize SKEW lt N gt OPC EOI PRINt LOADL CONf ig TREE OPT LER SETup LOAD IASSemb ler TTIMe PRE LOCKout SI RST MENU PACK SRE MESE lt N gt PURge STB MESR lt N gt REName TRG RMODe STOReL CONf ig TST RTC PLoad WA SELecGEI VOL ume u SETColor STARt STOP T T T c4 SFORmat STRigger SLISt SWAVe form SCHart COMPare CLOCk ACQuistion COLumn ACCumu late ACCumu late CLEar LABel BRANch CLRPattern ACQuisition HAXis CMASk MASTer CLEar DATA CENter VAXis COPY MODE FIND LINE CLRPattern DATA MOPQual RANGe MMODe CLRStat FIND MQUa I SEQuence OPATtern DELay LINE REMove STORe OSEarch INSert MENU SETHo Id TAG OSTate RANGe RANGe SLAVe TAKenbranch OTAG REMove RUNT i SOPQual TCONtrol OVER lay TAKenbranch S
144. E lt mask gt The SRE command sets the Service Request Enable Register bits The Service Request Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be enabled in the Status Byte Register A one in the Service Request Enable Register will enable the corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register A zero will disable the bit Refer to table 8 5 for the bits in the Service Request Enable Register and what they mask Refer to Chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status An integer from 0 to 255 This example enables a service request to be generated when a message is available in the output queue When a message is available the MAV Message Available bit will be high OUTPUT XXX SRE 16 SRE The SRE query returns the current value lt mask gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 to 255 representing the sum of all bits that are set OUTPUT XXX SRE Table 8 5 Query Returned Format lt value gt Example Common Commands STB Status Byte 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Service Request Enable Register Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 15 8 not used 7 128 not used 6 64 MSS Master Summary Status always 0 5 32 ESB Event Status 4 16 MAV Message Available 3 8 LCL Local 2 4 not used 1 2 not used 0 1 MSB Module Summary STB Status Byte STB The STB query returns the current value of the instrument s status byte The MSS Master Summary Status bit a
145. E 14 7 OSTate 14 8 OTIMe 14 8 RANGe 14 9 REMove 14 10 XOTime 14 10 XSTate 14 11 XTIMe 14 11 Contents Contents 5 15 16 17 Contents SFORmat Subsystem SFORmat 15 6 CLOCk 15 6 LABel 15 7 MASTer 15 9 MODE 15 10 MOPQual 15 11 MQUal 15 12 REMove 15 13 SETHold 15 13 SLAVe 15 15 SOPQual 15 16 SQUal 15 17 THReshold 15 18 STRigger STRace Subsystem Qualifier 16 7 STRigger STRace 16 9 ACQuisition 16 9 BRANch 16 10 CLEar 16 12 FIND 16 13 RANGe 16 14 SEQuence 16 16 STORe 16 17 TAG 16 18 TAKenbranch 16 19 TCONtrol 16 20 TERM 16 21 TIMER 16 22 TPOSition 16 23 SLISt Subsystem SLISt 17 7 COLumn 17 7 Contents 6 18 CLRPattern 17 8 DATA 17 9 LINE 17 9 MMODe 17 10 OPATtern 17 11 OSEarch 17 12 OSTate 17 13 OTAG 17 13 OVERlay 17 14 REMove 17 15 RUNTil 17 15 TAVerage 17 17 TMAXimum 17 17 TMINimum 17 18 VRUNs 17 18 XOTag 17 19 XOTime 17 19 XPATtern 17 20 XSEarch 17 21 XSTate 17 22 XTAG 17 22 SWAVeform Subsystem SWAVeform 18 4 ACCumulate 18 5 ACQuisition 18 5 CENTer 18 6 CLRPattern 18 6 CLRStat 18 7 DELay 18 7 INSert 18 8 RANGe 18 8 REMove 18 9 TAKenbranch 18 9 TPOSition 18 10 Contents Contents 7 19 20 21 22 Contents SCHart Subsystem SCHart 19 4 ACCumulate 19 4 HAXis 19 5 VAXis 19 7 COMPare Subsystem COMPare 20 4 CLEar 20 5 CMASk 20 5 COPY 20 6 DATA 20 7 FIND 20 9 LINE 20 10 MENU 20 10 RANGe 20 11 RUNTi 20 12 SET 20 13 TFORmat
146. E F x 81112 3 2 5 amp 7 8 2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OPATtern label name The OPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 TLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OPATTERN A OSEarch MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The OSEarch command defines the search criteria for the O marker which is then used with associated OPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger the start of data or with the X marker The actual occurrence the marker searches for is determined by the occurrence parameter of the OSEarch recognizer specification relative to the origin An occurrence of 0 places the marker on the selected origin With a negative occurrence the marker searches before the origin With a positive occurrence the marker searches after the origin integer from 8191 to 8191 TRIGger STARt XMARker 24 12 Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format state num Example TLISt Subsystem OSTate OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSEarch The OSEarch query returns
147. ET SQUa TER REMove TPOSi tion THReshold TIMER RUNT i TPOSi tion TAVerage TMAX imum TMINimum VRUNs XOTag XOT ime XPAT tern XSEarch XSTate 01660836 XTAG 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Command Tree 4 8 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Figure 4 1 continued gt gt X 1 MACHine 1 2 WLISt DELay ARM INSert ASSi gn ANE LEVelarm OSTate NAME OTIMe TYPE RANGe REName NT DUE ime RESource XSTate XTIMe lt e TFORmat TTRigger TWAVeform TELST SYMBo ACQMode ACQuisition ACCumulate COLumn SYMBo LABel BRANch ACQuisition CLRPattern BASE REMove CLEar CENTer DATA PATTern THReshold FIND CLRPattern LINE RANGe GLEDge CLRStat MMODe REMove RANGe DELay OCONdition WIDTh SEQuence INSert OPATtern SPERiod MMODe OSEarch TCONtrol OCONdi tion OSTate TERM OPATtern OTAG TIMER OSEarch REMove TPOSi tion OTIMe RUNT i RANGe TAVerage REMove TMAX imum RUNT i TMINimum SPERiod VRUNS TAVerage XCONdition TMAX i mum XOTag TMINimum XOT ime TPOSi tion XPATtern VRUNs XSEarch XCONdi tion XSTate XOT ime XTAG XPATtern xSEarch XTIMe 01660842 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Command Tree continued 4 9 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Figure 4 1 continued gt X 2 T T T T l MODULE LEVEL ACQuire CHANne DISPlay MARKer MEASure TIMebase TRIGger WAVeform AUToscale COUNt COUPI ing ACCumulate ABVolt AL
148. Earch occurrence origin The OSEarch command defines the search criteria for the O marker which is then used with associated OPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger the start of data or with the X marker The actual occurrence the marker searches for is determined by the occurrence parameter of the OSEarch recognizer specification relative to the origin An occurrence of 0 places the marker on the selected origin With a negative occurrence the marker searches before the origin With a positive occurrence the marker searches after the origin integer from 8191 to 8191 TRIGger STARt XMARker OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSEarch The OSEarch query returns the search criteria for the O marker MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSEarch occurrence lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OSEARCH 17 12 Query Returned Format state num Example Command time value state value Example SLISt Subsystem OSTate OSTate MACHine 1 2 SLISt 0STate The OSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the O marker resides 8191 to 8191 If data is not valid the query returns 32767 MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSTate state num NL an integer from 8191 to 8191 or 32767 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OST
149. Event Status Enable Register enables the corresponding status in the Standard Event Status Enable Register Refer to Chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status An integer from 0 to 255 In this example the ESE 32 command will enable CME Command Error bit 5 of the Standard Event Status Enable Register Therefore when a command error occurs the event summary bit ESB in the Status Byte Register will also be set OUTPUT XXX ESE 32 ESE The ESE query returns the current contents of the enable register lt mask gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ESE 8 6 Common Commands ESR Event Status Register Table 8 2 Standard Event Status Enable Register Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 7 128 PON Power On 6 64 URO User Request 5 32 CME Command Error 4 16 EXE Execution Error 3 8 DDE Device Dependent Error 2 4 QYE Query Error 1 2 ROC Request Control 0 1 OPC Operation Complete ESR Event Status Register nm u The ESR query returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register Reading the register clears the Standard Event Status Register Returned Format lt status gt lt NL gt status An integer from 0 to 255 Example If a command error has occurred and bit 5 of the ESE register is set the string variable Esr_event will have bit 5 the CME bit set 10 OUTPUT XXX ESE 32 Enables bit 5 of the status register 20 OUTPUT XXX ESR Queries the status reg
150. HP 9000 Series 200 300 BASIC 6 2 is used in the programming examples If you use another language you will need to find the equivalents of Basic Commands like OUTPUT ENTER and CLEAR in order to convert the examples The instructions are always shown between the double quotes 1 5 Introduction to Programming Device Address Device Address The location where the device address must be specified also depends on the host language that you are using In some languages this could be specified outside the output command In BASIC this is always specified after the keyword OUTPUT The examples in this manual use a generic address of XXX When writing programs the number you use will depend on the cable you use in addition to the actual address If you are using an GPIB see chapter 2 Programming over GPIB If you are using RS 232C see chapter 3 Programming Over RS 232C Instructions Instructions both commands and queries normally appear as a string embedded in a statement of your host language such as BASIC Pascal or C The only time a parameter is not meant to be expressed as a string is when the instruction s syntax definition specifies block data There are just a few instructions which use block data Instructions are composed of two main parts the header which specifies the command or query to be sent and the parameters which provide additional data needed to clarify the meaning of the instruction Many que
151. IGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 LEVEL For PATTern trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER PATH CHANNEL1 LEVEL 34 9 Command EE N Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem LOGic LOGic TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt LOGic HIGH LOW DONTcare The LOGic command sets the logic for each trigger path in the PATTern trigger mode The choices are HIGH LOW and DONTcare The trigger level set by the LEVel command determines logic high and low threshold levels Any voltage higher than the present edge trigger level is considered a logic high for that trigger path any voltage lower than the trigger level is considered a logic low for that trigger path An integer from 1 or 2 OUTPUT XXX TRIG PATH CHAN1 LOG HIGH TRIGger LOGic The LOGic query returns the current logic of the previously selected trigger or path TRIGger LOGic HIGH LOW DONTcare lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG MODE PATT PATH CHAN1 LOG 34 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem MODE MODE TRIGger MODE EDGE PATTern IMMediate The MODE command allows you to select the trigger mode for the oscilloscope The EDGE mode will trigger the oscilloscope on an edge whose slope is determined by the SLOPe command at a voltage set by the LEVel command The PATTern mode will trigger the oscilloscope on entering or exiting a specifi
152. K The base of a number is shown with a prefix The available bases are binary GEB octal Q hexadecimal H and decimal default The following numbers are all equal B11100 034 H1C 28 You may not specify a base in conjunction with either exponents or unit suffixes Additionally negative numbers must be expressed in decimal Introduction to Programming Parameter Data Types When a syntax definition specifies that a number is an integer that means that the number should be whole Any fractional part would be ignored truncating the number Numeric parameters that accept fractional values are called real numbers All numbers are expected to be strings of ASCII characters Thus when sending the number 9 you send a byte representing the ASCII code for the character 9 which is 57 or 0011 1001 in binary A three digit number like 102 will take up three bytes ASCII codes 49 48 and 50 This is taken care of automatically when you include the entire instruction in a string String data String data may be delimited with either single or double quotes String parameters representing labels are case sensitive For instance the labels Bus A and bus a are unique and should not be used indiscriminately Also pay attention to the presence of spaces because they act as legal characters just like any other So the labels In and In are also two different labels Keyword data In many cases a parameter
153. K kk kk k Save the transfer buffer pointer so it can be restored after the transfer STATUS Buff 5 Streg pockckk ck k kk kk kk kk TRANSFER DATA TO THE LOGIC ANALYZER k kkkkkkkkk k Transfer the data from the buffer to the logic analyzer TRANSFER Buff TO Comm COUNT Numbytes WAIT l ckckckckckckckckck ck kc ck ck ck k kk kk k RESTORE BUFFER POINTERS RRR RK KK KK KK ckckckck ck k KEK Restore the transfer buffer pointer I CONTROL Buff 5 Streg 36 19 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data okckckckckckckck kk ck k kk k GEND TERMINATING LINE FEED FER KR KKK KKK ck ck kkk kkk kkk Send the terminating linefeed to properly terminate the data string OUTPUT Comm P PRINT END SENT THE DATA 36 20 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 Programming Examples Checking for measurement completion Checking for measurement completion This program can be appended to or inserted into another program when you need to know when a measurement is complete If it is at the end ofa program it will tell you when measurement is complete If you insert it into a program it will halt the program until the current measurement is complete This program is also in the state analyzer example program in Making
154. L DELay CONDition COUNt DIGitize TYPE ECL CONNect AVolt FALLt ime MODE DELay DATA OFFSet INSert BVolt FREQuency RANGe LEVel FORMat PROBe MINus CENTer NWIDth LOGic POINts RANGe PLUS MSTats OVERshoot MODE PRE amb e TTL OVER I ay OAUTo PERiod PATH RECord REMove OTIMe PREShoot SLOPe SOURce LABe RUNT i PWIDth SOURCE SPERiod SHOW RISE t ime TYPE TAVerage SOURce VALid TMAXimum VAMPI i tude XINCrement TMINimum VBASe XORi gin TMODe VMAX XREF erence VMODe VMIN YINCrement VOT ime VPP YORigin VRUNs VTOP YREF erence VXT ime XAUTo XOTIMe XTIMe 01660843 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Command Tree continued 4 10 Table 4 2 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Alphabetic Command Cross Reference Command ABVOLt ACCumulate ACQMode ACQuisition ALL ARM ASSign AUToload AUToscale AVOLt BASE BEEPer BRANch BVOLt CAPability CARDcage CATalog CENTer CESE CESR CLEar CLOCK CLRPattern CLRStat CMASk COLumn CONDition CONNect COPY COUNt COUPling DATA DELay DELete DIGitize DOWNload Subsystem MARKer SCHart SWAVeform TWAVeform DISPlay TFORmat STRigger SWAVeform TTRigger TWAVeform MEASure MACHine MACHine MMEMory MODULE LEVEL MARKer SYMBol Mainframe STRigger TTRigger MARKer Mainframe Mainframe MMEMory SWAVeform TWAVeform MARKer Mainframe Mainframe COMPare STRigger TTRigger SFORmat SLISt SWAVeform TLISt TWAVeform SWAVef
155. ME XPATtern MACHine 1 2 TLISt XPATtern label name label pattern The XPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the X Marker which is then used with the XSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several iterations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and pne 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the 1abel pattern parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B 0 1 X 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E EF X o l2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 24 19 Examples Query Returned Format Example Command lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example TLISt Subsystem XSEarch OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt The XPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 TLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XPATTERN A
156. NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 positive pulse width in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL2 PWIDTH RISetime MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt RISetime The RISetime query makes a risetime measurement on the selected channel by finding the 10 and 90 voltage levels of the first rising edge displayed on screen MEASure RISetime lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 risetime in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOUR CHAN1 RISETIME 32 9 Command lt N gt Example Query Returned Format Example MEASure Subsystem SOURce SOURce MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt The SOURce command specifies the source to be used for subsequent measurements If the source is not specified the last waveform source is assumed An integer from 1 to2 OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 MEASure SOURCe The SOURce query returns the presently specified channel MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX M EASURE SOURCE 32 10 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem VAMPlitude VAMPlitude MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VAMPlitude The VAMPlitude query makes a voltage measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding the relative maximum VTOP and minimum VBASe points o
157. OMPare MACHine 1 2 COMPare The COMPare selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings found in the Compare menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 COMPARE FIND 819 20 4 Command Example Command lt label_name gt care Spec lt gt Example COMPare Subsystem CLEar CLEar MACHine 1 2 COMPare CLEar The CLEar command clears all don t cares in the reference listing and replaces them with zeros except when the CLEar command immediately follows the SET command see SET command OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE CLEAR CMASk MACHine 1 2 COMPare CMASk lt label_name gt lt care_spec gt The CMASk Compare Mask command allows you to set the bits in the channel mask for a given label in the compare listing image to compares or don t compares A string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters A string of characters l 82 characters maximum An indicator that tells the logic analyzer that it cares about this bit An indicator that tells the logic analyzer that it does not care about this bit don t care OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE CMASK DATA Query Returned Format lt label name gt care Spec lt gt lt gt Example Command Example COMPare Subsys
158. P VPP MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VPP The VPP query makes a peak to peak voltage measurement on the selected source The measurement is made by finding the absolute maximum VMAX and minimum VMIN points on the displayed waveform MEASure VPP lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 peak to peak voltage of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 VPP VTOP MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VTOP The VTOP query returns the voltage at the top relative maximum of the waveform on the selected source MEASure VTOP lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 voltage at the top relative maximum of the selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN2 VTOP 32 13 32 14 33 TIMebase Subsystem Introduction The commands of the Timebase Subsystem control the Timebase Trigger Delay Time and the Timebase Mode If TRIGgered mode is to be used ensure that the trigger specifications of the Trigger Subsystem have been set Refer to Figure 33 1 for the TIMebase Subsystem Syntax Diagram 33 2 TIMebase Subsystem Figure 33 1 N re TIMebose oe Delay space gt delay_arg gt m DELay w MODe gt AUTO gt I voDe Rance space gt range_arg gt 16530504 TiMebase Subsystem Syntax Diagram Table 33 1 TIMebase Parameter Values Paramete
159. PATtern OSEarch OSTate OTAG OVERlay REMove RUNTi TAVerage TMAXimum TMINimum VRUNs XOTag XOTime XPATtern XSEarch XSTate XTAG 17 2 SLISt Subsystem Figure 17 1 CU Csutst Y coLum space co tnum i gt label name I Ye base H eye mod_num e machi nec 2 COL umn f space gt col_num gt e CLRPottern 2 space X AR DATA space gt ine number label name et He LINE space gt line_num_mid_screen LINE Ie wobe Space eorr Ie wvoDe OPATtern space H r label name label pattern 9 OPAT tern space me label name gt H OSE or ch space j occurrence e TRIGger pP OSEar ch gt i 16550821 SLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram 17 3 SLISt Subsystem Figure 17 1 continued otac space T time value gt state_value OTAG gt Im OVER lay space He co I_num eC modul e_num C Ca 127 label name gt REM ve RUNT i Dx space gt run_unti l_spec gt He RUNT i 1 gt Im TAVer age gt Ie TMAX imum gt MP TMIN imum gt Y 16550520 A SLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued
160. Quisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command allows you to specify the acquisition mode for the State analyzer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC MACHine 1 2 STRigger ACQuisition The ACQuisition query returns the current acquisition mode specified MACHine 1 2 STRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER ACQUISITION Command Example lt N gt lt to_level_ number gt number of levels branch qualifier STRigger STRace Subsystem BRANch BRANch MACHine 1 2 STRigger BRANch lt N gt branch qualifier to level number The BRANch command defines the branch qualifier for a given sequence level When this branch qualifier is matched it will cause the sequencer to jump to the specified sequence level The terms used by the branch qualifier A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN RANGE and OUT RANGE is determined by the RANGE command Within the limitations shown by the syntax definitions complex expressions may be formed using the AND and OR operators Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions on the next page show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed Figure 16 2 shows a complex expression as seen in the Stat
161. RESOURCE res terms res terms gt lt NL gt A B C D E F G H I d TIMer1 TIMer2 RANGe1 RANGe2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 RESOURCE 13 9 MACHine Subsystem TYPE TYPE Command MACHine 1 2 TYPE analyzer type The TYPE command specifies what type a specified analyzer machine will be The analyzer types are state or timing The TYPE command also allows you to turn off a particular machine Only one timing analyzer can be specified at a time analyzer type OFF STATe TIMing Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TYPE STATE Query MACHine 1 2 TYPE The TYPE query returns the current analyzer type for the specified analyzer Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TYPE analyzer _type gt lt NL gt analyzer type OFF STATe TIMing Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TYPE 13 10 14 WLISt Subsystem Introduction The WLISt subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing State mixed mode display The X and O markers can only be placed on the waveforms in the waveform portion of the Timing State mixed mode display The XSTate and OSTate queries return what states the X and O markers are on Because the markers can only be placed on the timing waveforms the queries return what state state acquisition memory location the marked pattern is stored in In order to have mixed mode one machine must be a state analyzer with time tagging on use MACHine lt N gt
162. SI lt msus gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY MSI 11 16 Command lt msus gt Examples Command lt name gt lt msus gt MMEMory Subsystem PACK PACK MMEMory PACK lt msus gt The PACK command packs the files on the LIF disk the disk in the drive Ifa DOS disk is in the drive when the PACK command is sent no action is taken Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY PACK OUTPUT XXX MMEM PACK INTERNALO PURGe MMEMory PURGe lt name gt lt msus gt The PURGe command deletes a file from the disk in the drive The lt name gt parameter specifies the filename to be deleted A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken 11 17 Examples Command lt name gt lt msus gt lt new name gt MMEMory Subsystem REName OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY PURGE FILEL OUTPUT XXX MMEM PURG FILE1 INTERNALO Once executed the purge command permanently erases all the existing information about the specified file After that there is no way to retrieve the original information REName MMEMory RENa
163. STRigger TAG TIME The WLISt subsystem commands are e DELay e NSert e LINE e OSTate e OTIMe e RANGe e REMove e XOTime e XSTate e XTIMe 14 2 Figure 14 1 WLISt Subsystem yo werst D Y eotLay space I delay_value gt Le beca space MUERE bit_id G module_spec m 3 LINE space gt line_num_mid_screen gt CE lorte space mt ime_vaiue gt I RANGE space time_range gt ac ECTS 8 xTIMe spoce gt t ime_volue gt XTIMe WLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16540809 14 3 Table 14 1 Selector Example WLISt Subsystem WLISt WLISt Parameter Values Parameter delay_value module_spec bit_id label_name line_num_mid_screen Value Real number between 2500 s and 2500 s 1J2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 slot where timing card is installed 2 through 10 unused An integer from 0 to 31 String of up to 6 alphanumeric characters An integer from 8191 to 8191 waveform String containing acquisition spec gt 1 2 time value Real number time range Real number between 10 ns and 10 ks WLISt WLISt The WLISt Waveforms LISting selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings normally found in the Mixed Mode menu Because the WLIS
164. Series Logic Analyzer Software 15607 1660 Series Logic Analyzer with Oscilloscope Configuration 16115 1660 Series Oscilloscope Software 15606 Autoload File 15615 Inverse Assembler 15614 Text Type LIF from Print to Disk 5813 11 12 MMEMory Subsystem INITialize INITialize Command MMEMory INITialize LIF DOS lt msus gt The INITialize command formats the disk in either LIF Logical Information Format or DOS Disk Operating System The lt msus gt is not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken If no format is specified then the initialize command will format the disk in the LIF format lt msus gt Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A msus is accepted but no action is taken Examples OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY INITIALIZE DOS OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY INITIALIZE LIF INTERNALO Once executed the initialize command formats the specified disk permanently erasing all existing information from the disk After that there is no way to retrieve the original information 11 13 Command lt name gt lt msus gt lt module gt Examples MMEMory Subsystem LOAD CONFig LOAD CONFig MMEMory LOAD CONfig lt name gt lt msus gt lt module gt The LOAD command loads a configuration file from the disk into the logic analyzer oscilloscope software options or the system The
165. Status Status registers track the current status of the logic analyzer By checking the instrument status you can find out whether an operation has been completed whether the instrument is receiving triggers and more Chapter 6 Status Reporting explains how to check the status of the instrument Programming Over GPIB Introduction This section describes the interface functions and some general concepts of the GPIB In general these functions are defined by IEEE 488 1 GPIB bus standard They deal with general bus management issues as well as messages which can be sent over the bus as bus commands Programming Over GPIB Interface Capabilities Interface Capabilities The interface capabilities of the 1660 series logic analyzers as defined by IEEE 488 1 are SH1 AH1 T5 TEO L3 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTI CO and E2 Command and Data Concepts The GPIB has two modes of operation command mode and data mode The bus is in command mode when the ATN line is true The command mode is used to send talk and listen addresses and various bus commands such as a group execute trigger GET The bus is in the data mode when the ATN line is false The data mode is used to convey device dependent messages across the bus These device dependent messages include all of the instrument commands and responses found in chapters 8 through 35 of this manual Addressing By using the front panel I O and SELECT keys
166. Subsystem TFORmat 21 4 ACQMode 21 5 LABel 21 6 REMove 21 7 THReshold 21 8 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Qualifier 22 6 TTRigger TTRace 22 8 ACQuisition 22 9 BRANch 22 9 CLEar 22 12 FIND 22 13 GLEDge 22 14 RANGe 22 15 Contents 8 23 SEQuence 22 17 SPERiod 22 18 TCONtrol 22 19 TERM 22 20 TIMER 22 21 TPOSition 22 22 TWAVeform Subsystem TWAVeform 23 7 ACCumulate 23 7 ACQuisition 23 8 CENTer 23 8 CLRPattern 23 9 CLRStat 23 9 DELay 23 9 INSert 23 10 MMODe 23 11 OCONdition 23 12 OPATtern 23 13 OSEarch 23 14 OTIMe 23 15 RANGe 23 16 REMove 23 16 RUNTil 23 17 SPERiod 23 18 TAVerage 23 19 TMAXimum 23 19 TMINimum 23 20 TPOSition 23 20 VRUNs 23 21 XCONdition 23 22 XOTime 23 22 XPATtern 23 23 XSEarch 23 24 XTIMe 23 25 Contents Contents 9 Contents 24 TLISt Subsystem TLISt 24 7 COLumn 24 7 CLRPattern 24 8 DATA 24 9 LINE 24 9 MMODe 24 10 OCONdition 24 11 OPATtern 24 11 OSEarch 24 12 OSTate 24 13 OTAG 24 14 REMove 24 14 RUNTil 24 15 TAVerage 24 16 TMAXimum 24 16 TMINimum 24 17 VRUNs 24 17 XCONdition 24 18 XOTag 24 18 XOTime 24 19 XPATtern 24 19 XSEarch 24 20 XSTate 24 21 XTAG 24 22 25 SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol 25 4 BASE 25 5 PATTern 25 6 RANGe 25 6 REMove 25 7 WIDTh 25 8 Contents 10 26 Part 4 27 28 29 30 Contents DATA and SETup Commands Data Format 26 3 SYSTem DATA 26 4 Section Header Description 26 6 Section Data 26 6 Data Preamble
167. T ACOMODE Command lt size gt Example Query Returned Format lt size gt Example TFORmat Subsystem ACOMode ACQMode MACHine 1 2 TFORmat ACQMode TRANSitional size CONVentional lt size gt GLITch The ACQMode acquisition mode command allows you to select the acquisition mode for the timing analyzer The options are e conventional mode at full channel 250 MHz e conventional mode at half channel 500 Mhz e transitional mode at full channel 125 MHz e transitional mode at half channel 250 MHz e glitch mode FULL HALF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT ACOMODE TRANSITIONAL HALF MACHine 1 2 TFORmat ACQMode The ACQMode query returns the current acquisition mode MACHine 1 2 TFORmat ACQMode TRANSitional lt size gt CONVentional lt size gt GLITch lt NL gt FULL HALF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT ACQMODE Command lt name gt lt polari lt clock_bi upper bi lower bi ty LS CS CS TFORmat Subsystem LABel LABel MACHine 1 2 Tformat LABel name lt polarity gt clock bits upper bits lower bits upper bits lower bits The LABel command allows you to specify polarity and to assign channels to new or existing labels If the specified label name does not match an existing label name a new label will be created The order of the pod specification parameters is significan
168. TARt XMARker me OSEarch gt space 5 time_value gt H OTIMe gt RA Ge J gt space gt t ime_range gt RANGE gt REMove gt X RUNT i D space I runcunti _spec RUNTi gt SPERiod gt TAVerage gt TMAX imum gt LIT 01660502 A TWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 23 4 TWAVeform Subsystem Figure 23 1 continued Y e TPoSition space STAR m CENTer l BEL gt time_val e m PosTstore percent H r TPOSI tion gt EXITing XPATtern space H r abel_name C gt label_pattern JM Im xPAT tern space H r label name gt xSEarch space H r occurrence wy TRIGger ta XSEarch XTIMe space Es time value gt XTIMe 16550811 TWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 23 5 Table 23 1 TWAVeform Subsystem TWAVeform Parameter Values Parameter delay value module spec bit id waveform acquisition spec label name label pattern occurrence time value label id module num time range run until spec GT LT value time val Value real number between 2500 s and 2500 s 1 2 3 4 5 6
169. TROL Buff 4 0 oxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kk SEND THE DATA QUERY xxxxxkk kk kk kdk kdk kk kk kk dee k OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM ON OUTPUT Comm SELECT 1 OUTPUT Comm SYSTEM DATA I poke k ke ke e ke k kx x x x x ENTER THE BLOCK DATA HEADER k KK kk kk KK kk kk ke ke kkk Enter the block data header in the proper format l ENTER Comm USING B Byte PRINT CHR Byte WHILE Byte lt gt 35 ENTER Comm USING B Byte PRINT CHR Byte END WHILE ENTER Comm USING B Byte PRINT CHR Byte Byte Byte 48 IF Byte 1 THEN ENTER Comm USING D Numbytes F Byte 2 THEN ENTER Comm USING DD Numbytes F Byte 3 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDD Numbytes F Byte 4 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDD Numbytes F Byte 5 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDD Numbytes F Byte 6 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDDD Numbytes F Byte 7 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDDDD Numbytes IF Byte 8 THEN ENTER Comm USING DDDDDDDD Numbytes PRINT Numbytes KKK KK KR KK KK kk kkkkkkk TRANSER THE DATA KER KK k KKK KKK kk kk KK KK KEK KEK KK KK kk k Transfer the data from the logic analyzer to the buffer I TRANSFER Comm TO Buff COUNT Numbytes WAIT ENTER Comm USING K Length PRINT LENGTH of Length string is LEN Length PRINT GOT THE DATA PAUSE 36 18 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 8
170. TRigger TIMER 1 2 lt time_value gt lt NL gt A real number from 400 ns to 500 seconds in increments which vary from 16 ns to 500 us OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TIMER1 TPOSition MACHine 1 2 STRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt poststore gt The TPOSition trigger position command allows you to set the trigger at the start center end or at any position in the trace poststore When STARt is specified approximately 16 states are stored before the trigger When END is specified approximately 16 states are stored after the trigger Poststore is defined as 0 to 100 percent When 0 or 100 percent is specified the trigger is actually the first or last state respectively An integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage of poststore OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TPOSITION END OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TPOSITION POSTstore 75 16 23 Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TPOSition MACHine 1 2 STRigger TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger position setting MACHine 1 2 STRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt poststore gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TPOSITION 16 24 17 SLISt Subsystem Introduction The SLISt subsystem contains the commands available for the State Listing menu in the 1660A logic analyzer These commands are COLumn CLRPattern DATA LINE MMODe O
171. Tup query program example 36 14 T TAG command query 16 18 TAKenbranch command query 16 19 18 9 Talk only mode 2 3 TAVerage 31 12 TAVerage query 17 17 23 19 24 16 TAVerage 31 12 TCONtrol command query 16 20 22 19 TERM command query 16 21 22 20 Terminator 1 7 TFORmat selector 21 4 TFORmat Subsystem 21 1 21 3 21 4 21 5 21 6 21 7 21 8 Three wire Interface 3 4 THReshold command query 15 18 21 8 ime 34 4 ime between markers 31 12 ime marker mode 31 14 ime measurements 31 2 ime tag data description 26 12 26 13 imebase mode 33 5 TIMebase Subsystem 33 2 TIMER command query 16 22 22 21 iming analyzer program example 36 3 TLISt selector 24 7 TLISt Subsystem 24 1 24 3 24 4 24 5 24 6 24 7 24 8 24 9 24 10 24 11 24 12 24 13 24 14 24 15 24 16 24 17 24 18 24 19 24 20 24 21 24 22 TMAXimum 31 13 TMAXimum query 17 17 23 19 24 16 TMINimum 31 13 TMINimum query 17 18 23 20 24 17 TMINimum 31 13 TMODe 31 14 TMODe 31 14 top of waveform voltage measurement 32 13 TPOSition command query 16 23 16 24 18 10 18 11 22 22 23 20 Trailing dots 4 5 Index 8 Index ransferring waveform data program example 36 28 36 30 Transmit Data TD 3 4 3 5 TREE command 12 9 rigger count See trigger 34 2 rigger delay 33 4 34 2 34 7 rigger level voltage 34 8 rigger logic 34 10 rigger mode 34 11 rigger path 34 12 rigger slope 34 12 rigger source 34 1
172. XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE ON MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACCumulate The ACCumulate query returns the current setting The query always shows the setting as the characters 0 off or 1 on MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACCumulate 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE 23 7 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_type gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem ACQuisition ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command allows you to specify the acquisition mode for the state analyzer The acquisition modes are automatic and manual OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACQuisition The ACQuisition query returns the current acquisition mode MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM ACQUISITION CENTer MACHine 1 2 Twaveform CENTer marker type The CENTer command allows you to center the waveform display about the specified markers x o xo TRIGger OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM CENTER X 23 8 Command Example Command Example Command TWAVeform Subsystem CLRPattern CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform CLRPattern X O ALL The CLRPattern command allows you to clear the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu
173. _spec gt The SLAVe clock command allows you to specify a slave clock for a given machine The slave clock is only used in the Slave and Demultiplexed clocking modes Each command deals with only one clock J K L M N P therefore a complete clock specification requires six commands one for each clock Edge specifications RISing FALLing or BOTH are ORed When slave clock is being used at least one edge must be specified K L M N P OFF RISing FALLing BOTH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SLAVE J RISING MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SLAVe lt clock id The SLAVe query returns the clock specification for the specified clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SLAVe lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SLAVE K 15 15 Command lt clock_pair_id gt lt qual_ operation gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem SOPQual SOPQual MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SOPQual clock pair id qual operation gt The SOPQual slave operation qualifier command allows you to specify either the AND or the OR operation between slave clock qualifier pair 1 and 2 or between slave clock qualifier pair 3 and 4 For example you can specify a slave clock operation qualifer 1 AND 2 112 AND OR OUTPUT XXX MACHine2 SFORMAT SOPQUAL 1 AND MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SOPQual clock pair id The SOPQual query returns the operation qualifie
174. a State Analyzer Measurement on pages 27 7 and 27 8 It is included in the state analyzer example program to show how it can be used in a program to halt the program until measurement is complete en 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 CHECK FOR MEASUREMENT COMPLETE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enable the MESR register and query the register for a measurement complete condition I OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM OFF Status 0 OUTPUT 707 MESE1 1 OUTPUT 707 MESR1 ENTER 707 Status Print the MESR register status I CLEAR SCREEN PRINT Measurement complete status is Status PRINT 0 not complete 1 complete Repeat the MESR query until measurement is complete WAIT 1 IF Status 1 THEN GOTO 630 GOTO 510 PRINT TABXY 30 15 Measurement is complete I END 36 21 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 Programming Examples Sending queries to the logic analyzer Sending queries to the logic analyzer This program example contains the steps required to send a query to the logic analyzer Sending the query alone only puts the requested information in an output buffer of the logic analyzer You must follow the query with an ENTER statement to transfer the query response to the controller When the query response is sent to the logic analyzer the query is pr
175. ace characters before sending the string to the instrument Instruction Parameters Instruction parameters are used to clarify the meaning of the command or query They provide necessary data such as whether a function should be on or off which waveform is to be displayed or which pattern is to be looked for Each instruction s syntax definition shows the parameters as well as the range of acceptable values they accept This chapter s Parameter Data Types section has all of the general rules about acceptable values When there is more than one parameter they are separated by commas White space surrounding the commas is optional Instruction Terminator An instruction is executed after the instruction terminator is received The terminator is the NL New Line character The NL character is an ASCII linefeed character decimal 10 The NL New Line terminator has the same function as an EOS End Of String and EOT End Of Text terminator 1 7 Example Example Example Introduction to Programming Header Types Header Types There are three types of headers Simple Command Compound Command and Common Command Simple Command Header Simple command headers contain a single keyword START and STOP are examples of simple command headers typically used in this logic analyzer The syntax is lt function gt lt terminator gt When parameters indicated by lt data gt must be included wi
176. ace o num_of_levels lev_of_trig M H SEQuence gt e STORe lt n gt space a store_qualifier gt Y 16550819 A STRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16 3 STRigger STRace Subsystem Figure 16 1 continued Y H r STORe lt N gt TAC gt space eorr TIME m stote tog qual ifier TAG Ie TAKenbronch Jj space TAKenbranch OFF STARt e TcoNtro e space TCONtrol lt N gt TERM space H r term id zat wm label name ne pattern TERM 9 space gt term id mad label name 16550818 STRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16 4 STRigger STRace Subsystem Figure 16 1 continued EE Y Ie TIMER lt t imer num space timer value gt e TIMER lt t imer_num gt H r TPOSition space eSTARE POSTstore post_value TPOSi tion 16550504 STRigger Subsystem Suntax Diagram continued 16 5 STRigger STRace Subsystem u Table 16 1 STRigger Parameter Values Parameter Values branch_qualifier lt qualifier gt to lev num integer from 1 to last level proceed qualifier qualifier occurrence number from 1 to 1048575 label name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters start pattern B 0 1 amp 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
177. ader off Longform on ADDR 19 POSITIVE lt terminator gt Header off Longform off ADDR 19 POS lt terminator gt Refer to the individual commands in Parts 2 through 4 of this guide for information on the format alpha or numeric of the data returned from each query Introduction to Programming String Variables String Variables Because there are so many ways to code numbers the 1660 series logic analyzers handle almost all data as ASCII strings Depending on your host language you may be able to use other types when reading in responses Sometimes it is helpful to use string variables in place of constants to send instructions to the 1660 series logic analyzers such as including the headers with a query response Example This example combines variables and constants in order to make it easier to switch from MACHINEI to MACHINE2 In BASIC the amp operator is used for string concatenation 5 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 Select the logic analyzer 10 LET Machines MACHINE2 Send all instructions to machine 2 20 OUTPUT XXX Machine amp TYPE STATE Make machine a state analyzer 30 Assign all labels to be positive 40 OUTPUT XXX Machine amp SFORMAT LABEL CHAN 1 POS 50 OUTPUT XXX Machine amp SFORMAT LABEL CHAN 2 POS 60 OUTPUT XXX Machine amp SFORMAT LABEL OUT POS 99 END Example If you want to observe the headers for queries you must brin
178. aders should be turned off when returning values to numeric variables 10 8 Command Example Query Returned Format Example SYSTem Subsystem LONGform LONGform SYSTem LONGform on OFF o The LONGform command sets the longform variable which tells the instrument how to format query responses If the LONGform command is set to OFF command headers and alpha arguments are sent from the instrument in the abbreviated form If the the LONGform command is set to ON the whole word will be output This command has no affect on the input data messages to the instrument Headers and arguments may be input in either the longform or shortform regardless of how the LONGform command is set OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM LONGFORM ON SYSTem LONG form The query returns the status of the LONGform command SYSTem LONGform 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM LONGFORM Command lt pathname gt lt start gt lt end gt Query SYSTem Subsystem PRINt PRINt SYSTem PRINt ALL PARTial lt start gt lt end gt DISK lt pathname gt SYSTem PRINt SCReen BTIF CTIF PCX EPS DISK lt pathname gt The PRINt command initiates a print of the screen or listing buffer over the current PRINTER communication interface to the printer or to a file on the disk The PRINT SCREEN option allows you to specify a graphics type BTIF format is black amp white CTIF and PCX format is color
179. after any other command it serves as a general purpose operation complete message generator 6 5 Example Status Reporting Key Features LCL remote to local Indicates whether a remote to local transition has occurred MSB module summary bit Indicates that an enable event in one of the modules Status registers has occurred Key Features A few of the most important features of Status Reporting are listed in the following paragraphs Operation Complete The IEEE 488 2 structure provides one technique that can be used to find out if any operation is finished The OPC command when sent to the instrument after the operation of interest will set the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register If the OPC bit and the RQS bit have been enabled a service request will be generated The commands that affect the OPC bit are the overlapped commands OUTPUT XXX SRE 32 ESE 1 lenables an OPC service request Status Byte The Status Byte contains the basic status information which is sent over the bus in a serial poll If the device is requesting service RQS set and the controller serial polls the device the RQS bit is cleared The MSS Master Summary Status bit read with STB and other bits of the Status Byte are not be cleared by reading them Only the RQS bit is cleared when read The Status Byte is cleared with the CLS common command 6 6 Figure 6 2 7 STATUS SUMMARY MESSAGES
180. aking a State analyzer measurement Making a State analyzer measurement This state analyzer program selects the 1660 series logic analyzer displays the configuration menu defines a state machine displays the state trigger menu sets a state trigger for multilevel triggering This program then starts a single acquisition measurement while checking for measurement completion This program is written in such a way you can run it with the E2433 60004 Logic Analyzer Training Board This example is the same as the Multilevel State Triggering example in chapter 9 of the E2455 90910 Logic Analyzer Training Guide poke sek ek ke ke STATE ANALYZER EXAMPLE k kk kk ck ck kk kk kk kk kk ek ek for the 1660 series Logic Analyzers pokckk sek ek e e eek x SELECT THE LOGIC ANALYZER x Rk RK ck kk kk kk ke e e Select the module slot in which the logic analyzer is installed Always a 1 for the 1660 series logic analyzers OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 poockckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck kk CONFIGURE THE STATE ANALYZER KX RRR KK kk kk kk kk kk kk kk Name Machine 1 STATE configure Machine 1 as a state analyzer assign pod 1 to Machine 1 and display System Configuration menu of the logic analyzer OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 NAME STATE OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TYPE STATE OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 ASSIGN 1 OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 0 poockckckckckckckckckck k kk kk kk k SETUP THE FORMAT SPECIFICATION okckckckck c
181. alyzer will go from remote to local with any front panel activity In remote with local lockout mode all controls except the power switch are entirely locked out Local control can only be restored by the controller Hint Cycling the power will also restore local control but this will also reset certain GPIB states It also resets the logic analyzer to the power on defaults and purges any acquired data in the acquisition memory The instrument is placed in remote mode by setting the REN Remote Enable bus control line true and then addressing the instrument to listen The instrument can be placed in local lockout mode by sending the local lockout LLO command see SYSTem LOCKout in chapter 9 Mainframe Commands The instrument can be returned to local mode by either setting the REN line false or sending the instrument the go to local GTL command 2 5 Programming Over GPIB Bus Commands Bus Commands The following commands are IEEE 488 1 bus commands ATN true IEEE 488 2 defines many of the actions which are taken when these commands are received by the logic analyzer Device Clear The device clear DCL or selected device clear SDC commands clear the input and output buffers reset the parser clear any pending commands and clear the Request OPC flag Group Execute Trigger GET The group execute trigger command will cause the same action as the START command for Group Run the instrument will acquire d
182. ample the first ten bytes that describe the section name contain a total of 80 bits as follows Byte 1 Byte 10 Binary 0100 0100 0100 0001 0101 0100 0100 0001 0010 0000 0010 0000 MSB LSB Decimal 68 65 84 65 32 32 32 32 32 32 ASCII DATA space space space space space space Command lt block_data gt block_length_ specifier gt lt length gt lt section gt DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem DATA SYSTem DATA SYSTem DATA lt block_data gt The SYSTem DATA command transmits the acquisition memory data from the controller to the 1660 series logic analyzer The block data consists of a variable number of bytes containing information captured by the acquisition chips The information will be in one of three formats depending on the type of data captured The three formats are glitch transitional conventional timing or state Each format is described in the Acquisition Data Description section later in this chapter Since no parameter checking is performed out of range values could cause instrument lockup therefore care should be taken when transferring the data string into the logic analyzer The block data parameter can be broken down into a block length specifier and a variable number of section s The block length specifier always takes the form 438DDDDDDDD Each D represents a digit ASCII characters 0 through 9 The value of the eight digits represents the total le
183. analyzer 0 No new status 1 Status to report 0 1 Intermodule 0 No new status 1 Status to report Command Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format Example Mainframe Commands EOI End Or Identify EOI End Or Identify EOI on orrF o The EOI command specifies whether or not the last byte of a reply from the instrument is to be sent with the EOI bus control line set true or not If EOI is turned off the logic analyzer will no longer be sending IEEE 488 2 compliant responses OUTPUT XXX EOI ON EOI The EOI query returns the current status of EOI EOI 1 0 lt NL gt a OUTPUT XXX EOI LER LCL Event Register LER The LER query allows the LCL Event Register to be read After the LCL Event Register is read it is cleared A one indicates a remote to local transition has taken place A zero indicates a remote to local transition has not taken place LER 0 1 NL OUTPUT XXX LER Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt module gt lt menu gt Mainframe Commands LOCKout LOCKout LocKout oNn OFF o The LOCKout command locks out or restores front panel operation When this function is on all controls except the power switch are entirely locked out OUTPUT XXX LOCKOUT ON LOCKout The LOCKout query returns the current sta
184. analyzers OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 LK KK KK KK KK KEK EK CONFIGURE THE STATE ANALYZER kxkkk kk kc k kc k kc k kk kk ke Name Machine 1 STATE configure Machine 1 as a state analyzer and assign pod 1 to Machine 1 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 NAME STATE OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TYPE STATE OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 ASSIGN 1 poo KKK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 kk Remove all labels previously set up make a label SCOUNT specify positive logic and assign the lower 8 bits of pod 1 to the label OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT REMOVE ALL OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT LABEL SCOUNT POS 0 0 255 poockckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck kc Make the J clock the Master clock and specify the falling edge I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT MASTER J FALLING LKR KKK RK KK RK KK EK RK KK KK KK KEK KK KK KK KK kk KK KK KK k k k k k k k k kk kk kk kk KK KEE KEKE KEK Specify two sequence levels the trigger sequence level specify 36 9 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 Programming Examples Making a State Compare measurement FF h
185. are similar to a 16500A logic analysis system with either a single logic analyzer module 1660A or one logic analyzer and one oscilloscope module 1660AS installed The main difference in mainframe commands for the 1660 series logic analyzers is the number of modules In the 1660 series logic analyzers module 0 contains the system level commands module 1 contains the logic analyzer level commands and module 2 contains the oscilloscope module commands The command parser in the 1660 series logic analyzers is designed to accept programs written for the 16500A logic analysis system with a 16550A logic analyzer and or oscilloscope modules The main difference is how you specify the SELECT command Remember the 1660 series logic analyzer is equivalent only to a mainframe with up to two modules therefore if you specify 3 through 10 for the SELECT command in your program the command parser will take no action This chapter contains mainframe commands with a syntax example for each command Each syntax example contains parameters for the 1600 series logic analyzers only Refer to figure 9 1 and table 9 1 for the Mainframe commands syntax diagram The mainframe commands are e BEEPer e MESE e CAPability e MESR e CARDcage e RMODe e CESE e RTC e CESR e SELect e EOI e SETColor e LER e STARt e LOCKout e STOP e MENU Figure 9 1 Mainframe Commands m LE NN 1
186. arg b TYPE space NORMA T ACQuire Subsystem Syntax Diagram Table 28 1 ACQuire Parameter Values Parameter Value count_arg An integer that specifies the number of averages to be taken of each time point The choices are 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 or 256 Acquisition Type Normal In the Normal mode with the ACCumulate command OFF the oscilloscope acquires waveform data and then displays the waveform When the oscilloscope makes a new acquisition the previously acquired waveform is erased from the display and replaced by the newly acquired waveform When the ACCumulate command is ON the oscilloscope displays all the waveform acquisitions without erasing the previously acquired waveform Acquisition Type Average In the Average mode the oscilloscope averages the data points on the waveform with previously acquired data Averaging helps eliminate random noise from the displayed waveform In this mode the ACCumulate command is OFF When Average mode is selected the number of averages must also be specified using the COUNt command Previously averaged waveform data is erased from the display and the newly averaged waveform is displayed 28 3 Command lt count gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command ACQuire Subsystem COUNt COUNt ACQuire COUNt count The COUNt command specifies the number of acquisitions for the running weighted average This command generates an erro
187. ata values WAVeform YINCrement lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 Y increment value in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM YINCREMENT YORigin WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt YORigin The YORigin query returns the Y origin value currently in the preamble This value is the voltage at center screen wAVeform YORigin lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 Y origin value in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM YORIGIN 35 17 WAVeform Subsystem YREFerence YREFerence Query WAVeform YREFerence The YREFerence query returns the Y reference value currently in the preamble This value specifies the data value at center screen where Y origin occurs Returned Format WAVeform YREFerence lt value gt lt NL gt value Y reference data value in preamble Example OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM YREFERENCE 35 18 Part 5 Programming Examples 36 Programming Examples Introduction This chapter contains short usable and tested program examples that cover the most asked for examples The examples are written in HP Basic 6 0 Making a timing analyzer measurement Making a state analyzer measurement Making a state compare measurement Transferring logic analyzer configuration between the logic analyzer and the controller Transferring logic analyzer data between the logic analyzer and the controller Checking for measurement completion
188. ata for the active waveform and listing displays Interface Clear IFC This command halts all bus activity This includes unaddressing all listeners and the talker disabling serial poll on all devices and returning control to the system controller 2 6 Programming Over RS 232C Introduction This chapter describes the interface functions and some general concepts of the RS 232C The RS 232C interface on this instrument is Agilent Technologies implementation of EIA Recommended Standard RS 232C Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange With this interface data is sent one bit at a time and characters are not synchronized with preceding or subsequent data characters Each character is sent as a complete entity without relationship to other events Programming Over RS 232C Interface Operation Interface Operation The 1660 series logic analyzers can be programmed with a controller over RS 232C using either a minimum three wire or extended hardwire interface The operation and exact connections for these interfaces are described in more detail in the following sections When you are programming a 1660 series logic analyzer over RS 232C with a controller you are normally operating directly between two DTE Data Terminal Equipment devices as compared to operating between a DTE device and a DCE Data Communications Equipment device W
189. ber NOT USED Trigger time for module in slot J real number OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE TTIME 12 10 Part 3 Logic Analyzer Commands 13 MACHine Subsystem Introduction The MACHine subsystem contains the commands that control the machine level of operation of the logic analyzer The functions of three of these commands reside in the State Timing Configuration menu These commands are e ASSign e NAME e TYPE Even though the functions of the following commands reside in the Trace menu they are at the machine level of the command tree and are therefore located in the MACHine subsystem These commands are e ARM LEVelarm REName e RESource 13 2 Figure 13 1 MACH ine MACHine Subsystem NV 3 Y Or O gt space L arm_source We ARM ASSign space H r pod list pP ASSIGN LEve arm space I arm level NAME space machine name W4 NAME i e REName space res_id 2 new text DEFault Im REName J space H M res id Im RE Sour ce J space res_terms m RESource TYPE space STATe TIMing TYPE Machine Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16550502 13 3 MACHine Subsystem MACHine Ta
190. ber 1 corresponds to the logic analyzer 2 corresponds to the oscilloscope and 3 through 10 unused The lt setting gt parameter is the skew setting 1 0 to 1 0 in seconds An integer 1 through 10 3 through 10 unused A real number from 1 0 to 1 0 seconds OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE SKEW1 3 0E 9 SKEW lt N gt The query returns the user defined skew setting INTermodule SKEW lt N gt lt setting gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE SKEW1 Command lt module gt Example Query Returned Format Example INTermodule Subsystem TREE TREE TREE module module The TREE command allows an intermodule setup to be specified in one command The first parameter is the intermodule arm value for module A logic analyzer The second parameter corresponds to the intermodule arm value for PORT OUT A 1 means the module is not in the intermodule tree a 0 value means the module is armed from the Intermodule run button Group run and a positive value indicates the module is being armed by another module with the slot location 1 to 10 A 1 corresponds to the slot location of the module A logic analyzer 2 corresponds to the slot location of the module B oscilloscope and 3 through 10 are unused An integer 1 through 10 3 through 10 unused OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE TREE 0 1 1 1 1 TREE The TREE query returns a string that represents the intermodule tree A 1
191. ble 35 11 RECord 35 12 SOURce 35 12 Contents Contents 13 Part 5 36 Contents SPERiod 35 13 TYPE 35 13 VALid 35 14 XINCrement 35 15 XORigin 35 16 XREFerence 35 16 YINCrement 35 17 YORigin 35 17 YREFerence 35 18 Programming Examples Programming Examples Making a Timing analyzer measurement 36 3 Making a State analyzer measurement 36 5 Making a State Compare measurement 36 9 Transferring the logic analyzer configuration 36 14 Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data 36 17 Checking for measurement completion 36 21 Sending queries to the logic analyzer 36 22 Getting ASCII Data with PRINt ALL Query 36 24 Reading the disk with the CATalog ALL query 36 25 Reading the Disk with the CATalog Query 36 26 Printing to the disk 36 27 Transferring waveform data in Byte format 36 28 Transferring waveform data in Word format 36 30 Using AUToscale and the MEASure ALL Query 36 32 Using Sub routines in a measurement program 36 33 Contents 14 Part 1 General Information Introduction to Programming Introduction This chapter introduces you to the basics of remote programming and is organized in two sections The first section Talking to the Instrument concentrates on initializing the bus program syntax and the elements of a syntax instuction The second section Receiving Information from the Instrument discusses how queries are sent and how to retrieve query results from the main
192. ble 13 1 Machine Parameter Values Parameter Values arm source RUN INTermodule MACHine 1 2 pod list NONE pod num pod num gt pod num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 arm_level An integer from 1 to 11 representing sequence level machine_name A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters res_id state terms for state analyzer or lt state_terms gt GLEDge 1 2 for timing analyzer new_text A string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters state_terms A B C D E F G H 1 J RANGE 1 2 TIMER 1 2 res_terms lt res id gt lt res id gt MACHine Selector MACHine lt N gt The MACHine N selector specifies which of the two analyzers machines available in the 1660 series logic analyzer the commands or queries following will refer to Because the MACHine lt N gt command is a root level command it will normally appear as the first element of a compound header lt N gt 1 2 the machine number Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME TIMING 18 4 MACHine Subsystem ARM ARM Command MACHine 1 2 ARM lt arm source gt The ARM command specifies the arming source of the specified analyzer machine The RUN option disables the arm source For example if you do not want to use either the intermodule bus or the other machine to arm the current machine you specify the RUN option arm source RUN INTermodule MACHine 1 2 Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 ARM MACHINE2 Query MACHine 1 2 ARM The ARM qu
193. c characters symbol name string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters start value B 0 1 Lc 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 18 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 e6 7 8 9 stop value B 0 1 0 0 1 2 3 a 5 6 7 18 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 e6 7 8 9 Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL RANGE STAT IO ACC 0 4HOOOF REMove Command MACHine 1 2 SYMBol REMove The REMove command deletes all symbols from a specified machine Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL REMOVE EN 25 7 Command lt label_name gt width value Example SYMBol Subsystem WIDTh WIDTh MACHine 1 2 SYMBol WIDTh label name width value The WIDTh command specifies the width number of characters in which the symbol names will be displayed when symbols are used The WIDTh command does not affect the displayed length of the symbol offset value string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters integer from 1 to 16 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL WIDTH DATA 9 25 8 26 DATA and SETup Commands Introduction The DATA and SETup commands are SYSTem commands that allow you to send and receive block data between the 1660 series logic analyzer and a controller Use the DATA instruction to transfer acquired timing and state data and the SETup instruc
194. cause the time ofthe acquired data is important to certain measurements this section describes how to find the real time clock data Because the number of sections in the SETup data block depends on the logic analyzer configuration the RTC_INFO section will not always be in the same location within the block Therefore the section must be found by name Once the section is found you can find the time by using the description in the following section 8 lt block_length gt lt section_name gt lt section length section data Total length of all sections 10 bytes Section name RTC INFO space space 4 bytes Length of section 8 bytes decimal for RTC INFO section 10 bytes Contains the real time clock data described as follows 1 byte Year A decimal integer that when added to 1990 defines the year For example if this byte has a decimal value of 2 the year is 1992 1 byte Month An integer from 1 to 12 1 byte Day An integer from 1 to 31 1 byte Unused 1 byte Hour An integer from 1 to 23 1 byte Minute An integer from 1 to 59 1 byte Second An integer from 1 to 59 1 byte Unused 26 17 26 18 Part 4 Oscilloscope Commands 27 Oscilloscope Root Level Commands Introduction Oscilloscope Root Level commands control the basic operation of the oscilloscope Refer to figure 27 1 for the module level syntax command diagram The Root Level commands are
195. ch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XSEARCH 17 21 Returned Format state num Example Command time value state value Example SLISt Subsystem XSTate XSTate MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSTate The XSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the X marker resides 8191 to 8191 If data is not valid the query returns 32767 MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSTate state num NL integer from 8191 to 8191 or 32767 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XSTATE XTAG MACHine 1 2 SLISt XTAG time value state value The XTAG command specifies the tag value on which the X Marker should be placed The tag value is time when time tagging is on or states when state tagging is on If the data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XTAG 40 0E 6 17 22 SLISt Subsystem XTAG Query MACHine 1 2 SLISt XTAG The XTAG query returns the X Marker position in time when time tagging is on or in states when state tagging is on regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid tagged data the query returns 9 9E37 for time tagging or retruns 32767 for state tagging Returned Format MACHine 1 2 SLISt XTAG time value state value NL Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINEl SLIST XTAG 17 23
196. ctor is used as part of a compound header to access those settings normally found in the State Listing menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST LINE 256 COLumn MACHine 1 2 SLISt COLumn col num module num MACHine 1 2 1label name base The COLumn command allows you to configure the state analyzer list display by assigning a label name and base to one of the 61 vertical columns in the menu A column number of 1 refers to the left most column When a label is assigned to a column it replaces the original label in that column When the label name is TAGS the TAGS column is assumed and the next parameter must specify RELative or ABSolute A label for tags must be assigned in order to use ABSolute or RELative state tagging lt col_num gt lt module_num gt lt label_name gt lt base gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example SLISt Subsystem CLRPattern integer from 1 to 61 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 through 10 not used string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol TASSemb1er for labels or ABSolute RELative for tags OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST COLUMN 4 A HEX MACHine 1 2 SLISt COLumn col num The COLumn query returns the column number lab
197. d in the command set for the mainframe These chapters are organized in subsystems with each subsystem representing a front panel menu The commands explained in this part give you access to common commands mainframe commands system level commands disk commands and intermodule measurement commands This part is designed to provide a concise description of each command Part 3 Part 3 chapters 13 through 25 explain each command in the subsystem command set for the logic analyzer Chapter 26 contains information on the SYSTem DATA and SYSTem SETup commands for the logic analyzer The commands explained in this part give you access to all the commands used to operate the logic analyzer portion of the 1660 series system This part is designed to provide a concise description of each command Part 4 Part 4 chapters 27 through 35 explain each command in the subsystem command set for the oscilloscope iv The commands explained in this part give you access to allthe commands used to operate the oscilloscope portion of the 1660 series system This part is designed to provide a concise description of each command Part 5 Part 5 chapter 36 contains program examples of actual tasks that show you how to get started in programming the 1660 series logic analyzers The complexity of your programs and the tasks they accomplish are limited only by your imagination These examples are written in HP BASIC 6 2 however the program concepts ca
198. d points ofthe range cannot be split between labels When these values are expressed in binary they represent the bit values for the label at one of the range recognizers end points Don t cares are not allowed in the end point pattern specifications 22 15 lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt Examples Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem RANGe string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters HB 0 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B 0 1 vus 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER RANGE DATA 127 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER RANGE ABC BO00001111 HCF MACHine 1 2 TTRigger RANGe The RANGe query returns the range recognizer end point specifications for the range MACHine 1 2 STRAce RANGe label name start pattern stop pattern NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER RANGE 22 16 Command number of levels Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem SEQuence SEQuence MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SEQuence number of levels The SEQuence command defines the timing analyzer trace sequence First it deletes the current trace sequence Th
199. dition command specifies where the O marker is placed The O marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the OPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OCONDITION ENTERING MACHine 1 2 TLISt OCONdition The OCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TLISt OCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TLIST OCONDITION OPATtern MACHine 1 2 TLISt OPATtern label name label pattern The OPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the O Marker which is then used with the OSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several iterations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and pod 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the label pattern parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number 24 11 lt label_name gt lt label_ pattern gt Examples Query Returned Format Example EE Command occurrence origin TLISt Subsystem OSEarch string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters HB 0 1 X 90 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D
200. ds The TLISt subsystem commands are e COLumn e CLRPattern e DATA e LINE e MMODe e OCONdition e OPATtern e OSEarch e OSTate e OTAG e REMove e RUNTil e TAVerage e TMAXimum e TMINimum e VRUNS e XCONdition e XOTag e XOTime e XPATtern e XSEarch e XSTate e XTAG 24 2 TLISt Subsystem Figure 24 1 a ag LISt K COLumn JH space ee De label name m base re Ge mod num eC J MacHine t1 mh COLL umn J space o col_num gt H CLRPot tern space DATA space gt line number m label name ui LINE space gt line nummid screen gt Cine 3 space PATTern MSTats MMODe gt Ie ocond i tion space ENTer ing EXITing Pi OCONdi tion gt e OPATtern gt space H r abel name gt label pattern gt e oPATtern gt space r label name gt 16550517 A TLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram 24 3 Figure 24 1 continued TLISt Subsystem Y search space gt occurrence m OSEarch H r OSTate OT AG J space qu state value I REMove RUNT i gt space gt run_unti _spec H r RUNTI I H TMIN imum Y TLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagra
201. e e RUNTII e SET 20 2 COMPare Subsystem Figure 20 1 COMPare Je CLE or gt e CvASk J space L J label name 7 care spec em CMASk J space label name gt gt COPY gt DATA gt space label name C line num HC data_pattern ine_num zat data pattern J gt Data space L 3 label name ine num gt FIND space e difference_occurrence gt LINE space line_num gt wm LINE gt REFerence DIFFerence H RANGe space PARTial start_line zc stop_line zg FULL _ RANGe gt RUNT i D space NEQua Me RUNT i I SET 16550503 COMPare Subsystem Syntax Diagram 20 3 Table 20 1 Selector Example COMPare Subsystem COMPare Compare Parameter Values Parameter Values label name string of up to 6 characters care spec string of characters care don t care line num integer from 8191 to 8191 data pattern B o 1 x 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71 8 9 difference occurence integer from 1 to 8192 start line integer from 8191 to 8191 stop line integer from start line to 8191 C
202. e Trigger menu The following statements are all correct and have the same meaning Notice that the conventional rules for precedence are not followed The expressions are evaluated from left to right OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCHl C AND D OR F ORG 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND D OR F OR G 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 F OR C AND D OR G 1 An integer from 1 to number of levels An integer from 1 to number of levels An integer from 2 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 qualifier see Qualifier on page 16 7 16 10 STRigger STRace Subsystem BRANch Examples OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 ANYSTATE 3 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER BRANCH2 A 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH3 A OR B OR NOTG 1 Query MACHine 1 2 STRigger BRANch lt N gt The BRANch query returns the current branch qualifier specification for a given sequence level Returned Format MACHine 1 2 STRigger BRANch lt N gt branch qualifier to level num NL Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH3 Figure 16 2 Current Qualifier Catb gth Complex qualifier Figure 16 2 is a front panel representation of the complex qualifier a OR b AND g OR h 16 11 Command Example STRigger STRace Subsystem CLEar This example would be used to specify this c
203. e added from top to bottom on the screen When 96 waveforms are present inserting additional waveforms replaces the last waveform Bit numbers are zero based so a label with 8 bits is referenced as bits 0 through 7 Specifying OVERlay causes a composite waveform display of all bits or channels for the specified label string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OVERlay lt bit_num gt ALL integer representing a label bit from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM INSERT WAVE 19 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM INSERT ABC OVERLAY OUTPUT XXX MACH1 SWAV INSERT POD1 B1001 RANGe MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RANGe number of samples The RANGe command allows you to specify the number of samples across the screen on the State Waveform display It is equivalent to ten times the states per division setting states Div on the front panel A number between 10 and 5000 may be entered integer from 10 to 5000 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM RANGE 80 18 8 Query Returned Format number of samples Example Command Example Command Example SWAVeform Subsystem REMove MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RANGe The RANGe query returns the current range value MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RANGe number of samples gt lt NL gt integer from 10 to 5000 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM RANGE REMove MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform REMove The REMove command allows you to clear
204. e command specifies the state line number relative to the trigger that the analyzer highlights at the center of the screen integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST LINE 0 24 9 Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_mode gt Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem MMODe MACHine 1 2 TLISt LINE The LINE query returns the line number for the state currently in the box at the center of the screen MACHine 1 2 TLISt LINE line num mid_screen gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST LINE MMODe MACHine 1 2 TLISt MMODe marker mode The MMODe command Marker Mode selects the mode controlling the marker movement and the display of marker readouts When PATTern is selected the markers will be placed on patterns When TIME is selected the markers move on time between stored states When MSTats is selected the markers are placed on patterns but the readouts will be time statistics OFF PATTern TIME MSTats OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST MMODE TIME MACHine 1 2 TLISt MMODe The MMODe query returns the current marker mode selected MACHine 1 2 TLISt MMODe marker mode NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TLIST MMODE 24 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command TLISt Subsystem OCONdition OCONdition MACHine 1 2 TLISt OCONdition ENTering EXITing The OCON
205. e first pattern is placed in the left most label with the following patterns being placed in a left to right fashion as seen on the Compare display Specifying more patterns than there are labels simply results in the extra patterns being ignored Because don t cares Xs are allowed in the data pattern it must always be expressed as a string You may still use different bases although don t cares cannot be used in a decimal number A string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters An integer from 8191 to 8191 A string in one of the following forms B 0 1 X 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0121213 2 8 8 7 812 s y OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE DATA CLOCK 42 BO11X101X OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE DATA OUT3 0 dHHFFA40 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 COMPARE DATA 129 BXX00 HB1101 HB10XX OUTPUT XXX MACH2 COMPARE DATA 511 4 64 16 256 8 16 20 7 Query Returned Format lt label_name gt lt line_num gt EE Pec Example COMPare Subsystem DATA MACHine 1 2 COMPare DATA label name line num The DATA query returns the value of the compare listing image for a given label and state row MACHine 1 2 COMPare DATA label name line num data pattern NL A string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters An integer from 8191 to 8191 A string in one of the following for
206. e or time to be performed during data acquisition State tagging is indicated when the parameter is the state tag qualifier which will be counted in the qualified state mode The qualifier may be a single term or a complex expression The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The terms IN RANGE1 and 2 and OUT RANGE1 and2 are defined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed A detailed example is provided in figure 16 2 on page 16 12 qualifier see Qualifier on page 16 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG OFF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG TIME OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG IN RANGE OR NOTF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG IN RANGE OR A AND E MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAG The TAG query returns the current count tag specification MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAG OFF TIME lt state_tag_qualifier gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1l STRIGGER TAG 16 18 Command Example Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TAKenbranch TAKenbranch MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore The TAKenbranch command allows you to specify whether the state causing a sequence level change is stored
207. e query returns the slope of the current trigger source TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG SOUR CHAN1 SLOP SOURce TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt The SOURce command is used to select the trigger source and is used for any subsequent SLOPe and LEVel commands This command can only be used in the EDGE trigger mode It is the equivalent to the PATH command for the PATTern trigger mode An integer from 1 or 2 OUTPUT XXX TRIG SOUR CHAN1 TRIGger SOURCe The SOURce query returns the current trigger source TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER SOURCE 34 13 34 14 35 WAVeform Subsystem Introduction The commands of the Waveform subsystem are used to transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope to a controller The waveform record is actually contained in two portions the waveform data and preamble The waveform data is the actual data acquired for each point when a DIGitize command is executed The preamble contains the information for interpreting waveform data Data in the preamble includes number of points acquired format of acquired data average count and the type of acquired data The preamble also contains the X and Yincrements origins and references for the acquired data for translation to time and voltage values The values set in the preamble are based on the settings of the variables in the Acquire
208. e screen OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOUR CHAN2 FALLTIME FREQuency MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt FREQuency The FRE ency query makes a frequency measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made using the first complete displayed cycle at the 50 voltage level MEASure FREQuency lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 frequency in Hertz OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOUR CHANI FREQ 32 6 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem NWIDth NWIDth MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt NWIDth The NWIDth query makes a negative width time measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made between the 50 points of the first falling and the next rising edge displayed on screen MEASure NWIDth lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 negative pulse width in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN2 NWID OVERshoot MEASure SOURce CHANnelcN OVERshoot The OVERshoot query makes an overshoot measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding a distortion following the first major transition The result is the ratio of OVERshoot vs VAMPlitude MEASure OVERshoot lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 ratio of overshoot to Vamplitude OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 OVER 32 7 Query
209. e tags 1 byte Unused 8 bytes A decimal integer representing the time offset in picoseconds from when this analyzer is triggered and when this analyzer provides an output trigger to the IMB or port out The value for one analyzer is always zero and the value for the other analyzer is the time between the triggers of the two analyzers 2 bytes Unused 26 8 Byte Position 61 101 DATA and SETup Commands Data Preamble Description 40 bytes The next 40 bytes are for Analyzer 2 Data Information They are organized in the same manner as Analyzer 1 above but they occupy bytes 61 through 100 26 bytes Number of valid rows of data starting at byte 177 for each pod The 26 bytes of this group are organized as follows Bytes 1 and 2 Unused Bytes 3 and 4 Unused Bytes 5 and 6 Unused Bytes 7 and 8 Unused Bytes 9 and 10 Unused Bytes 11 and 12 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 8 of the 1660A only Unused in the other 1660 series logic analyzers Bytes 13 and 14 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 7 of the 1660A only Unused in the other 1660 series logic analyzers Bytes 15 and 16 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 6 of the 1660A and 1661A only Bytes 17 and 18 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 5 of the 1660A and 1661A only Bytes 19 and 20 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 4 of the 1660A 1661A and 1662A only Bytes 21 and 22 conta
210. e unit s are separated by a semicolon e A program message is terminated by a NL new line The recognition of the program message terminator or lt PMT gt by the parser serves as a signal for the parser to begin execution of commands The lt PMT gt also affects command tree traversal Chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions e Multiple data parameters are separated by a comma e The first data parameter is separated from the header with one or more spaces e The header MACHINE 1 ASSIGN 2 3 is an example of a compound header It places the parser in the machine subsystem until the NL is encountered e Acolon preceding the command header returns you to the top of the command tree 5 7 Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Figure 5 2 WAVEFORM OSEARCH 38 TRIGGER DELAY 3 8 ns NL Xprogram message unit TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 38 TRIGGER lt cammand progrom header gt lt progrom heoder seporotor gt program dato gt TWAVEFORM OSEARCH SP 3 TRIGGER lt white space gt lt white spoce gt lt white space gt program mnemanic gt E program mnemonic gt progrom dato progrom dato separator program dato gt TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 30 TRIGGER decimal numeric program doto lt program dato 30 TRIGGER lt program message unit separator gt SP SP lt program message terminator gt SP
211. ecede the SYSTem DATA query and command with the SYSTem SETup query and command if the acquired data depends on a specific configuration If you are only interested in the acquired data for post processing in the controller and the data is not dependent on the configuration you can use the SYSTem DATA query and command alone KKK KKK KKK RK KK KEKE DATA COMMAND AND QUERY EXAMPLE xo kk kk KK kk ek kk k for the 1660 series logic analyzers p ockckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck k kk kk k CREATE TRANSFER BUFFER HA RR RK KK KK KK KK KK KEKE KEK Create a buffer large enough for the block data See page 26 1 for maximum block length ASSIGN Buff TO BUFFER 170000 I KKK kk kk kk kkkkkk INITIALIZE GPIB DEFAULT ADDRESS f kkk kk kk k ck ck ckck ck ck ck ko REAL Address Address 707 ASSIGN Comm TO Address CLEAR SCREEN I NTITIALIZE VARIABLE FOR NUMBER OF BYTES kk kk kk KK KKK The variable Numbytes contains the number of bytes in the buffer REAL Numbytes 36 17 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 600 610 620 630 640 650 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer acquired data Numbytes 0 xkkkkkkkkkkkkk RE INITIALIZE TRANSFER BUFFER POINTERS 8 kk kk kk kk kk k l CONTROL Buff 3 1 CON
212. ecifying what the right most bit will be The glitch edge spec string length must match the exact number of bits assigned to the specified label If the string length does not match the number of bits the Parameter string invalid message is displayed 1 2 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string consisting of R F E G to total number of bits 22 14 Example Query Returned Format Example Command TTRigger TTRace Subsystem RANGe For 8 bits assigned and no glitch OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER GLEDGEl DATA F E For 16 bits assigned with glitch OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER GLEDGE1 DATA MACHine 1 2 TTRigger GLEDe lt N gt label name The GLEDge query returns the current specification for the given label MACHine 1 2 TTRigger GLEDe lt N gt label name glitch edge pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER GLEDGE1 DATA RANGe MACHine 1 2 TTRigger RANGE label name gt start pattern stop pattern The RANGe command allows you to specify a range recognizer term for the specified machine Since a range can only be defined across one label and since a label must contain 32 or less bits the value of the start pattern or stop pattern will be between 2 1 and 0 Since a label can only be defined across a maximum of two pods a range term is only available across a single label therefore the en
213. ed data currently stored in this structure and not the current analyzer configuration For example the mode of the data bytes 21 and 49 may be STATE with tagging while the current setup of the analyzer is TIMING The preamble bytes 17 through 176 consists of the following 160 bytes 2 bytes Instrument ID always 1660 decimal for 1660 series logic analyzers 1 byte Revision Code 1 byte number of acquisition chips used in last acquisition 26 6 DATA and SETup Commands Data Preamble Description The next 40 bytes are for Analyzer 1 Data Information Byte Position 21 1 byte Machine data mode one of the following decimal values off 0 state data without tags 1 state data with each chip assigned to a machine 2kB memory and either time or state tags 2 state data with unassigned pod used to store tag data 4kB memory 8 state data at half channel 8kB memory with no tags 10 2 conventional timing data at full channel 11 transitional timing data at full channel 12 glitch timing data 13 conventional timing data at half channel 14 transitional timing data at half channel 22 1 byte Unused 23 2 bytes List of pods in this analyzer where a binary 1 indicates that the corresponding pod is assigned to this analyzer bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 unused unused always1 unused unused unused unused Pod 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bitO Pod 7
214. ed maintenance personnel Safety Symbols N Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for you to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect against damage to the product Hazardous voltage symbol Earth terminal symbol Used to indicate a circuit common connected to grounded chassis WARNING The Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a Warning sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION The Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a Caution symbol until the indicated conditions are fully understood or met Agilent Technologies P O Box 2197 1900 Garden of the Gods Road Colorado Springs CO 80901 2197 U S A Product Warranty This Agilent Technologies product has a warranty against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be r
215. ed pattern of the two internal channels and external trigger In the IMMediate trigger mode the oscilloscope goes to a freerun mode and does not wait for a trigger Generally the IMMediate mode is used in intermodule applications OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER MODE PATTERN TRIGger MODE The MODE query returns the current trigger mode selection TRIGger MODE EDGE PATTern IMMediate lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER MODE 34 11 Command Query Returned Format Example Command Example TRIGger Subsystem PATH PATH TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt The PATH command is used to select a trigger path for the subsequent LOGic and LEVel commands This command can only be used in the PATTern trigger mode An integer from 1 or 2 OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER PATH CHANNEL1 TRIGger PATH The PATH query returns the current trigger path TRIGger PATH CHANnel lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER PATH SLOPe TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt SLOPe PoSitive NEGative The SLOPe command selects the trigger slope for the specified trigger source This command can only be used in the EDGE trigger mode lor2 OUTPUT XXX TRIG SOUR CHAN1 SLOP POS 34 12 Query Returned Format Example Command Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem SOURce TRIGger SLOPe The SLOP
216. el 15 7 21 6 LEVel 34 8 LEVelarm 13 6 LINE 14 7 17 9 20 10 24 9 LOAD CONFig 11 14 LOAD IASSembler 11 15 LOCKout 3 11 9 12 LOGic 34 10 LONGform 1 16 10 9 Machine 13 4 MASTer 15 9 MENU 9 12 20 10 MESE 9 14 MINus 30 8 MMODe 17 10 23 11 24 10 31 8 31 12 31 14 31 15 MODE 33 5 34 11 MSI 11 16 MSTats 31 8 AME 13 7 OAUTo 31 9 OCONdition 23 12 24 11 OFFSet 29 6 OPATtern 17 11 23 13 24 11 OSEarch 17 12 23 14 24 12 OTAG 17 13 24 14 OTIMe 14 8 23 15 31 6 31 7 31 10 OVERIay 17 14 30 8 PACK 11 17 PATH 34 12 PATTern 25 6 PLUS 30 9 PRINt 10 10 PROBe 29 7 PURGe 11 17 RANGe 14 9 16 14 18 8 20 11 22 15 23 16 25 6 29 8 33 6 RECord 35 12 REMove 14 10 15 13 17 15 18 9 21 7Command errors 7 3 23 16 24 14 25 7 30 9 Command mode 2 3 REName 11 18 13 8 Command set organization 4 14 RESource 13 9 Command structure 1 4 RMODe 9 18 Command tree 4 5 RUNTIil 17 15 20 12 23 17 24 15 31 11 SELect 9 21 SCHart 19 4 Command types 4 6 SELect 9 20 Commands SEQuence 16 16 22 17 ACCumulate 30 4 SET 20 13 AUToscale 27 3 27 4 SETColor 9 22 AVOLt 31 6 SETup 10 11 26 15 BVOLt 31 7 SFORmat 15 6 CENTer 31 8 SKEW 12 8 CONDition 34 5 34 6 SLAVe 15 15 CONNect 30 5 SLISt 17 7 COUNt 28 4 SLOPe 34 12 COUPling 29 4 SOURce 32 10 34 13 35 12 DELay 33 4 34 7 SPERiod 22 18 23 18 DIGitize
217. el name and base for the specified column MACHine 1 2 SLISt COLumn col num module num MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt lt base gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST COLUMN 4 CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform CLRPattern X O ALL The CLRPattern command allows you to clear the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM CLRPATTERN X 17 8 Query Returned Format lt line_number gt lt label_name gt pattern string Example Command line num mid screen Example SLISt Subsystem DATA DATA MACHine 1 2 SLISt DATA lt line_number gt lt label_name gt The DATA query returns the value at a specified line number for a given label The format will be the same as the one shown in the listing display MACHine 1 2 SLISt DATA line number label name pattern string NL integer from 8191 to 8191 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters 4B 0 1 X 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 X 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X tol l2lalalsls 7lels OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST DATA 512 RAS LINE MACHine 1 2 SLISt LINE line num mid screen The LINE command allows you to scroll the state analyzer listing vertically The command specifies the state line number relative to the trigger that the analyzer highlights at the center of the screen integer from 8191 to 8191
218. en it inserts the number of levels specified with default settings The number of levels can be between 1 and 10 when the analyzer is armed by the RUN key integer from 1 to 10 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SEQUENCE 4 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SEQuence The SEQuence query returns the current sequence specification MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SEQuence number of levels level of trigger gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TTRIGGER SEQUENCE 22 17 Command lt sample_period gt Example Query Returned Format lt sample_period gt Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem SPERiod SPERiod MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SPERiod sample period The SPERiod command allows you to set the sample period of the timing analyzer in the Conventional and Glitch modes The sample period range depends on the mode selected and is as follows e 2ns to 8 ms for Conventional Half Channel 500 MHz e 4nsto 8 ms for Conventional Full Channel 250 MHz e 4nsfor Transitional Half Channel e 8nsfor Transitional Full Channel e 8nsto 8 ms for Glitch Half Channel 125 MHz real number from 2 ns to 8 ms depending on mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SPERIOD 50E 9 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SPERiod The SPERiod query returns the current sample period MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SPERiod sample _period gt lt NL gt real number from 2 ns to 8 ms depending on mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SPERIOD
219. enabled MSS master summary status Indicates whether the device has a reason for requesting service This bit is returned for the STB query RQS request service Indicates if the device is requesting service This bit is returned during a serial poll RQS will be set to 0 after being read via a serial poll MSS is not reset by STB Status Reporting Bit Definitions MSG message Indicates whether there is a message in the message queue Not implemented in the 1660 series logic analyzers PON power on Indicates power has been turned on URQ user request Always returns a 0 from the 1660 series logic analyzer CME command error Indicates whether the parser detected an error The error numbers and strings for CME EXE DDE and QYE can be read from a device defined queue which is not part of IEEE 488 2 with the query SYSTEM ERROR EXE execution error Indicates whether a parameter was out of range or inconsistent with current settings DDE device specific error Indicates whether the device was unable to complete an operation for device dependent reasons QYE query error Indicates whether the protocol for queries has been violated RQC request control Always returns a 0 from the 1660 series logic analyzer OPC operation complete Indicates whether the device has completed all pending operations OPC is controlled by the OPC common command Because this command can appear
220. ence of the XPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin the marker actually searches for An occurrence of 0 zero places a marker on the origin TRIGger STARt integer from 8192 to 8192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XSEarch occurrence origin The XSEarch query returns the search criteria for the X marker MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XSEarch occurrence lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM XSEARCH 23 24 Command time value Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem XTIMe XTIMe MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XTIMe time value The XTIMe command positions the X marker in time when the marker mode is TIME If data is not valid the command performs no action real number from 2 5 ks to 42 5 ks OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XTIME 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XTIMe The XTIMe query returns the X marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XTIMe time value NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM XTIME 23 25 23 26 24 TLISt Subsystem Introduction The TLISt subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Listing menu in the 1660 series logic analyzers and is the same as the SLISt subsystem with the exception of the OCONdition and XCONdition comman
221. ent the response can be read in using the ENTER statement All programming examples in this manual are presented in HP BASIC This Basic statement sends a command that causes the logic analyzer s machine 1 to be a state analyzer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TYPE STATE terminator Each part of the above statement is explained in this section 1 3 Example Example Program 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 CLEAR XXX OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Introduction to Programming Initialization Initialization To make sure the bus and all appropriate interfaces are in a known state begin every program with an initialization statement BASIC provides a CLEAR command that clears the interface buffer If you are using GPIB CLEAR will also reset the parser in the logic analyzer The parser is the program resident in the logic analyzer that reads the instructions you send to it from the controller After clearing the interface you could preset the logic analyzer to a known state by loading a predefined configuration file from the disk Refer to your controller manual and programming language reference manual for information on initializing the interface This BASIC statement would load the configuration file DEFAULT if it exists into the logic analyzer OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD CONFIG DEFAULT Refer to chapter 10 MMEMory Subsystem for mo
222. epending on the particular query The separator between the header and the data always consists of one space A command or query may be sent in either long form or short form or in any combination of long form and short form The HEADER and LONGFORM commands only control the format of the returned data and they have no affect on the way commands are sent Refer to chapter 10 SYSTem Subsystem for information on turning the HEADER and LONGFORM commands on and off The following examples show some possible responses for a MACHINE SFORMAT THRESHOLD2 query with HEADER OFF lt data gt lt terminator gt with HEADER ON and LONGFORM OFF MACH1 SFOR THR2 lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt with HEADER ON and LONGFORM ON MACHINE1 SFORMAT THRESHOLD2 lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt Examples Introduction to Programming Response Data Formats Response Data Formats Both numbers and strings are returned as a series of ASCII characters as described in the following sections Keywords in the data are returned in the same format as the header as specified by the LONGform command Like the headers the keywords will always be in uppercase The following are possible responses to the MACHINE1 TFORMAT LAB ADDR query Header on Longform on MACHINE1 TFORMAT LABEL ADDR 19 POSITIVE lt terminator gt Header on Longform off MACH1 TFOR LAB ADDR 19 POS lt terminator gt He
223. equence level When this proceed qualifier is matched the specified number of times the sequencer will proceed to the next sequence level In the sequence level where the trigger is specified the FIND command specifies the trigger qualifier see SEQuence command The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE and OUT_RANGE is determined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed See figure 16 2 for a detailed example An integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 An integer from 1 to 1048575 qualifier see Qualifier on page 16 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND1 ANYSTATE 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND3 NOTA AND NOTB OR G 1 16 13 Returned Format Example Command STRigger STRace Subsystem RANGe MACHine 1 2 STRigger FIND4 The FIND query returns the current proceed qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHine 1 2 STRigger FIND lt N gt proceed qualifier lt occurrence gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND lt N gt RANGe MACHine 1 2 STRigger RANGE label name start pattern stop pattern The RANGe command allows you to specif
224. eric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken MMEMory UPLoad lt block_data gt lt NL gt 11 20 MMEMory Subsystem VOLume Example 10 DIM Block 32000 allocate enough memory for block data 20 DIM Specifier 2 30 OUTPUT XXX EOI ON 40 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEAD OFF 50 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY UPLOAD FILE1 send upload query 60 ENTER XXX USING 2A Specifier read in 8 70 ENTER XXX USING 8D Length read in block length 80 ENTER XXX USING K Block read in file 90 END VOLume Query MMEMory VOLume lt msus gt TheVOLume query returns the volume type of the disk The volume types are DOS or LIF Question marks are returned if there is no disk if the disk is not formatted or if a disk has a format other than DOS or LIF lt msus gt Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken Returned Format MMEMory VOLume DOS LIF NL Example OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY VOLUME 11 21 11 22 12 INTermodule Subsystem Introduction The INTermodule subsystem commands specify intermodule arming from the rear panel input BNC ARMIN or to the rear panel
225. ern OPATtern MACHine 1 2 SLISt OPATtern label name label pattern The OPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the O Marker which is then used with the OSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Because this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several invocations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and a 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the 1abel pattern parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters HB 0 1 X 90 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X te z 2 3 4 5 e 7 e 9 2 J OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 MACHine 1 2 SLISt OPATtern label name The OPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 SLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OPATTERN A 17 11 lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem OSEarch OSEarch MACHine 1 2 SLISt OS
226. ery returns the source that the current analyzer machine wil be armed by Returned Format MACHine 1 2 ARM arm source Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE ARM ASSign Command MACHine 1 2 ASSign pod list The ASSign command assigns pods to a particular analyzer machine The ASSign command will assign two pods for each pod number you specify because pods must be assigned to analyzers in pairs pod list NONE pod gt pod gt lt pod gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 5 Example Query Returned Format lt pod_list gt lt pod gt Example Command arm level Example Query MACHine Subsystem LEVelarm OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 ASSIGN 5 2 1 MACHine 1 2 ASSign The ASSign query returns which pods are assigned to the current analyzer machine MACHine 1 2 Assign pod list NL NONE pod gt pod gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 ASSIGN LEVelarm MACHine 1 2 LEVelarm arm level The LEVelarm command allows you to specify the sequence level for a specified machine that will be armed by the Intermodule Bus or the other machine This command is only valid if the specified machine is on and the arming source is not set to RUN with the ARM command An integer from 1 to the maximum number of levels specified in the appropriate trigger menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 LEVELARM 2 MACHine 1 2 LEVelarm The
227. es OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY OVERLAY C1 C2 30 8 Command module number labels Example Command Example DISPlay Subsystem PLUS PLUS DISPlay PLUS lt module_number gt lt label gt lt label gt The PLUS command algebraically adds two channels and inserts the resultant waveform to the current display The first parameter is an optional module specifier and needs to be used only if another module is displayed The next parameters are the labels of the waveform that are to be added Always 2 string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY PLUS 2 C1 C2 REMove DISPlay REMove The REMove command removes all displayed waveforms from the current display OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY REMOVE 30 9 DISPlay Subsystem REMove 30 10 31 MARKer Subsystem Introduction In addition to automatic parametric measurements the oscilloscope has four markers for making time and voltage measurement These measurements may be made automatically or manually Additional features include the centering of trigger or markers in the display area CENTer and the run until time RUNTil mode The RUNTil mode allows you to set a stop condition based on the time interval between the X marker and the O marker When this condition is met the oscilloscope will stop acquiring data Refer to Figure 31 1 for the Marker Subsystem Syn
228. es 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2 bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2 bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2bytes 2 bytes 1 unused in the 1661A 1662A and 1663A 2 also unused in the 1662A and 1663 A 3 also unused in the 1663A 4 The headings are not a part of the returned data 26 14 Command DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem SETup SYSTem SETup SYStem SETup lt block_data gt The SYStem SETup command configures the logic analyzer module as defined by the block data sent by the controller The length of the configuration data block can be up to 350 784 bytes in the 1660A There are four data sections which are always returned These are the strings which would be included in the section header CONFIG DISPLAY1 BIG ATTRIB RTC INFO Additionally the following sections may also be included depending on what s available SYMBOLS A SYMBOLS B INVASM A INVASM B COMPARE With the exception of the RTC INFO section the block data is not described However the RTC_INFO section contains the real time clock time of the acquired data in the data block This time information can be meaningful to some measurements 26 15 lt block_data gt lt block_length_ specifier gt lt length gt lt section gt lt section_ header gt section data Example Query Returned Forma
229. et The OFFSet query returns the current value for the selected channel An integer from 1 to 2 CHANnel lt N gt OFFSet lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 OFFSET 29 6 Command lt N gt lt atten gt Example Query Returned Format Example CHANnel Subsystem PROBe PROBe CHANnel lt N gt PROBe atten The PROBe command specifies the attenuation factor for an external probe connected to a channel The command changes the channel voltage references such as range offset trigger level and automatic measurements The actual sensitivity is not changed at the channel input The allowable probe attenuation factor is an integer from 1 to 1000 An integer from 1 to 2 An integer from 1 to 1000 OUTPUT XXX CHAN1 PROB 10 CHANnel lt N gt PROBe The PROBe query returns the probe attenuation factor for the selected channel CHANnel lt N gt PROBe lt atten gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNELI1 PROBE 29 7 Command lt N gt lt range gt Example Query Returned Format Example CHANnel Subsystem RANGe RANGe CHANnel lt N gt RANGe range The RANGe command defines the full scale 4 Volts Div vertical axis of the selected channel The values for the RANGe command are dependent on the current probe attenuation factor for the selected channel The allowable range for a probe attenuation factor of 1 1 is 16 mV to 40 V Fora
230. eturned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies For products returned to Agilent Technologies for warranty service the Buyer shall prepay shipping charges o Agilent Technologied and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to the Buyer However the Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are the buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect
231. ex for the a term which will be the trigger term and store no states until the trigger is found I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 2 1 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM A SCOUNT dHHFF OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE1 NOSTATE OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 3 I l RRR 2 2 RK KK KK KK RK KEK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK Change the displayed menu to the state listing and start the state analyzer in repetitive mode OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 7 OUTPUT 707 RMODE REPETITIVE OUTPUT 707 START I en 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 kk KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK The logic analyzer is now running in the repetitive mode and will remain in repetitive until the STOP command is sent I PRINT The logic analyzer is now running in the repetitive mode PRINT and will remain in repetitive until the STOP command is sent PRINT PRINT Press CONTINUE PAUSE KKK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK Stop the acquisition and copy the acquired data to the compare reference listing I OUTPUT 707 STOP OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 10 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE MENU REFERENCE OUTPUT 707 MACHINEIl COMPARE COPY The logic analyzer
232. f a channel is specified four other parameters must be included in the command syntax The four parameters are marker type level the slope and the occurrence count An integer from 1 to 2 ABSolute or PERCent percentage of waveform voltage level ranging from 10 to 90 of the Vtop to Vbase voltage or a voltage level POSitive or NEGative integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MARKER OAUTO CHANNEL1 PERCent 50 POSITIVE 5 31 9 MARKer Subsystem OTIMe Query MARKer OAUTO The OAUTo query returns the current settings Returned Format MARKer OAUTo CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MARKER OAUTO If lt type gt is not specified the marker type will default to PERCent OTIMe Command MARKer OTIMe lt O marker time gt The OTIMe command moves the O marker to the specified time with respect to the trigger marker lt O marker time in seconds from trigger marker to O marker time gt Example OUTPUT XXX MARKER OTIME 1E 6 Query MARKer OTIMe The OTIMe query returns the time in seconds between the O marker and the trigger marker Returned Format MARKer OTIMe O marker time gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MARKER OTIME 31 10 Command lt time gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem RUNTII RUNTil MARKer RUNTil OFF LT time GT time
233. following manner 1 Enable interrupts on the bus This allows the controller to see the SRQ line 2 Disable interrupts on the bus 3 Ifthe SRQ line is high some instrument is requesting service then check the instrument at address 1 to see if bit 6 of its status register is high 4 To check whether bit 6 of an instruments status register is high use the following BASIC statemente IF BIT Stat 6 THEN 5 Ifbit 6 ofthe instrument at address 1 is not high then check the instrument at address 7 to see if bit 6 of its status register is high 6 Assoonasthe instrument with status bit 6 high is found check the rest of the status bits to determine what is required The SPOLL 707 command causes much more to happen on the bus than simply reading the register This command clears the bus automatically addresses the talker and listener sends SPE serial poll enable and SPD serial poll disable bus commands and reads the data For more information about serial poll refer to your controller manual and programming language reference manuals After the serial poll is completed the RQS bit in the 1660 series logic analyzer Status Byte Register will be reset if it was set Once a bit in the Status Byte Register is set it will remain set until the status is cleared with a CLS command or the instrument is reset Error Messages Introduction This chapter lists the error messages that relate to the 1660 series logic analyzers
234. for labels with more than 20 bits assigned In this case the base will default to HEXadecimal string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal AScii OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL BASE DATA HEXADECIMAL Command lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt pattern value Example Command SYMBol Subsystem PATTern PATTern MACHine 1 2 SYMBol PATTern label name symbol name pattern value The PATTern command allows you to create a pattern symbol for the specified label Because don t cares X are allowed in the pattern value it must always be expressed as a string You may still use different bases though don t cares cannot be used in a decimal number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters B 0 1 x oto i 2 a 4 s e v x 8H 0 1 2 3 4 Is si Is slalslc pisIr x to 11213 4 5 6 7 8 9 p OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL PATTERN STAT MEM RD HHOIXX RANGe MACHine 1 2 SYMBol RANGe label name symbol name start value stop value The RANGe command allows you to create a range symbol containing a start value and a stop value for the specified label The values may be in binary HB octal HQ hexadecimal H or decimal default You can not use don t cares in any base 25 6 SYMBol Subsystem REMove label name string of up to 6 alphanumeri
235. form Delay to 100 ms Keywords in long form numbers using the decimal format OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY 1 Keywords in short form numbers using an exponential format OUTPUT XXX MACH1 TWAV DEL 1E 1 Keywords in short form using lowercase letters numbers using a suffix OUTPUT XXX machl twav del 100ms In these examples the colon shown as the first character of the command is optional on the 1660 series logic analyzers The space between DELay and the argument is required Message Communication and System Functions Introduction This chapter describes the operation of instruments that operate in compliance with the IEEE 488 2 syntax standard It is intended to give you enough basic information about the IEEE 488 2 Standard to successfully program the logic analyzer You can find additional detailed information about the IEEE 488 2 Standard in ANSVIEEE Std 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands The 1660 series logic analyzer is designed to be compatible with other Agilent Technologies IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments Instruments that are compatible with IEEE 488 2 must also be compatible with IEEE 488 1 GPIB bus standard however IEEE 488 1 compatible instruments may or may not conform to the IEEE 488 2 standard The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the message exchange protocols by which the instrument and the controller will communicate It a
236. frame instruments The programming instructions explained in this book conform to IEEE Std 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands These programming instructions provide a means of remotely controlling the 1660 series logic analyzers There are three general categories of use You can e Set up the instrument and start measurements e Retrieve setup information and measurement results e Send measurement data to the instrument The instructions listed in this manual give you access to the measurements and front panel features of the 1660 series logic analyzers The complexity of your programs and the tasks they accomplish are limited only by your imagination This programming reference is designed to provide a concise description of each instruction Example Talking to the Instrument In general computers acting as controllers communicate with the instrument by sending and receiving messages over a remote interface such as GPIB or RS 232C Instructions for programming the 1660 series logic analyzers will normally appear as ASCII character strings embedded inside the output statements of a host language available on your controller The host language s input statements are used to read in responses from the 1660 series logic analyzers For example HP 9000 Series 200 300 BASIC uses the OUTPUT statement for sending commands and queries to the 1660 series logic analyzers After a query is s
237. from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order Examples Query Returned Format lt name gt lt polarity gt Example Command lt name gt Examples TFORmat Subsystem REMove OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT LABEL STAT POSITIVE 0 127 40312 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT LABEL SIG 1 B11 B0000000011111111 B0000000000000000 MACHine 1 2 Tformat LABel lt name gt The LABel query returns the current specification for the selected by name label If the label does not exist nothing is returned Numbers are always returned in decimal format MACHine 1 2 Tformat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt assignment NL string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters POSitive NEGative OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT LABEL DATA REMove MACHine 1 2 TFORmat REMove lt name gt ALL The REMove command allows you to delete all labels or any one label specified by name for a given machine string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT REMOVE A OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT REMOVE ALL 21 7 Command lt N gt lt value gt TTL ECL BER Example Query Returned Format Example TFORmat Subsystem THReshold THReshold MACHine 1 2 TFORmat THReshold lt N gt TTL ECL lt value gt The THReshold command allows you to set the voltage threshold
238. g the returned data into a string variable Reading queries into string variables requires little attention to formatting This command line places the output of the query in the string variable Result ENTER XXX Result In the language used for this book HP BASIOC 6 2 string variables are case sensitive and must be expressed exactly the same each time they are used The output of the logic analyzer may be numeric or character data depending on what is queried Refer to the specific commands in Part 2 of this guide for the formats and types of data returned from queries 1 18 Example Example Introduction to Programming Numeric Base The following example shows logic analyzer data being returned to a string variable with headers off 10 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER OFF 20 DIM Rang 30 30 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 40 ENTER XXX Rang 50 PRINT Rang 60 END After running this program the controller displays 1 00000E 05 Numeric Base Most numeric data will be returned in the same base as shown onscreen When the prefix B precedes the returned data the value is in the binary base Likewise Q is the octal base and H is the hexadecimal base If no prefix precedes the returned numeric data then the value is in the decimal base Numeric Variables If your host language can convert from ASCII to a numeric format then you can use numeric variables Turning off the response
239. g waveform menu It is equivalent to ten times the seconds per division setting on the display The allowable values for RANGe are from 10 ns to 10 ks real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 100E 9 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RANGe The RANGe query returns the current full screen time MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RANGe time value NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TWAVEFORM RANGE REMove MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform REMove The REMove command deletes all waveforms from the display OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TWAVEFORM REMOVE 23 16 Command run until Spec value Examples Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem RUNTilI RUNTil MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RUNTil lt run until_spec gt The RUNTII run until command defines stop criteria based on the time between the X and O markers when the trace mode is in repetitive When OFF is selected the analyzer will run until either the STOP touch screen field is touched or the STOP command is sent Run until time between X and O marker options are e Less Than LT a specified time value e Greater Than GT a specified time value e Inthe range INRange between two time values e Out of the range OUTRange between two time values End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 2 ns apart since this is the minimum time at which data is sampled This command affects the timing ana
240. generated within that time then auto trigger is executed If a signal is not applied to the input a baseline is displayed If there is a signal at the input and the specified trigger conditions have not been met within 50 ms the waveform display will not be synchronized to a trigger When the TRIGgered mode is chosen the oscilloscope waits until a trigger is received before data is acquired The TRIGgered mode should be used when the trigger source signal has less than a 20 Hz repetition rate or when the trigger events counter is set so that the number of trigger events would not occur before 50 ms The Auto Trig On field in the trigger menu is the same as the AUTO mode over GPIB or RS 232 C The TRIGgered command is the same as the Auto Trig Off on the front panel OUTPUT XXX TIM MODE AUTO TIMebase MODE The MODE query returns the current Timebase mode TIMebase MODE AUTO TRIGgered lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TIMebase MODE 33 5 Command EE mu Example Query Returned Format Example TIMebase Subsystem RANGe RANGe TIMebase RANGe lt range gt The RANGe command sets the full scale horizontal time in seconds The RANGE value is ten times the value in the s Div field time in seconds OUTPUT XXX TIMEBASE RANGE 2US TIMebase RANGe The RANGe query returns the current setting TIMebase RANGe lt range gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TIMEBASE RANGE
241. ger LONGform SYSTem MASTer SFORmat MENU COMPare Mainframe MESE Mainframe MESR Mainframe MINus DISPlay MMODe SLISt TLISt TWAVeform MODE SFORmat TIMebase TRIGger MOPQual SFORmat MQUal SFORmat MSI MMEMory MSTats MARKer NAME MACHine NWIDth MEASure OAUTo MARKer OCONdition TLISt TWAVeform OFFSet CHANnel OPATtern SLISt TLISt TWAVeform 0SEarch SLISt TLISt TWAVeform OSTate SLISt TLISt WLISt OTAG SLISt TLISt OTIMe TWAVeform WLISt MARKer OVERlay SLISt DISPlay OVERshoot MEASure PACK MMEMory PATH TRIGger PERiod MEASure PATTern SYMBol Command PLUS POINts PRINt PREamble PREShoot PROBe PURGe PWIDth RANGe RECord TREE TTIMe TYPE UPLoad VAXis VOLume VRUNs WIDTh XCONdition X0Tag X0Time XPATtern XSEarch XSTate XTAG XTIMe Subsystem DISPlay WAVeform SYSTem WAVeform MEASure CHANnel MMEMory MEASure COMPare STRigger SWAVeform SYMBol TTRigger TWAVeform WLISt CHANnel TIMebase WAVeform INTermodule INTermodule MACHine MMEMory SCHart MMEMory SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SYMBol TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt WLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt 4 12 Table 4 2 continued Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Alphabetic Command Cross Reference continued Command REMove REName REName RESource RlSetime
242. gic analyzer to the HP 98628A Interface card of an HP 9000 series 300 controller For more information on cabling refer to the reference manual for your specific controller Because this example does not have the correct connections for hardware handshake you must use the XON XOFF protocol when connecting the logic analyzer HP 1660 SERIES REAR PANEL HP 98628 INTERFACE CARD 13242 5061 4216 MALE TO MALE DCE OPT 02 CFEMALE TO FEMALE 01660524 Cable Example HP Vectra Personal Computers and Compatibles Figures 3 2 through 3 4 give examples of three cables that will work for the extended interface with hardware handshake Keep in mind that these cables should work if your computer s serial interface supports the four common RS 232C handshake signals as defined by the RS 232C standard The four common handshake signals are Data Carrier Detect DCD Data Terminal Ready DTR Clear to Send CTS and Ready to Send RTS Figure 3 2 shows the schematic of a 25 pin female to 25 pin male cable The following cables support this configuration e HP 17255D DB 25 F to DB 25 M 1 2 meter e HP 17255F DB 25 F to DB 25 M 1 2 meter shielded In addition to the female to male cables with this configuration a male to male cable 1 2 meters in length is also available e HP 17255M DB 25 M to DB 25 M 1 2 meter 3 6 Programming Over RS 232C Cable Examples
243. gure 8 1 Common Commands WAI Common Commands Syntax Diagram CO space mask m ECCO EC Cine Cm OPC OPC gt OPT gt PRE space pre_mask 9 PRE gt S space w mask 9 Gi CD m ij 15500 5X01 8 4 Common Commands CLS Clear Status Table 8 1 Common Command Parameter Values Parameter Values mask An integer O through 255 pre_mask An integer 0 through 65535 CLS Clear Status Command CLS The CLS common command clears all event status registers queues and data structures including the device defined error queue and status byte If the CLS command immediately follows a program message terminator the output queue and the MAV Message Available bit will be cleared Refer to chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status Example OUTPUT XXX CLS 8 5 Command lt mask gt Example Query Returned Format Example Common Commands ESE Event Status Enable ESE Event Status Enable ESE lt mask gt The ESE command sets the Standard Event Status Enable Register bits The Standard Event Status Enable Register contains a bit to enable the status indicators detailed in table 8 2 A 1 in any bit position of the Standard
244. hange may not be completed in a normal manner Some of the protocol exceptions are shown below Command Error A command error will be reported if the instrument detects a syntax error or an unrecognized command header Execution Error An execution error will be reported if a parameter is found to be out of range or if the current settings do not allow execution of a requested command or query Device specific Error A device specific error will be reported if the instrument is unable to execute a command for a strictly device dependent reason Query Error A query error will be reported if the proper protocol for reading a query is not followed This includes the interrupted and unterminated conditions described in the following paragraphs Syntax Diagrams The example syntax diagram is in this chapter are similar to the syntax diagrams in the IEEE 488 2 specification Commands and queries are sent to the instrument as a sequence of data bytes The allowable byte sequence for each functional element is defined by the syntax diagram that is shown The allowable byte sequence can be determined by following a path in the syntax diagram The proper path through the syntax diagram is any path that follows the direction of the arrows If there is a path around an element that element is optional If there is a path from right to left around one or more elements that element or those elements may be repeated as many times as desired
245. he CRT or to return to the default screen colors Four parameters are sent with the command to change a color e Color Number first parameter e Hue second parameter e Saturation third parameter e Luminosity last parameter An integer from 1 to 7 An integer from 0 to 100 An integer from 0 to 100 An integer from 0 to 100 Color Number 0 cannot be changed OUTPUT XXX SETCOLOR 3 60 100 60 OUTPUT XXX SETC DEFAULT SETColor color The SETColor query returns the luminosity values for a specified grey scale SETColor lt color gt lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SETCOLOR 3 9 22 Mainframe Commands STARt STARt Command STARt The STARt command starts the selected module or Intermodule running in the specified run mode see RMODe If the specified module is in the Intermodule configuration then the Intermodule run will be started The STARt command is an overlapped command An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress Example OUTPUT XXX START 9 23 Command Example Mainframe Commands STOP STOP STOP The STOP command stops the selected module or Intermodule If the specified module is in the Intermodule configuration then the Intermodule run will be stopped The STOP command i
246. headers will help you avoid accidently trying to convert the header into a number The following example shows logic analyzer data being returned to a numeric variable 10 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER OFF 20 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 30 ENTER XXX Rang 40 PRINT Rang 50 END Introduction to Programming Definite Length Block Response Data This time the format of the number such as whether or not exponential notation is used is dependant upon your host language In Basic the output willlook like 1 E 5 Definite Length Block Response Data Definite length block response data also refered to as block data allows any type of device dependent data to be transmitted over the system interface as a series of data bytes Definite length blick data is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data or for sending 8 bit extended ASCII codes The syntax is a pound sign followed by a non zero digit representing the number of digits in the decimal integer Following the non zero digit is the decimal integer that states the number of 8 bit data bytes to follow This number is followed by the actual data Indefinite length block data is not supported on the 1660 series logic analyzers For example for transmitting 80 bytes of data the syntax would be NUMBER OF DIGITS THAT FOLLOW ACTUAL DATA ee 800000080 lt eighty bytes of data gt lt terminator gt pt NUMBER OF BYTES 3 TO BE TR
247. hen operating directly between two DTE devices certain considerations must be taken into account For a three wire operation XON XOFF must be used to handle protocol between the devices For extended hardwire operation protocol may be handled either with XON XOFF or by manipulating the CTS and RTS lines of the RS 232C link For both three wire and extended hardwire operation the DCD and DSR inputs to the logic analyzer must remain high for proper operation With extended hardwire operation a high on the CTS input allows the logic analyzer to send data and a low disables the logic analyzer data transmission Likewise a high on the RTS line allows the controller to send data and a low signals a request for the controller to disable data transmission Because three wire operation has no control over the CTS input internal pull up resistors in the logic analyzer assure that this line remains high for proper three wire operation RS 232C Cables Selecting a cable for the RS 232C interface depends on your specific application and whether you wish to use software or hardware handshake protocol The following paragraphs describe which lines of the 1660 series logic analyzer are used to control the handshake operation of the RS 232C relative to the system To locate the proper cable for your application refer to the reference manual for your computer or controller Your computer or controller manual should describe the exact handshake protocol
248. ich are based on a comparison of the acquired state data and the compare data image You can run until one of the following conditions is true e Every channel of every label has the same value EQUal e Any channel of any label has a different value NEQual The RUNTIl instruction for state analysis is available in both the SLISt and COMPare subsystems real number from 9E9 to 9E9 20 12 Example Query Returned Format lt value gt Example Command Example COMPare Subsystem SET OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RUNTIL EQUAL MACHine 1 2 COMPare RUNTil The RUNTIil query returns the current stop criteria for the comparison when running in repetitive trace mode MACHine 1 2 COMPare RUNTil OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt 1 INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange value lt value gt EQUal NEQual lt NL gt real number from 9E9 to 9E9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RUNTIL SET MACHine 1 2 COMPare SET The SET command sets every state in the reference listing to don t cares If you send the SET command by mistake you can immediately send the CLEar command to restore the previous data This is the only time the CLEar command will not replace don t cares with zeros OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE SET 20 13 20 14 21 TFORmat Subsystem Introduction The TFORmat subsystem contains the commands avai
249. il satisfied 0 1 MC 0 Intermodule Measurement not satisfied 1 Intermodule Measurement satisfied Table 9 10 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Module Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Condition 7 128 0 not used 6 64 0 not used 5 32 0 not used 4 16 0 not used 3 8 1 One or more pattern searches failed 0 Pattern searches did not fail 2 4 1 Trigger found 0 Trigger not found 1 2 0 Run until not satisfied 1 Run until satisfied 0 1 0 Measurement not satisfied 1 Measurement satisfied Mainframe Commands RMODe Table 9 11 1660 Series Oscilloscope Module Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 7 128 0 not used 6 64 0 not used 5 32 0 not used 4 16 1 Number of averages satisfied 0 Number of averages not satisfied 3 8 1 Auto trigger received 0 Auto trigger not received 2 4 1 Trigger received 0 Trigger not received 1 2 RNT 1 Run until satisfied 0 Run until not satisfied 0 1 MC 1 Measurement complete 0 Measurement not complete RMODe mm Command RMODe SINGle REPetitive The RMODe command specifies the run mode for the selected module or Intermodule If the selected module is in the intermodule configuration then the intermodule run mode will be set by this command After specifying the run mode use the STARt command to start the acquisition Example OUTPUT XXX RMODE SINGLE 9 18 Query Returned Format Example
250. in the number of valid rows of data for pod 3 of the 1660A 1661A and 1662A only Bytes 23 and 24 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 2 of all models of the 1660 series logic analyzers Bytes 25 and 26 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 1 of all models of the 1660 series logic analyzers Byte Position 127 153 DATA and SETup Commands Acquisition Data Description 26 bytes Row of data containing the trigger point This byte group is organized in the same way as the data rows starting at byte 101 above These binary numbers are base zero numbers which start from the first sample stored for a specific pod For example if bytes 151 and 152 contained a binary number with a decimal equivalent of 1018 the data row having the trigger is the 1018th data row on pod 1 There are 1018 rows of pre trigger data as shown below row 0 row 1 row 1017 row 1018 trigger row 24 bytes Unused Acquisition Data Description The acquisition data section consists of a variable number of bytes depending on which logic analyzer you are using the acquisition mode and the tag setting time state or off The data is grouped in 18 byte rows for the 1660A in 14 byte rows for the 1661A in 10 byte rows for the 1662A and in 6 byte rows for the 1663A The number of rows for each pod is stored in byte positions 101 through 126 The number of bytes in each row can be determined by the value stored in byte posi
251. inated Any command below that point can be sent within the current program message without sending the keywords s which appear above them 4 6 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules The following examples are written using HP BASIC 6 2 on aHP 9000 Series 200 300 Controller The quoted string is placed on the bus followed by a carriage return and linefeed CRLF The three Xs XXX shown in this manual after an ENTER or OUTPUT statement represents the device address required by your controller In this example the colon between SYSTEM and HEADER is necessary since SYSTEM HEADER is a compound command The semicolon between the HEADER command and the LONGFORM command is the required program message unit separator The LONGFORM command does not need SYSTEM preceding it since the SYSTEM HEADER command sets the parser tothe SYSTEM node in the tree OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER ON LONGFORM ON In the first line of this example the subsystem selector is implied for the STORE command in the compound command The STORE command must be in the same program message as the INITIALIZE command since the program message terminator willplace the parser back at the root of the command tree A second way to send these commands is by placing MMEMORY before the STORE command as shown in the fourth line of this example 2 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY INITIALIZE STOR
252. individual runs or whether subsequent waveforms are allowed to be displayed over the previous waveforms OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE ON MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACCumulate The ACCumulate query returns the current setting The query always shows the setting as the characters 0 off or 1 on MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACCumulate 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 SwAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command allows you to specify the acquisition mode for the state analyzer The acquisition modes are automatic and manual OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC 18 5 Query Returned Format Command lt marker_type gt Example Command Example SWAVeform Subsystem CENTer MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACQuisition The ACQusition query returns the current acquisition mode MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM ACQUISITION CENTer MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform CENTer lt marker_type gt The CENTer command allows you to center the waveform display about the specified markers The markers are placed on the waveform in the SLISt subsystem x o xO TRIGger OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM CENTER X CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform CLRPattern X O ALL The CLRPattern command allows
253. ing the CATALOG ALL query OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG ALL This example is for sending the CATALOG query without the ALL option Keep in mind if you do not use the ALL option with a DOS disk each filename entry will be truncated at 51 characters OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG COPY MMEMory COPY lt name gt lt msus gt lt new_name gt lt msus gt The COPY command copies one file to a new file or an entire disk s contents to another disk The two lt name gt parameters are the filenames The first pair of parameters specifies the source file The second pair specifies the destination file An error is generated if the source file doesn t exist or if the destination file already exists The lt msus gt is not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken 11 10 lt name gt lt new_name gt lt msus gt Examples Command MMEMory Subsystem DOWNload A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken To copy the contents
254. ion 31 11 setting time marker mode 31 14 setting timebase 33 5 setting voltage marker mode 31 15 SETup 10 11 26 15 SETup command query 10 11 10 12 SFORmat selector 15 6 SFORmat Subsystem 15 1 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 17 15 18 Shortform 1 11 gogugguuuuuu SHOW 31 12 Simple commands 1 8 SKEW command 12 8 SLAVe command query 15 15 SLISt selector 17 7 SLISt Subsystem 17 1 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 10 17 11 17 12 17 13 17 14 17 15 17 16 17 17 17 18 17 19 17 20 17 21 17 22 11 23 slope 31 5 34 12 SLOPe 34 13 slot number 30 4 SOURce 32 10 34 13 35 12 SOURce 32 10 34 13 35 13 Spaces 1 7 SPERiod 35 13 SPERiod command query 22 18 23 18 SPERiod 35 13 Square brackets 4 5 STARt command 9 23 state analyzer program example 36 5 Status 1 22 6 2 8 3 Status byte 6 6 Status registers 1 22 8 3 Status reporting 6 2 Stop bits 3 9 STOP command 9 24 stop condition 31 11 STORe command query 16 17 STORe CONFig command 11 19 STRace Command 16 9 STRigger Command 16 9 STRigger STRace Subsystem 16 1 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 16 14 16 15 16 16 16 17 16 18 16 19 16 20 16 21 16 22 16 23 16 24 String data 1 13 String variables 1 18 STTRace selector 22 8 Subsystem ACQuire 28 1 28 2 28 3 28 4 28 5 CHANnel 29 1 29 2 29 3 29 4
255. ister 30 ENTER XXX Esr event Reads the query buffer Common Commands ESR Event Status Register Table 8 3 shows the Standard Event Status Register The table details the meaning of each bit position in the Standard Event Status Register and the bit weight When you read Standard Event Status Register the value returned is the total bit weight of all the bits that are high at the time you read the byte Table 8 3 The Standard Event Status Register Bit Position Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 7 128 PON 0 register read notin power up mode 1 power up 6 64 URQ 0 user request not used always zero 5 32 CME 0 no command errors 1 a command eror has been detected 4 16 EXE 0 no execution errors 1 an execution error has been detected 3 8 DDE 0 no device dependent error has been detected 1 a device dependent error has been detected 2 4 QYE 0 no query errors 1 a query error has been detected 1 2 ROC 0 request control not used always zero 0 1 OPC 0 operation is not complete 1 operation is complete Query Returned Format lt revision code gt Example Query Returned Format lt id gt 1 0 Common Commands IDN Identification Number IDN Identification Number IDN The IDN query allows the instrument to identify itself It returns the string HEWLETT PACKARD 1660A 0 REV revision code An IDN query must be the last query in a
256. iu kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Make a label COUNT give the label a positive polarity and assign the lower 8 bits OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 TFORMAT REMOVE ALL OUTPUT 707 MACH1 TFORMAT LABEL COUNT POS 0 0 B0000000011111111 OUTPUT 707 MACH1 TTRACI kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Specify FF hex for resource term A which is the default trigger term the timing analyzer E TERM A COUNT HFF kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Remove any previously inserted labels insert the COUNT label change the seconds per division to 100 ns and display the waveform menu 36 3 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 Programming Examples Making a Timing analyzer measurement OUTPUT 707 MACHI1 TWAVEFORM REMOVE OUTPUT 707 MACH1 TWAVEFORM INSERT COUNT ALL OUTPUT 707 MACH1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 1E 6 OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 5 l RRR KK KK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK Run the timing analyzer in single mode OUTPUT 707 RMODE SINGLE OUTPUT 707 START l RRR 2 2 kk 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
257. kck ckck kk kok kk kk kk Make a label SCOUNT give the label a positive polarity and assign the lower 8 bits OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT REMOVE ALL OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT LABEL SCOUNT POS 0 0 255 pockckckckckckckck ck ck k kk kkkk kk SETUP THE TRIGGER SPECIFICATION ockckckck ckck ckck ckck kck kk kk kk The trigger specification will use five sequence levels with the trigger level on level four Resource terms A through E and RANGE1 will be used to store only desired counts from the 8 bit ripple counter 36 5 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 Programming Examples Making a State analyzer measurement Display the state trigger menu I OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 3 Create a 5 level trigger specification with the trigger on the fourth level I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 5 4 I Define pattern terms A B C D and E to be 11 decimal respectively I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM A SCOUNT 11 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM B SCOUNT 22 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM C SCOUNT 33 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM D SCOUNT 44 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM E SCOUNT 59 22 33 44 and 59 Define a Range having a lowe
258. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk 210 OUTPUT 707 AUTOSCALE 220 230 pkokckckckckckckckckckckckckok Dimension a string for the data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk 240 250 DIM Header 20 260 270 l Digitize the data and display Waveform menu xxx 280 290 OUTPUT 707 DIGITIZE 300 OUTPUT 707 MENU 2 3 310 WAIT 5 320 Length 8000 330 ALLOCATE INTEGER Waveform 1 Length 340 350 pkckckckckckckckckckckckckckok Transfer the waveform data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk 360 370 OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM DATA 380 ENTER 707 USING 10A Header 36 30 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 Programming Examples Transferring waveform data in Word format ENTER 707 USING B Waveform ENTER 707 USING B Lastchar kkkkkkkkkkkkkkx k Print the waveform data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk PRINT Header Header PRINT PRINT Press CONTINUE to display waveform data PRINT PAUSE PRINT Waveform PRINT PRINT Lastchar END 36 31 Programming Examples Using AUToscale and the MEASure ALL Query Using AUToscale and the MEASure ALL Query This very simple program example shows how to use Autoscale to acquire a waveform and the MEASure ALL query to read in the measurement results 10 OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER ON 20 OUTPUT 707 EOI ON 30 OUTPUT 707 SELECT 2 40 OUTPUT 707 AUTOSCALE 50 WAIT 5 60 DIM Me 200 70 OUTPUT 707 MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL 1 ALL
259. label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares itis handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters HB 0 1 X H 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x gt amp 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OPATTERN A 511 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OPATtern label name The OPATtern query in pattern marker mode returns the pattern specification for a given label name In the time marker mode the query returns the pattern under the O marker for a given label If the O marker is not placed on valid data don t cares X are returned MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OPATtern label name label pattern NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OPATTERN A 23 13 Command lt origin gt lt occurrence gt Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem OSEarch OSEarch MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OSEarch occurrence origin The OSEarch command defines the search criteria for the O marker which is then used with the associated OPATtern recognizer specification and the OCONdition when moving markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger or with the X marker The actual occurrence the marker searches for is determined by the occurrence parameter of the OPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin An occurre
260. lable for the Timing Format menu in the 1660 series logic analyzers These commands are e ACQMode e LABel e REMove e THReshold TFORmat Subsystem Figure 21 1 dE Y TFORmat Cx e Acavode space e TRANS i tional space m size gt CONVentional space m size GLITch Me ACQMode gt m LaBe De space name pod specification polarity e LABe1 gt space gt name gt e REMove gt space name gt Im THResho d lt N gt gt space TIL gt value THReshold lt N gt 16550814 TFORmat Subsystem Syntax Diagram 21 3 Table 21 1 Example TFORmat Subsystem TFORmat TFORmat Paramter Values Parameter Values size FULL HALF lt N gt 1 213 4 5 6 7 8 name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters polarity PoSitive NEGative pod_specification format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order value voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 TFORmat MACHine 1 2 TFORmat The TFORmat selector is used as part of a compound header to access those settings normally found in the Timing Format menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the language tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TFORMA
261. le WaAVeform Subsystem FORMat FORMat WAVeform FORMat BYTE WORD ASCii The FORMat command specifies the data transmission mode of waveform data over the remote interface OUTPUT XXX WAV FORM WORD WAVeform FORMat The FORMat query returns the currently specified format WAVeform FORMat BYTE WORD ASCii lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM FORMAT POINts WAVeform POINts When WAVeform RECord is set to FULL the POINts query always returns a value of 8000 points When WAVeform RECord is set to WINdow then the query returns the number of points displayed on screen WAVeform POINts lt points gt lt NL gt number of points depending on the setting of the WAVeform RECord command OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM POINTS 35 10 Query Returned Format lt N gt Example WAVeform Subsystem PREamble PREamble WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PREamble The PREamble query returns the preamble of the specified channel The channel is specified using the SOURCE command WAVeform PREamble format 0 ASCII 1 BYTE 2 WORD type 1 Normal 2 Average points gt count Xincrement lt Xorigin gt lt Xreference gt lt Yincrement gt lt Yorigin gt lt Yreference gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM PREAMBLE For more information on the fields in PREamble see the commands which
262. lete Table 9 8 Query Returned Format lt N gt enable value Example Mainframe Commands MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register 1660 Series Oscilloscope Module Event Status Enable Register Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 7 128 not used 6 84 not used 5 32 not used 4 16 Number of averages met 3 8 Auto triggered 2 4 Trigger received 1 2 RNT Run Until Satisfied 0 1 MC Measurement Complete MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register MESR lt N gt The MESR query returns the contents of the Module Event Status register The N index specifies the module For the 1660 series logic analyzer the N index 0 1 or Z refers to system logic analyzer or oscilloscope respectively Refer to table 9 9 for information about the Module Event Status Register bits and their bit weights for the system table 9 10 for the logic analyzer and table 9 11 for the oscilloscope MESR lt N gt enable value NL An integer 0 through 10 3 through 10 unused An integer from 0 through 255 OUTPUT XXX MESR1 Mainframe Commands MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register Table 9 9 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Mainframe Module Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 7 128 0 not used 6 64 0 not used 5 32 0 not used 4 16 0 not used 3 0 not used 2 0 not used 1 RNT 0 Intermodule Run until not satisfied 1 Intermodule Run unt
263. lowing form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD CATalog MMEMory CATalog All lt msus gt The CATalog query returns the directory of the disk in one of two block data formats The directory consists of a 51 character string for each file on the disk when the ALL option is not used Each file entry is formatted as follows NNNNNNNNNN TTTTTTT FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where N is the filename T is the file type see table 11 2 and F is the file description The optional parameter ALL returns the directory of the disk in a 70 character string as follows NNNNNNNNNNNN TTTTTTT FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF DDMMMYY HH MM SS where N is the filename T is the file type see table 11 2 F is the file description and D M Y and HH MM SS are the date month year and time respectively in 24 hour format The lt msus gt is not needed by 1660 series however the 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken lt msus gt Returned Format lt block_data gt Example 1 Example 2 Command MMEMory Subsystem COPY Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken MMEMory CATalog block data ASCII block containing lt filename gt file type file description This example is for send
264. lso defines some common capabilities which are found in all IEEE 488 2 instruments This chapter also contains a few items which are not specifically defined by IEEE 488 2 but deal with message communication or system functions The syntax and protocol for RS 232C program messages and response messages for the 1660 series logic analyzer are structured very similar to those described by 488 2 In most cases the same structure shown in this chapter for 488 2 will also work for RS 232C Because of this no additional information has been included for RS 232C Message Communication and System Functions Protocols Protocols The protocols of IEEE 488 2 define the overall scheme used by the controller and the instrument to communicate This includes defining when it is appropriate for devices to talk or listen and what happens when the protocol is not followed Functional Elements Before proceeding with the description of the protocol a few system components should be understood Input Buffer The input buffer of the instrument is the memory area where commands and queries are stored prior to being parsed and executed It allows a controller to send a string of commands to the instrument which could take some time to execute and then proceed to talk to another instrument while the first instrument is parsing and executing commands Output Queue The output queue of the instrument is the memory area where all output data response
265. lyzer only and has no relation to the RUNTil commands in the SLISt and COMPare subsystems OFF LT value GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt value OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RUNTIL GT 800 0E 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RUNTIL INRANGE 4 5 5 5 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RUNTil The RUNTil query returns the current stop criteria MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RUNTil run until spec NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM RUNTIL 23 17 Command lt sample_period gt Example Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem SPERiod SPERiod MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform SPERiod sample period The SPERiod command allows you to set the sample period of the timing analyzer in the Conventional and Glitch modes The sample period range depends on the mode selected and is as follows e 2ns to 8ms for Conventional Half Channel 500 MHz e 4ns to 8 ms for Conventional Full Channel 250 MHz e 8nsto 8ms for Glitch Half Channel 125 MHz real number from 2 ns to 8 ms depending on mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM SPERIOD 50E 9 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform SPERiod The SPERiod query returns the current sample period MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform SPERiod sample period NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM SPERIOD 23 18 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Fo
266. m continued 16550816 24 4 TLISt Subsystem Figure 24 1 continued Y VRUNs gt I xcond it ion je space ENTering Pi XCONdi tion gt XOTAG gt XPAT tern space label name natis label pattern M I9 XPAT tern space H r label name Im xstorch space H occurrence C W TRIGger 5 STARt H XSEarch gt e XSTote gt Ie xTAG space time value gt state_value XTAG gt XOTime 16550815 TLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 24 5 Table 24 1 TLISt Subsystem TLISt Parameter Values Parameter module_num mach_num col_num line_number label_name base line_num_mid_screen label_pattern occurrence time_value state_value run_until_spec value Values 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2through 10 not used 1 2 integer from 1 to 61 integer from 8191 to 8191 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol IASSembler for labels or ABSolute RELative fortags integer from 8191to 8191 B O 1 xX amp o o 1 2 3 4 s e 7 x atolalalslalsis 7jelsiaizielnielrix to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 integer from 8191 to 8191 real number real number OFF LT value GT value INRange value value OUTRange
267. mands or queries following will refer to Because the INTermodule command is a root level command it will normally appear as the first element of a compound header OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE HTIME DELete DELete ALL OUT module The DELete command is used to delete a module PORT OUT or an entire intermodule tree The module parameter sent with the delete command refers to the slot location of the module The logic analyzer is slot 1 and the oscilloscope is slot 2 An integer 1 through 10 3 through 10 unused OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE DELETE ALL OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE DELETE 1 12 5 Query Returned Format value 1 value 2 Example pe Command Example INTermodule Subsystem HTIMe HTIMe HTIMe The HTIMe query returns a value representing the internal hardware skew in the Intermodule configuration If there is no internal skew or if intermodule bus is not configured 9 9E37 is returned The internal hardware skew is only a display adjustment for time correlated waveforms The value returned is the average propagation delay of the trigger lines through the intermodule bus circuitry The value is for reference only because the value returned by TTIMe includes the internal hardware skew represented by HTIMe INTermodule HTIMe value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4 value 5 gt lt NL gt Skew for logic analyzer real number
268. me name msus new name The REName command renames a file on the disk in the drive The name parameter specifies the filename to be changed and the new name parameter specifies the new filename You cannot rename a file to an already existing filename A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN Or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A msus is accepted but no action is taken A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN Or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN 11 18 Examples Command lt name gt lt msus gt lt description gt lt module gt MMEMory Subsystem STORe CONFig OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY RENAME OLDFILE NEWFILE OUTPUT XXX MMEM REN OLDFILE INTERNAL1 NEWFILE STORe CONFig MMEMory STORe CONfig name msus description module The STORe command stores module or system configurations onto a disk The CONFig specifier is optional and has no effect on the command The name parameter specifies the file on the disk The description parameter describes the contents of the file The optional module parameter allows you to store the configuration for either
269. means the module is not in the intermodule tree a 0 value means the module is armed from the Intermodule run button Group run and a positive value indicates the module is being armed by another module with the slot location l to 10 A 1 corresponds to the slot location of the module A logic analyzer and 2 through 10 are unused INTermodule TREE module 1 module 2 module 3 module 4 gt lt module_5 gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX INTERMODULE TREE 12 9 Query Returned Format value 1 value 2 value 3 value 10 Example INTermodule Subsystem TTIMe TTIMe TTIMe The TTIMe query returns values representing the absolute intermodule trigger time for all of the modules in the Intermodule configuration The first value is the trigger time for the module in slot A the second value is for the module in slot B the third value is for slot C etc The value 9 9E37 is returned when e The module in the corresponding slot is not time correlated or e Atime correlatable module did not trigger The trigger times returned by this command have already been offset by the INTermodule SKEW values and internal hardware skews INTermodule HTIMe INTermodule TTIMe value 1 value 2 5 value 3 value 4 value 5 gt lt NL gt Trigger time for module in slot A real number Trigger time for module in slot B real number Trigger time for module in slot C real num
270. message Any queries after the DN in the program message are ignored HEWLETT PACKARD 1660A 0 REV revision code Four digit code in the format XX XX representing the current ROM revision OUTPUT XXX IDN ST Individual Status IST The IST query allows the instrument to identify itself during parallel poll by allowing the controller to read the current state of the IEEE 488 1 defined ist local message in the instrument The response to this query is dependent upon the current status of the instrument Figure 8 2 shows the IST data structure lt id gt lt NL gt 0 or 1 Indicates the ist local message is false Indicates the ist local message is true 8 9 Common Commands IST Individual Status Example OUTPUT XXX IST Figure 8 2 DEVICE DEFINED CONDITIONS 1 LOGICAL OR i STATUS IST IST Data Structure NDIVIDUAL DEVICE DEFINED CONDITIONS SUMMARY MESSAGE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Yv Y 5 14 19 12 11 10 9 8 7 MSS ESB MAV 3 2 1 B m amp re amp o amp l amp amp re amp B 2 s amp 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 74 6 5 4 3 2 1 9
271. messages are stored until read by the controller Parser The instrument s parser is the component that interprets the commands sent to the instrument and decides what actions should be taken Parsing refers to the action taken by the parser to achieve this goal Parsing and executing of commands begins when either the instrument recognizes a program message terminator defined later in this chapter or the input buffer becomes full If you wish to send a long sequence of commands to be executed and then talk to another instrument while they are executing you should send all the commands before sending the program message terminator Message Communication and System Functions Protocols Protocol Overview The instrument and controller communicate using lt program message gt s and lt response message gt s These messages serve as the containers into which sets of program commands or instrument responses are placed lt program message gt s are sent by the controller to the instrument and lt response message gt s are sent from the instrument to the controller in response to a query message A lt query message gt is defined as being a lt program message gt which contains one or more queries The instrument will only talk when it has received a valid query message and therefore has something to say The controller should only attempt to read a response after sending a complete query message but before sending another
272. meter specifies from which module the waveform is coming from however the 1660A series logic analyzers are single module instruments Therefore this parameter is not needed It is described here as a reminder that programs for the 16500A logic analysis system can be used The second parameter specifies the label name that will be inserted The optional third parameter specifies the label bit number overlay or all If a number is specified only the waveform for that bit number is added to the screen If you specify OVERIay all the bits of the label are displayed as a composite overlaid waveform If you specify ALL all the bits are displayed sequentially If you do not specify the third parameter ALL is assumed 112131415161 71819110 not needed String of up to 6 alphanumeric characters An integer from 0 to 31 Inserting a logic analyzer waveform OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST INSERT 3 WAVE 10 14 6 Command line num mid Screen Example Query Returned Format Example WLISt Subsystem LINE LINE MACHine 1 2 WLISt LINE line num mid screen The LINE command allows you to scroll the state analyzer listing vertically The command specifies the state line number relative to the trigger that the analyzer highlights at the center of the screen An integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST LINE 0 MACHine 1 2 WLISt LINE The LINE query returns the line numbe
273. mple Table 8 7 Common Commands TST Test TST Test TST The TST query returns the results of the power up self test The result of that test is a 9 bit mapped value which is placed in the output queue A one in the corresponding bit means that the test failed and a zero in the corresponding bit means that the test passed Refer to table 8 7 for the meaning of the bits returned by a TST query lt result gt lt NL gt An integer 0 through 511 10 OUTPUT XXX TST 20 ENTER XXX Tst value Bits Returned by TST Query Power Up Test Results Bit Position Bit Weight Test 8 256 Disk Test 7 128 not used 6 64 not used 5 32 Front panel Test 4 16 HIL Test 3 8 Display Test 2 4 Interupt Test 1 2 RAM Test 0 1 ROM Test Command Example Common Commands WAI Wait WAI Wait WAI The WAI command causes the device to wait until completing all of the overlapped commands before executing any further commands or queries An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress Some examples of overlapped commands for the 1660 series logic analyzers are STARt and STOP OUTPUT XXX WAI Mainframe Commands Introduction Mainframe commands control the basic operation of the instrument for the 1660 series logic analyzers The 1660 series logic analyzers
274. ms B o i x 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X te pro aspe 7218 n c 10 DIM Label 6 Response 80 15 PRINT This program shows the values for a signal s Compare listing 20 INPUT Enter signal label Label 25 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER OFF Turn headers off from responses 30 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RANGE 35 ENTER XXX First Last Read in the range s end points 40 PRINT LINE VALUE of Label 45 FOR State First TO Last Print compare value for each state 50 OUTPUT XXX MACH2 COMPARE DATA amp Label amp amp VALS State 55 ENTER XXX Responses 60 PRINT State Responses 65 NEXT State 70 END 20 8 Query Returned Format lt difference_ occurrence gt lt line_number gt Example COMPare Subsystem FIND FIND MACHine 1 2 COMPare FIND lt difference occurrence gt The FIND query is used to get the line number of a specified difference occurence first second third etc within the current compare range as dictated by the RANGe command see page 20 11 A difference is counted for each line where at least one of the current labels has a discrepancy between its acquired state data listing and its compare data image Invoking the FIND query updates both the Listing and Compare displays so that the line number returned is in the center ofthe screen MACHine 1 2 COMPare FIND difference occurrence
275. n be used in any other popular programming language that allows communications over GPIB or RS 232 buses SFORmat Subsystem STRigger STRace Subsystem LEEEDEBEBEBEBEBIEBIEBEIEIEIE SLISt Subsystem SWAVeform Subsystem SCHart Subsystem COMPare Subsystem TFORmat Subsystem TRIGger TRACe Subsystem TWAVeform Subsystem TLISt Subsystem SYMbol Subsystem DATA and SETup Commands Oscilloscope Root Level Commands ACQuire Subsystem vi _ s lellellellellellelle CHANnel Subsystem DISPlay Subsystem MARKer Subsystem MEASure Subsystem TIMebase Subsystem TRiGger Subsystem WAVeform Subsystem Programming Examples Index vi viii Part 1 Contents General Information Introduction to Programming Talking to the Instrument 1 3 Initialization 1 4 Instruction Syntax 1 5 Output Command 1 5 Device Address 1 6 Instructions 1 6 Instruction Terminator 1 7 Header Types 1 8 Duplicate Keywords 1 9 Query Usage 1 10 Program Header Options 1 11 Parameter Data Types 1 12 Selecting Multiple Subsystems 1 14 Receiving Information from the Instrument 1 15 Response Header Options 1 16 Response Data Formats 1 17 String Variables 1 18 Numeric Base 1 19 Numeric Variables 1 19 Definite Length Block Response Data 1 20 Multiple Queries 1 21 Instrument Status 1 22 Programming Over GPIB Interface Capabilities 2 3 Command and Data Concepts 2 3 Addressing 2 3 C
276. n decreasing order Format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order J K L M N P OFF RISing FALLing BOTH 1 2 AND OR 1 2 3 4 OFF LOW HIGH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 15 5 Selector Example Command lt clock_mode gt Example SFORmat Subsystem SFORmat SFORmat MACHine 1 2 SFORmat The SFORmat State Format selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings in the State Format menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MASTER J RISING CLOCk MACHine 1 2 SFORmat CLOCk lt N gt clock mode The CLOCK command selects the clocking mode for a given pod when the pod is assigned to the state analyzer When the MASTer option is specified the pod will sample all 16 channels on the master clock When the SLAVe option is specified the pod will sample all 16 channels on the slave clock When the DEMultiplex option is specified only one pod of a pod pair can acquire data The 16 bits of the selected pod will be clocked by the demultiplex master for labels with bits assigned under the Master pod The same 16 bits will be clocked by the demultiplex slave for labels with bits assigned under the Slave pod The master clock always follows the slave
277. n on setting up your serial port address HP 9000 Series 300 Controllers Each RS 232C interface card for the HP 9000 Series 300 Controller has its own interface select code This code is used by the controller for directing commands and communications to the proper interface by specifying the correct interface code for the device address Generally the interface select code can be any decimal value between 0 and 31 except for those interface codes which are reserved by the controller for internal peripherals and other internal interfaces This value can be selected through switches on the interface card For example if your RS 232C interface select code is 9 the device address required to communicate over the RS 232C bus is 9 For more information refer to the reference manual for your interface card or controller Programming Over RS 232C Lockout Command Lockout Command To lockout the front panel controls use the SYSTem command LOCKout When this function is on all controls except the power switch are entirely locked out Local control can only be restored by sending the LOCKout OFF command Hint Cycling the power will also restore local control but this will also reset certain RS 232C states It also resets the logic analyzer to the power on defaults and purges any acquired data in the acquisition memory of all the installed modules See Also For more information on this command see chapter 10 System Comma
278. n screen MEASure VAMPlitude lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 difference between top and base voltage OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL2 VAMP VBASe MEASure SOURce CHANnelcN VBASe The VBASe query returns the base voltage relative minimum of a displayed waveform The measurement is made on the selected source MEASure VBASe value NL An integer from 1 to 2 voltage at base relative minimum of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 VBAS 32 11 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem VMAX VMAX MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VMAX The VMAX query returns the absolute maximum voltage of the selected source MEASure VMAX lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 maximum voltage of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN2 VMAX VMIN MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VMIN The VMIN query returns the absolute minimum voltage present on the selected source MEASure VMIN lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 1to2 minimum voltage of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANI VMIN 32 12 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem VP
279. name Le glitch_edge_spec Ie GLEDge N gt space abel name gt e RANGe space Es label name zat stort_pattern stop pattern gt Az gt zZ QO o Y SEQuence space num_of_levels gt H r SEQuence gt SPER i od space sample_period gt H r SPERiod gt Ie TCONt ro 1e space gt timer num CONTinue Y 16550506 TTRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram 22 3 Figure 22 1 continued TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Y 9 TcoNtro I lt N gt ef space Es timer_num TERM space H term id zc label name RO Je pat tern gt TERM space H r term id zat wm label nome eC TINER lt t imer num x space Es timer value H r TIMER t imer num i e ToS i tion space gt STARt CENTer END Posts tore gt Jem post_value DELay ae time_val TPOSI tion TTRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16550S05 22 4 Table 22 1 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TTRigger Parameter Values Parameter branch_qualifier to_lev_num proceed_qualifier occurrence label_name glitch_edge_spec start_pattern stop_pattern num_of_levels lev_of_trig store_qualifier
280. nce of 0 places a marker on the selected origin With a negative occurrence the marker searches before the origin With a positive occurrence the marker searches after the origin STARt TRIGger XMARker integer from 8192 to 8192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OSEarch The OSEarch query returns the search criteria for the O marker MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OSEarch occurrence lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 23 14 Command time value Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem OTIMe OTIMe MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OTIMe time value The OTIMe command positions the O marker in time when the marker mode is TIME If data is not valid the command performs no action real number 2 5 ks to 42 5 ks OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OTIME 30 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OTIMe The OTIMe query returns the O marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OTIMe time value NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TWAVI EFORM OTIMI E 23 15 Command lt time_range gt Example Query Returned Format Command Example TWAVeform Subsystem RANGe RANGe MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RANGe time value The RANGe command specifies the full screen time in the timin
281. nctions Status Reporting Error Message Common Commands Mainframe Commands SYSTem Subsystem MMEMory Subsystem INTermodule Subsystem MACHine Subsystem WLISt Subsystem PE EA ESE ee iii If you are already familiar with IEEE 488 2 programming and GPIB or RS 232C you may want to just scan these chapters If you are new to programmiung the system you should read part 1 Chapter 1 is divided into two sections The first section Talking to the Instrument concentrates on program syntax and the second section Receiving Information from the Instrument discusses how to send queries and how to retrieve query results from the instrument Read either chapter 2 Programming Over GPIB or chapter 3 Programming Over RS 232C for information concerning the physical connection between the 1660 series logic analyzer and your controller Chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions gives an overview of all instructions and also explains the notation conventions used in the syntax definitions and examples Chapter 5 Message Communication and System Functions provides an overview of the operation of instruments that operate in compliance with the IEEE 488 2 standard Chapter 6 explains status reporting and how it can be used to monitor the flow of your programs and measurement process Chapter 7 contains error message descriptions Part 2 Part 2 chapters 8 through 12 explain each comman
282. nd not the RQS Request Service bit is reported on bit 6 The MSS indicates whether or not the device has at least one reason for requesting service Refer to table 8 6 for the meaning of the bits in the status byte Refer to Chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 through 255 OUTPUT XXX STB Table 8 6 0 False Low 1 True High Command Example Common Commands TRG Trigger The Status Byte Register Bit Position Bit Weight 7 128 6 64 5 32 4 16 3 8 2 1 0 1 Bit Name MSS ESB MAV LCL MSB Condition 0 not Used 0 instrument has no reason for service 1 instrument is requesting service 0 no event status conditions have occurred 1 an enabled event status condition has occurred 0 no output messages are ready 1 an output message is ready 0 a remote to local transition has not occurred 1 a remote to local transition has occurred not used not used 0 a module or the system has activity to report 1 no activity to report TRG Trigger TRG The TRG command has the same effect as a Group Execute Trigger GET That effect is as if the START command had been sent for intermodule group run If no modules are configured in the Intermodule menu this command has no effect OUTPUT XXX TRG 8 17 Query Returned Format lt result gt Exa
283. nds Programming and Documentation Conventions Introduction This chapter covers the programming conventions used in programming the instrument as well as the documentation conventions used in this manual This chapter also contains a detailed description of the command tree and command tree traversal Programming and Documentation Conventions Truncation Rule Truncation Rule The truncation rule for the keywords used in headers and parameters is e Ifthe longform has four or fewer characters there is no change in the shortform When the longform has more than four characters the shortform is just the first four characters unless the fourth character is a vowel In that case only the first three characters are used There are some commands that do not conform to the truncation rule by design These will be noted in their respective description pages Some examples of how the truncation rule is applied to various commands are shown in table 4 1 Table 4 1 Truncation Examples Long Form Short Form OFF OFF DATA DATA START STAR LONGFORM LONG DELAY DEL ACCUMULATE ACC 4 3 Programming and Documentation Conventions Infinity Representation Infinity Representation The representation of infinity is 9 9E 37 for real numbers and 32767 for integers This is also the value returned when a measurement cannot be made Sequential and Overlapped Commands IEEE 488 2 makes the distincti
284. nels 34 2 Figure 34 1 TRIGger Subsystem CN TRIGger V e cowi tion space Pi CONDition DELay space DELay MODE space Y gt EXIT RANGe time I time Fo 6r time gt gt even 4 count s gt H 1evei_value gt gt a a gt gt gt 16532514 A TRIGger Subsystem Syntax Diagram 34 3 figure 34 1 Table 34 1 TRIGger Subsystem PATH space CHANne _ PATH SLOPe space POSitive NEGative SLOPe SOURce space 9P CHANne 1 w SOURce 16532598 TRIGger Subsystem Syntax Diagram Cont d TRIGger Parameter Values Parameter Value channel An integer from 1 to 2 count an integer from 1 through 32000 time a real number from 20 ns through 160 ms 34 4 Command TRIGger Subsystem CONDition CONDition TRIGger MODE PATTern CONDition ENTer EXIT GT time LT time RANGe time lt time gt The CONDition command specifies if a trigger is to be generated on entry ENTer to a specific logic pattern when exiting EXIT the specified pattern or if a specified pattern duration LT GT RANGe is met The specified pattern is defined by using the LOGic command When ENTer is chosen the oscillo
285. ng data from the 1660 series logic analyzers in ASCII form by using the PRINT ALL query RK KK KK koe kk KK KK KEK HH KK KK KEK EK KK KK KK kk k k kk KK kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk ke ke kk DIM Blocks 32000 OUTPUT 707 EOI ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEAD OFF OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 Always a 1 for the 1660 series logic analyzers OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 7 Selects the Listing 1 menu Print All will only work in Listing and Disk menus I OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM PRINT ALL ENTER 707 USING K Block I KKK KK KK RK RK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 23 Now display the ASCII data you received I PRINT USING K Block END 36 24 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 Programming Examples Reading the disk with the CATalog ALL query Reading the disk with the CATalog ALL query The following example program reads the catalog of the disk currently in the logic analyzer disk drive The CATALOG ALL query returns the entire 70 character field Because DOS directory entries are 70 characters long you should use the CATALOG ALL query with DOS disks l DISK CATALOG KkKKKKK using the CATALOG query DIM Files 100 DIM Specifiers 2 OUTPUT 707 EOI ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG ALL send CATALOG ALL query
286. ngth of the block all sections For example if the total length of the block is 14522 bytes the block length specifier would be 800014522 Each section consists of a section header and section data The section data format varies for each section For the DATA instruction there is only one section which is composed of a data preamble followed by the acquisition data This section has a variable number of bytes depending on configuration and amount of acquired data block length specifier section 8 lt length gt The total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits lt section header gt lt section data gt 26 4 lt section_ header gt section data Example Query Returned Format Example DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem DATA 16 bytes described in chapter 26 Section Header Description Format depends on the specific section OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM DATA block data The total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data So when calculating the value for length don t forget to include the length of the section headers SYSTem DATA The SYSTem DATA query returns the block data to the controller The data sent by the SYSTem DATA query reflect the configuration of the machines when the last run was performed Any changes made since then through either front panel operations
287. ns the current voltage level of the selected source at the O marker MARKer VOTime lt level gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 level in volts where the O marker crosses the waveform OUTPUT XXX MARKER VOTIME CHANNEL1 For compatibility with older modules the OVOLt query will function the same as the VOTime query VRUNS MARKer VRUNS The VRUNs query returns the number of valid runs and the total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the edge search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid marker time measurement MARKer VRUNS valid runs total runs gt lt NL gt positive integer positive integer OUTPUT XXX MARKER VRUNS 31 16 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt level gt Example MARKer Subsystem VXTime VXTime MARKer XVOLt CHANnel lt N gt The VXTime query returns the current voltage level of the selected channel at the X marker MARKer VXTime lt level gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 level in volts where the X marker crosses the waveform OUTPUT XXX MARKER VXTIME CHANNEL1 For compatibility with older modules the XVOLt query will function the same as the VXTime query 31 17 MARKer Subsystem XAUTo XAUTo mmn Command MARKer XAUTo MANual CHANnel lt N gt type level slope occurrence The XAUTo command specifies the automatic placement specificati
288. ny data matching the STORe qualifier will actually be stored in memory as part of the current trace data The qualifier may be a single term or a complex expression The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN RANGE1 and 2 and OUT_RANGE1 and 2 is determined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed A detailed example is provided in figure 16 2 on page 16 12 An integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 qualifier see Qualifier on page 16 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE1 ANYSTATE OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI STRIGGER STORE2 OUT RANGEI OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE3 NOTC AND NOTD AND NOTH MACHine 1 2 STRigger STORe lt N gt The STORe query returns the current store qualifier specification for a given sequence level lt N gt MACHine 1 2 STRigger STORe lt N gt store qualifier gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER STOREA 16 17 Command state tag qualifier Examples Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TAG TAG MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAG oFF TIME state tag qualifier The TAG command selects the type of count tagging stat
289. of a single term Thus an expressionlike B AND G islegal since the two operands are both simple terms from separate groups CLEar Be Command MACHine 1 2 TTRigger CLEar A11 SEQuence RESource The CLEar command allows you to clear all settings in the Timing Trigger menu and replace them with the default clear only the sequence levels or clear only the resource term patterns Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER CLEAR RESOURCE 22 12 Command lt N gt lt condition_ mode gt GT LT lt duration_time gt lt occurrence gt lt time_ qualifier gt Examples TTRigger TTRace Subsystem FIND FIND MACHine 1 2 TTRigger FIND lt N gt lt time_qualifier gt lt condition_mode gt The FIND command defines the time qualifier for a given sequence level The qualifier tells the timing analyzer when to proceed to the next sequence level When this proceed qualifier is matched the specified number of times the sequencer will proceed to the next sequence level In the sequence level where the trigger is specified the FIND command specifies the trigger qualifier see SEQuence command The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE and OUT_RANGE is determined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the Timing Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional pa
290. of up to 6 alphanumeric characters rag ro xxr otol lalslalsje l7ix 88 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X to 1 2I3 4 s e v 8 9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 MACHine 1 2 SLISt XPATtern label name The XPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 SLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XPATTERN A 17 20 Command lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem XSEarch XSEarch MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The XSEarch command defines the search criteria for the X Marker which is then with associated XPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the Marker to begin a search with the trigger or with the start of data The occurrence parameter determines which occurrence of the XPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin the marker actually searches for An occurrence of 0 places a marker on the selected origin integer from 8191 to 8191 TRIGger STARt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSEarch The XSEarch query returns the search criteria for the X marker MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSEar
291. okckckckckck kckckck ck kckckckckckckck k k kk NOTH kk ck ek ck ck ck ck ck ck kckckck kckckck KH A HU The FIND command selects the trigger in the sequence level specified as the trigger level l KKK KK KEK 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND4 E 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk CONFIGURE SEQUENCE LEVEL 5 xxxxxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Store anystate on level 5 I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE5 ANYSTATE xkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk START ACQUISITION X dxd kk kk kk kck kck ok FOR IR IO IO IO k Place the logic analyzer in single acquisition mode the acquisition is complete OUTPUT 707 RMODE SINGLE OUTPUT 707 CLS OUTPUT 707 START then determine when pokckk sek ke ke e ke ke kk CHECK FOR MEASUREMENT COMPLETE xxxxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enable the MESR register and query the register for a measurement complete condition I OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM OFF Status 0 OUTPUT 707 MESE1 1 OUTPUT 707 MESR1 ENTER 707 Status I Print the MESR register status I CLEAR SCREEN PRINT Measurement complete status is Status PRINT 0 not complete 1 complete Repeat the MESR query until measurement is complete WAIT 1 IF Status 1 THEN GOTO 1190 GOTO 1070 PRINT TABXY 30 15 Measurement is complete 36 7 Programming Example
292. ommand 8 13 RST command 8 14 SRE command 8 15 STB command 8 16 TRG command 8 17 TST command 8 18 WAI command 8 19 4 5 32767 4 4 9 9E 37 4 4 m 4 5 4 5 b 4 5 4 5 5 A ABVolt 31 7 ACCumulate 28 3 30 4 30 7 ACCumulate command query 18 5 19 4 23 7 ACCumulate 30 4 ACQMode command query 21 5 ACQuire Subsystem 28 2 acquire waveform data 27 5 acquired data 35 14 ACQuisition command query 16 9 18 5 22 9 23 8 acquisition type 28 3 35 2 35 13 Average 28 3 Normal 28 3 ACSII format 35 5 adding waveforms 30 9 Addressed talk listen mode 2 3 ALL 32 5 ALL 32 5 Analyzer 1 Data Information 26 7 Analyzer 2 Data Information 26 9 Angular brackets 4 5 Arguments 1 7 ARM command query 13 5 ASCII Format 35 5 ASCII transfer 35 4 ASSign command query 13 5 attenuation factor 29 7 auto timebase mode 33 5 AUToload command 11 8 AUToscale 27 3 Average mode 28 3 35 3 averaging data points 28 3 AVOLt 31 6 AVOLt 31 6 B BASE command 25 5 base voltage measurement 32 11 Bases 1 12 Basic 1 3 Baud rate 3 9 BEEPer command 9 6 Bit definitions 6 4 6 5 bit_id 30 4 Block data 1 6 1 20 26 4 Block length specifier 26 4 Block length specifier 10 5 10 11 Block length specifier gt 26 16 Block length specifier gt gt 26 4 Braces 4 5 BRANch command query 16 10 16 11 22 9 22 10 22 11 BVOLt 31 7 BVOLt 31 8 byte data structu
293. ommunicating Over the GPIB Bus HP 9000 Series 200 300 Controller 2 4 Local Remote and Local Lockout 2 5 Bus Commands 2 6 Contents 1 Contents 3 Programming Over RS 232C Interface Operation 3 3 RS 232C Cables 3 3 Minimum Three Wire Interface with Software Protocol 3 4 Extended Interface with Hardware Handshake 3 4 Cable Examples 3 6 Configuring the Logic Analzer Interface 3 8 Interface Capabilities 3 9 RS 232C Bus Addressing 3 10 Lockout Command 3 11 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions Truncation Rule 4 3 Infinity Representation 4 4 Sequential and Overlapped Commands 4 4 Response Generation 4 4 Syntax Diagrams 4 4 Notation Conventions and Definitions 4 5 The Command Tree 4 5 Tree Traversal Rules 4 6 Command Set Organization 4 14 Subsystems 4 15 Program Examples 4 16 5 Message Communication and System Functions Protocols 5 3 Syntax Diagrams 5 5 Syntax Overview 5 7 6 Status Reporting Event Status Register 6 4 Service Request Enable Register 6 4 Bit Definitions 6 4 Key Features 6 6 Serial Poll 6 7 Contents 2 Contents 7 Error Messages Part 2 Device Dependent Errors 7 3 Command Errors 7 83 Execution Errors 7 4 Internal Errors 7 4 Query Errors 7 5 Mainframe Commands Common Commands CLS Clear Status 8 5 ESE Event Status Enable 8 6 ESR Event Status Register 8 7 IDN Identification Number 8 9 IST Individual Status 8 9 OPC Operation Complete 8 1
294. omplex qualifier OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 A OR B AND G OR H 2 Terms A through E RANGE 1 and TIMER 1 must be grouped together and terms F through J RANGE 2 and TIMER 2 must be grouped together In the first level terms from one group may not be mixed with terms from the other For example the expression A OR IN RANGE2 AND C OR HJ is not allowed because the term C cannot be specified in the E through J group In the first level the operators you can use are AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR Either AND or OR may be used at the second level to join the two groups together It is acceptable for a group to consist of a single term Thus an expressionlike B AND G islegal since the two operands are both simple terms from separate groups CLEar MACHine 1 2 STRigger CLEar A11 SEQuence RESource The CLEar command allows you to clear all settings in the State Trigger menu and replace them with the default clear only the Sequence levels or clear only the resource term patterns OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER CLEAR RESOURCE 16 12 Command lt N gt lt occurrence gt proceed qualifier Examples STRigger STRace Subsystem FIND FIND MACHine 1 2 STRigger FIND lt N gt proceed qualifier gt lt occurrence gt The FIND command defines the proceed qualifier for a given sequence level The qualifier tells the state analyzer when to proceed to the next s
295. on between sequential and overlapped commands Sequential commands finish their task before the execution of the next command starts Overlapped commands run concurrently therefore the command following an overlapped command may be started before the overlapped command is completed The overlapped commands for the 1660 series logic analyzers are STARt and STOP Response Generation IEEE 488 2 defines two times at which query responses may be buffered The first is when the query is parsed by the instrument and the second is when the controller addresses the instrument to talk so that it may read the response The 1660 series logic analyzers will buffer responses to a query when it is parsed Syntax Diagrams At the beginning of each chapter in Parts 2 through 4 Commands is a syntax diagram showing the proper syntax for each command All characters contained in a circle or oblong are literals and must be entered exactly as shown Words and phrases contained in rectangles are names of items used with the command and are described in the accompanying text of each command Each line can only be entered from one direction as indicated by the arrow on the entry line Any combination of commands and arguments that can be generated by following the lines in the proper direction is syntactically correct An argument is optional if there is a path around it When there is a rectangle which contains the word space a white space character must
296. on for the X marker The first parameter specifies if automarker placement is to be in the Manual mode or on a specified channel If a channel is specified four other parameters must be included in the command syntax The four parameters are marker type level slope and the occurrence count lt N gt Aninteger from 1 to Z type ABSolute or PERCent level percentage of waveform voltage level ranging from 10 to 90 of the Vtop to Vbase voltage or a voltage level slope POSitive or NEGative occurrence integer from 1 to 100 Example OUTPUT XXX MARKER XAUTO CHANNEL1 ABS 4 75 POSITIVE 5 Query MARKer XAUTo The XAUTo query returns the current settings Returned Format MARKer XAUTo CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MARKER XAUTO If type is not specified the marker type will default to PERCent 31 18 Query Returned Format lt time gt Example Command lt X marker time gt Example MARKer Subsystem XOTime XOTime MARKer XOTime The XOTime query returns the time in seconds from the X marker to the O marker If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MARKer X0Time lt time gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER XOTIME XTIMe MARKer XTIMe X marker time The XTIMe command moves the X marker to the specified time with respect
297. on functions e ACQuire sets up acquisition conditions for the digitize function e CHANnel controls the oscilloscope channel display and vertical axis e DISPlay allows data to be displayed e MARKer allows access to the oscilloscope s time and voltage markers e MEASure allows automatic parametric measurements e TIMebase controls the oscilloscope timebase and horizontal axis Example Programming and Documentation Conventions Program Examples e TRIGger allows access to the oscilloscope s trigger functions e WAVeform used to transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope to a controller Program Examples The program examples in the following chapters and chapter 36 Programming Examples were written on an HP 9000 Series 200 300 controller using the HP BASIC 6 2 language The programs always assume a generic address for the 1660 series logic analyzers of XXX In the examples you should pay special attention to the ways in which the command and or query can be sent Keywords can be sent using either the long form or short form if one exists for that word With the exception of some string parameters the parser is not case sensitive Uppercase and lowercase letters may be mixed freely System commands like HEADer and LONGform allow you to dictate what forms the responses take but they have no affect on how you must structure your commands and queries The following commands all set the Timing Wave
298. onductor grounding Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specified type normal blow time delay etc should be used Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuseholders To do so could cause a shock of fire hazard Service instructions are for trained service personnel To avoid dangerous electric shock do not perform any service unless qualified to do so Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present If you energize this instrument by an auto transformer for voltage reduction make sure the common terminal is connected to the earth terminal of the power source Whenever it is likely that the ground protection is impaired you must make the instrument inoperative and secure it against any unintended operation Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument Capacitors inside the instrument may retain a charge even if the instrument is disconnected from its source of supply Use caution when exposing or handling the CRT Handling or replacing the CRT shall be done only by qualifi
299. op up menu within the TTRigger menu T AORB AORB AND C AORB AND C AND IN RANGE2 A OR B AND C AND IN RANGE1 IN RANGE1 AND A OR B AND C TTRigger TTRace MACHine 1 2 TTRigger The TTRigger TTRace Trace Trigger selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings found in the Timing Trace menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TAG TIME Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command TTRigger TTRace Subsystem ACQuisition ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 TTRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command allows you to specify the acquisition mode for the Timing analyzer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC MACHine 1 2 TTRigger ACQuisition The ACQuisition query returns the current acquisition mode specified MACHine 1 2 TTRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER ACQUISITION BRANch MACHine 1 2 TTRigger BRANch lt N gt branch qualifier to level number The BRANch command defines the branch qualifier for a given sequence level When this branch qualifier is matched it will cause the sequencer to jump to the specified sequence level The terms used by the branch qualifier A through J are defined
300. operly terminated in the logic analyer If you send the query but fail to send an ENTER statement the logic analyzer will display the error message Query Interrupted when it receives the next command from the controller and the query response is lost OO IO a QUERY EXAMPLE d d ckekckckek OR ek koe ke ke ek for the 1660 series Logic Analyzers pokckckckckckck kckckck ck kckck ck kc k k kk k OPTIONAL KERR KKK KK KEK KK KK ckckckck ck ckckck kk KE The following two lines turn the headers and longform on so that the query name in its long form is included in the query response okckckckckckck k ck ck k kk NOTE kk ek k kx kx ckck kc k ko ko kk If your query response includes real or integer numbers that you may want to do statistics or math on later you should turn both header and longform off so only the number is returned kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkx k OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM ON I l RRR 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RK KEK KEK KEK KK KEK KK KK KK KK KEK KK KK KK KEK KEK KEK KK KEK KEK KK KEK KEK EK Select the slot in which the logic analyzer is located Always a 1 for the 1660 series logic analyzers OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 l RRR 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 KEK Dimension a string in which the query response will be entered I DIM Query
301. or not stored for the specified machine Both a state that causes the sequencer to proceed or a state that causes the sequencer to branch is considered a sequence level change A branch can also jump to itself and this also considered a sequence level change The state causing the branch is defined by the BRANch command OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TAKENBRANCH STORE MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAKenbranch The TAKenbranch query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TAKENBRANCH 16 19 Command lt N gt lt timer_num gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt timer_num gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TCONtrol TCONtrol MACHine 1 2 STRigger TCONtrol lt N gt timer num OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue The TCONtrol timer control command allows you to turn off start pause or continue the timer for the specified level The time value of the timer is defined by the TIMER command There are two timers and they are independently available for either machine Neither timer can be assigned to both machines simultaneously An integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 112 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 PAUSE MACHine 1 2 STRigger TCONTROL lt N gt timer num The TCONtrol query returns the current TCONtrol setting of the s
302. or that machine the extra ones will be ignored However an error is reported anytime when more than 13 pod specifications are listed The polarity can be specified at any point after the label name Because pods contain 16 channels the format value for a pod must be between 0 and 65535 216 D When giving the pod assignment in binary base 2 each bit will correspond to a single channel A 1 in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is assigned to that pod and bit A Q in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is excluded from the label For example assigning B1111001100 is equivalent to entering from the front panel A label can not have a total of more than 32 channels assigned to it String of up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt polarity gt lt clock_bits gt upper bits lower bits Examples Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem LABel POSitive NEGative Format integer from 0 to 63 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order Format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order Format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT LABEL STAT POSITIVE 0 127 40312 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT LABEL SIG 1 B11 B0000000011111111 B0000000000000000 MACHine 1 2 SFORmat LABel lt
303. orm TWAVeform COMPare SLISt TLISt TRIGger DISPlay COMPare MMEMory ACQuire WAVeforml CHANNel COMPare SLISt SYSTem TLISt WAVeform SWAVeform TWAVeform WLISt TIMebase TRIGger INTermodule ROOT MMEMory Command DSP ECL EOI ERRor FALLtime FIND FORMat FREQuency GLEDge HAXis HEADer HTIMe MOPQual MQUal MSI NAME MACHine OCONdition OPATtern OSEarch OSTate OTAG SLISt TLISt OTIMe OVERIay PACK MMEMory PATTern PRINt PURGe RANGe REMove WLISt REName REName RESource RMODe RTC Subsystem SYSTem CHANnel Mainframe SYSTem MEASure COMPare STRigger TTRigger WAVeform MEASure TTRigger SCHart SYSTem INTermodule SFORmat SFORmat MMEMory TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt WLISt TWAVeform WLISt SLISt SYMBol SYSTem MMEMory COMPare STRigger SWAVeform SYMBol TTRigger TWAVeform WLISt SFORmat SLISt SWAVeform SYMBol TFORmat TLISt TWAVeform MACHine MMEMory MACHine Mainframe Mainframe Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Table 4 2 continued Alphabetic Command Cross Reference continued Command Subsystem INITialize MMEMory INPort INTermodule INSert INTermodule SWAVeform TWAVeform WLISt DISPlay LABel SFORmat TFORmat DISPlay LER Mainframe LEVel TRIGger LEVelarm MACHine LINE COMPare SLISt TLISt WLISt LOAD MMEMory LOCKout Mainframe LOGic TRIG
304. ound Duplicate file name Media protected Internal Errors 300 301 302 303 310 311 312 313 320 Device Failure generic hardware error Interrupt fault System Error Time out RAM error RAM failure hardware error RAM data loss software error Calibration data loss ROM error Error Messages Query Errors 321 ROM checksum 322 Hardware and Firmware incompatible 330 Power on test failed 340 Self Test failed 350 Too Many Errors Error queue overflow Query Errors 400 Query Error generic 410 Query INTERRUPTED 420 Query UNTERMINATED 421 Query received Indefinite block response in progress 422 Addressed to Talk Nothing to Say 430 Query DEADLOCKED 7 5 7 6 Part 2 Mainframe Commands Common Commands Introduction The common commands are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard These commands must be supported by all instruments that comply with this standard Refer to figure 8 1 and table 8 1 for the common commands syntax diagram The common commands control some of the basic instrument functions such as instrument identification and reset how status is read and cleared and how commands and queries are received and processed by the instrument The common commands are e CLS e ESE e ESR e IDN e ST e OPC e OPT e PRE e RST e SRE e STB e TRG e TST e WAI Common commands can be received and processed by the 1
305. output BNC ARMOUT Refer to figure 12 1 and table 12 1 for the INTermodule Subsystem commands syntax diagram The INTermodule commands are DELete HTIMe INPort INSert SKEW TREE TTIMe Figure 12 1 INTermodule Subsystem INTermodu le e EL ete space ALL module I HTIMe sees HETO 9 INPort gt spate module module CO sis Y 4 Intermodule Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram 12 3 INTermodule Subsystem Figure 12 1 index 94 space setting 3Jd SKEW index e gt TREE space module 5 module C module gt cc al module 3 modu le M TREE gt Ne TTIMe d 16500 xX06 Intermodule Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram Continued 12 4 Table 12 Selector 1 Example Command lt module gt Example INTermodule Subsystem INTermodule INTermodule Parameter Values Parameter Value module An integer 1 to 10 3 through 10 unused index An integer 1 to 10 3 through 10 unused setting A numeric 1 0 to 1 0 in seconds INTermodule INTermodule The INTermodule selector specifies INTermodule as the subsystem the com
306. output buffer the output buffer must be read before the next program message is sent Sending another command before reading the result of the query will cause the output buffer to be cleared and the current response to be lost This will also generate a QUERY UNTERMINATED error in the error queue For example when you send the query THAVEFORM RANGE you must follow that with an input statement In Basic this is usually done with an ENTER statement In Basic the input statement ENTER XXX Range passes the value across the bus to the controller and places it in the variable Range Additional details on how to use queries is in the next section of this chapter Receiving Information for the Instrument Example Introduction to Programming Program Header Options Program Header Options Program headers can be sent using any combination of uppercase or lowercase ASCII characters Logic analyzer responses however are always returned in uppercase Both program command and query headers may be sent in either long form complete spelling short form abbreviated spelling or any combination of long form and short form Programs written in long form are easily read and are almost self documenting The short form syntax conserves the amount of controller memory needed for program storage and reduces the amount of I O activity The rules for short form syntax are discussed in chapter 4 Programming and Documentation
307. over Street Palo Alto CA 94304 U S A Rights for non DOD U S Government Departments and Agencies are set forth in FAR 52 221 19 c 1 2 Document Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Safety This apparatus has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 348 Safety Requirements for Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition This is a Safety Class I instrument provided with terminal for protective earthing Before applying power verify that the correct safety precautions are taken see the following warnings In addition note the external markings on the instrument that are described under Safety Symbols Warning Before turning on the instrument you must connect the protective earth terminal of the instrument to the protective conductor of the mains power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact You must not negate the protective action by using an extension cord power cable without a protective c
308. pecified level MACHine 1 2 STRigger TCONTROL lt N gt timer num OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue NL An integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 112 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TCONTROL 6 1 16 20 Command lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TERM TERM MACHine 1 2 STRigger TERM term id label name pattern The TERM command allows you to specify a pattern recognizer term in the specified machine Each command deals with only one label in the given term therefore a complete specification could require several commands Since a label can contain 32 or less bits the range of the pattern value will be between 2 1 and 0 When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term Because the pattern parameter may contain don t cares and be represented in several bases it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number All 10 terms A through J are available for either machine but not both simultaneously If you send the TERM command to a machine with a term that has not been assigned to that machine an error message Legal command but settings conflict is returned A B C D E F G H I Jg A string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters 4 B 0 1 X i 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
309. plex Qualifier on page 16 11 The following parameters show how qualifiers are specified in all commands of the STRigger subsystem that use qualifier ANYSTATE NOSTATE lt expression gt expressionla expressionlb expressionla OR expressionlb expressionla AND lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla_term gt lt expressionla_term gt OR expressionla term lt expressionla_term gt AND expressionla term lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expression2d gt lt expressionlb term gt lt expressionlb_term gt OR expressionlb term expressionib term gt AND expressionlb term gt lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt expression2h gt lt term3a gt lt term3c gt lt term3d gt lt term3e gt lt term3f gt lt term3h gt lt term3i gt term3j AND NAND A NOTA lt term3b gt lt range3a gt lt timer3a gt lt term3g gt lt range3b gt lt timer3b gt OR NOR XOR term3a boolean op lt term3b gt term3c boolean op lt range3a gt lt term3e gt lt boolean_op gt lt timer3a gt lt term3f gt boolean op lt term3g gt lt term3h gt lt boolean_op gt lt range3b gt lt term3e gt lt boolean_op gt lt timer3b gt NXOR 16 7 lt term3b gt lt term3c gt lt term
310. pods 5 and 6 Byte x 16 through x 23 64 bits starting with the MSB Second sample tag for pods 5 and 6 Byte y through y 7 64 bits starting with the MSB Last sample tag for pods 5 and 6 Byte y 8 through y 15 64 bits starting with the MSB First sample tag for pods 7 and 8 Byte y 16 through y 23 64 bits starting with the MSB Second sample tag for pods 7 and 8 Byte z through z 7 64 bits starting with the MSB Last sample tag for pods 7 and 8 26 13 Byte Position 37041 37059 x DATA and SETup Commands Glitch Data Description Glitch Data Description In the glitch mode each pod has two bytes assigned to indicate where glitches occur in the acquired data For each row of acquired data there will be a corresponding row of glitch data The glitch data is organized in the same way as the acquired data The glitch data is grouped in 18 byte rows for the 1660A The number of rows is stored in byte positions 101 through 126 The starting byte of the glitch data is an absolute starting point regardless of the number of rows of acquired data A binary 1 in the glitch data indicates a glitch was detected For example if a glitch occurred on bit 1 of pod 8 in data row 1 of an 1660A bytes 37043 and 37044 would contain Byte 37043 Byte 37044 eir el 0000 0000 0000 0010 Bit 15 Bit 1 clock Pod 8 Pod 7 pod 6 pod 5 pod p pod 3 pod2 pod n lines 2byt
311. ption sets all resource term names to the default names assigned when turning on the instrument state terms for state analyzer or lt state_terms gt GLEDge 1 2 for timing analyzer A string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 RENAME A DATA MACHine 1 2 RENAME res id The REName query returns the current names for specified terms assigned to the specified analyzer MACHine 1 2 RENAME res id new text NL state terms for state analyzer or lt state_terms gt GLEDge 1 2 for timing analyzer A string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 RENAME D 18 8 Command res terms Example Query Returned Format res terms Example MACHine Subsystem RESource RESource MACHine 1 2 RESource res terms The RESource command allows you to assign resource terms A through J Range 1 and Z and Timer 1 and 2 to a particular analyzer machine 1 or 2 In the timing analyzer only two additional resource terms are available These terms are GLEDge Glitch Edge 1 and 2 These terms will always be assigned to the the machine that is configured as the timing analyzer A B C D E F G H 1I d TIMer1 TIMer2 RANGe1 RANGe2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 RESOURCE A C RANGE1 MACHine 1 2 RESOURCE The RESource query returns the current resource terms assigned to the specified analyzer MACHine 1 2
312. query 17 22 17 23 24 22 XTIMe 31 19 31 20 voltage marker A 31 6 voltage marker B 31 7 voltage marker mode 31 15 voltage measurement 32 11 voltage measurements 31 2 VOTime 31 16 VPP 32 13 XTIMe command query 14 11 14 12 VPP 32 13 23 25 VRUNSs 31 16 XTIMe 31 20 VRUNSs query 17 18 23 21 24 17 XVOLt 31 17 VRUNSs 31 16 XXX 4 5 4 7 VTOP 32 13 XXX meaning of 1 6 VTOP 32 13 VXTime 31 17 VXTime 31 17 Y YINCrement 35 17 YINCrement 35 177 YORigin 35 17 YORigin 35 17 YREFerence 35 18 YREFerence 35 18 Ww waveform source 35 12 WAVeform Subsystem 35 2 White space 1 7 WIDTh command 25 8 WLISt selector 14 4 WLISt Subsystem 14 1 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 14 12 word data structure 35 5 WORD format 35 5 word transfer 35 4 X X marker placement 31 18 X marker position 31 19 X marker voltage level 31 17 XAUTo 31 18 XAUTo 31 18 Index 9 Index 10 Copyright Agilent Technologies 1992 2000 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph C 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause in DFARS 252 227 7013 Agilent Technologies 3000 Han
313. query because it only transfers the configuration and not the acquired data The SYSTem SETup command differs from the SYSTem DATA command because it only transfers the configuration and not acquired data poockckckckckckckckck ck ck k k kk kk SETUP COMMAND AND QUERY EXAMPLE k kkkkkkkkkkkkt k for the 1660 series logic analyzers poockckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckok CREATE TRANSFER BUFFER xxkkkk kk kk ko k ko k ko k kk X Create a buffer large enough for the block data See page 26 9 for maximum block length ASSIGN GBuff TO BUFFER 170000 pokckk kk kk kkkkkkkk INITIALIZE GPIB DEFAULT ADDRESS f kkkk kk kk kk ckckckck ck kk REAL Address Address 707 ASSIGN Comm TO Address CLEAR SCREEN NTITIALIZE VARIABLE FOR NUMBER OF BYTES k kk kk KK KKK The variable Numbytes contains the number of bytes in the buffer REAL Numbytes Numbytes 0 xxx kk kk k k RE INITIALIZE TRANSFER BUFFER POINTERS kk RK kk ke ke KK KKK CONTROL Buff 3 1 CONTROL Buff 4 0 kk kk ek dk KK SEND THE SETUP QUERY d k ak kk ek kdk k dkk kk kk kk kk k k 36 14 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 Programming Examples Transferring the logic analyzer configuration OUTPUT 7
314. quire subsystem for the description of these commands When a count number in the average acquisition type has been specified the oscilloscope and all grouped modules will acquire data until these conditions have been satisfied When both the RUNtil and the ACQuire COUNt have been satisfied the acquisition will stop For a faster data transfer rate over the interface bus display a menu that has no waveforms on screen The DIGitize command is an overlap command thus ensure that all data has been acquired and stored in the channel buffers before executing any other commands The MESE command and the MESR query may be used to check for run complete or a WAlt instruction may be inserted after the DIGitize command to ensure enough time for command execution OUTPUT XXX DIGITIZE An example using the DIGitize command can be found in Chapter 36 Programming Examples 27 6 28 ACQuire Subsystem Introduction The Acquire Subsystem commands are used to set up acquisition conditions for the DIGitize command The subsystem contains commands to select the type of acquisition and the number of averages to be taken if the average type is chosen Refer to Figure 28 1 for the ACQuire Subsystem Syntax Diagram The ACQuire Subsystem commands are e COUNt e TYPE 28 2 ACQuire Subsystem Figure 28 1 D m Gacauire m9 B e cout space count
315. r There are three formats for transferring waveform data over the remote interface These formats are WORD BYTE or ASCII WORD and BYTE formatted waveform records are transmitted using the arbitrary block program data format specified in IEEE 488 2 When you use this format the ASCII character string 8 lt DD D gt is sent before the actual data The D s are eight ASCII numbers which indicate how many data bytes will follow For example if 8192 points of data are to be transmitted the ASCII string 800008192 would be sent BYTE Format In BYTE format the seven least significant bits represent the waveform data This means that the possible range of data is divided into 128 vertical increments The most significant bit is not used If all 1 s are returned in the seven least significant bits the waveform is clipped at the top of the screen If all 0 s are returned the waveform is clipped at the bottom of the screen see figure 35 1 NORMAL AND AVERAGE ACQUISITION TYPE 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 MSB NOT USED ow DATA 16532815 Byte Data Structure The data returned in BYTE format is the same for either Normal or Average acquisition types The data transfer rate in this format is faster than the other two formats 35 4 WAVeform Subsystem Format for Data Transfer WORD Format Word data is two bytes wide with the most significant byte of each word being transmitted
316. r Value delay arg delay time in seconds from 2500 seconds through 2500 seconds The full range is available for panning the waveform when acquisition is stopped Refer to the User s Reference Manual for a list of the available Delay Pre trigger and Delay Post trigger ranges while running and making acquisitions range arg a real number from 1 ns through 5 s 33 9 Command BE MN Example Query Returned Format Example TIMebase Subsystem DELay DELay TIMebase DELay delay time gt The DELay command sets the time between the trigger and the center of the screen delay time in seconds from 2500 seconds through 2500 seconds The full range is available for panning the waveform when acquisition is stopped Refer to the Oscilloscopes User s Reference manual for a list of the available Delay Pre trigger and Delay Post trigger ranges while running and making acquisitions OUTPUT XXX TIM DEL 2US TIMebase DELay The DELay query returns the current delay setting TIMebase DELay lt delay_time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TIM DEL 33 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example TIMebase Subsystem MODE MODE TIMebase MODE TRIGgered AUTO The MODE command sets the oscilloscope timebase to either Auto or Triggered mode When the AUTO mode is chosen the oscilloscope waits approximately 50 ms for a trigger to occur If a trigger is not
317. r for the state currently in the box at center screen MACHine 1 2 WLISt LINE line num mid screen NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST LINE 14 7 Query Returned Format state num Example Command time value Example WLISt Subsystem OSTate OSTate WLISt OSTate The OSTate query returns the state where the O Marker is positioned If data is not valid the query returns 32767 WLISt OSTate state num NL An integer from 8191 to 8191 OUTPUT XXX WLIST OSTATE OTIMe WLISt OTIMe time value The OTIMe command positions the O Marker on the timing waveforms in the mixed mode display If the data is not valid the command performs no action A real number OUTPUT XXX WLIST OTIME 40 0E 6 14 8 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example WLISt Subsystem RANGe WLISt OTIMe The OTIMe query returns the O Marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 WLISt OTIMe time value NL A real number OUTPUT XXX WLIST OTIME RANGe MACHine 1 2 WLISt RANGe time value The RANGe command specifies the full screen time in the timing waveform menu It is equivalent to ten times the seconds per division setting on the display The allowable values for RANGe are from 1
318. r from 1990 through 2089 An integer from 0 through 23 An integer from 0 through 59 An integer from 0 through 59 An integer from 1 to 7 An integer from 0 to 100 An integer from 0 to 100 An integer from 0 to 100 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Mainframe Commands BEEPer BEEPer BEEPer ON 1 OFF 0 The BEEPer command sets the beeper mode which turns the beeper sound of the instrument on and off When BEEPer is sent with no argument the beeper will be sounded without affecting the current mode OUTPUT XXX BEEPER OUTPUT XXX BEEP ON BEEPer The BEEPer query returns the mode currently selected BEEPer 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX BEEPER 9 6 Mainframe Commands CAPability CAPability Query CAPability The CAPability query returns the HP SL HP System Language and lower level capability sets implemented in the device Table 9 2 lists the capability sets implemented in the 1660 series logic analyzers Returned Format CAPability IEEE488 1987 SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PP1 DC1 DT1 C0 E2 lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX CAPABILITY Table 9 2 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Capability Sets Mnemonic Capability Name Implementation SH Source Handshake SH1 AH Acceptor Handshake AH1 T Talker or TE Extended Talker T5 Listener or LE Extended Listener L4 SR Service Request SR1 RL Remote Local RL1 PP Parallel Poll PP1 DC
319. r if Normal acquisition mode is specified 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 OUTPUT XXX ACQUIRE COUNT 16 ACQuire COUNt The COUNt query returns the last specified count ACQuire COUNt lt count gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ACQ COUN TYPE ACQuire TYPE NORMal AVERage The TYPE command selects the type of acquisition that is to take place when a DIGitize or STARt command is executed One of two acquisition types may be chosen the NORMal or AVERage mode OUTPUT XXX ACQUIRE TYPE NORMAL 28 4 Query Returned Format Example ACQuire TYPE ACQuire Subsystem TYPE The TYPE query returns the last specified type ACQuire TYPE NORMal AVERage lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ACQUIRE TYPI my E 28 5 28 6 29 CHANnel Subsystem Introduction The Channel Subsystem commands control the channel display and the vertical axis of the oscilloscope Each channel must be programmed independently for all offset range and probe functions When ECL or TTL commands are executed the vertical range offset and trigger levels are automatically set for optimum viewing Refer to figure 29 1 for the CHANnel Subsystem Syntax Diagram The CHANnel Subsystem commands are e COUPIing e ECL e OFFSet e PROBe e RANGe e TTL 29 2 Figure29 1 CHANnel Subsystem cHanne J channel number NL amp fe I gt NA
320. r limit of 50 and an upper limit of 58 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER RANGE1 SCOUNT 50 58 xkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk CONFIGURE SEQUENCE LEVEL 1 XXXkokck ck kd kk kok kk kk ek ek eek Store NOSTATE in level 1 and Then find resource term OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE1 NOSTATE OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND1 DR 1 A Once ox ek kde ke ex CONFIGURE SEQUENCE LEVEL 2 x xkkkd kd k ck kk kk kk k k k k k Store RANGE1 in level 2 and Then find resource term OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE2 IN RANGE1 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND2 E 1 E once xkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk CONFIGURE SEQUENCE LEVEL 3 xXx FO kk kk kk kk ek ek k k k p Store NOSTATE in level 3 and Then find term OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE3 NOSTATE OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND3 B 1 once kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk CONFIGURE SEQUENCE LEVEL 4 xxxxxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Store a combination of resource terms Then Trigger on resource term E I C or D or RANGE1 in level 4 and 36 6 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 Programming Examples Making a State analyzer measurement OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STOREA C OR D OR IN RANGE1 pook
321. r specified for the slave clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SOPQual clock pair id gt lt qual_operation gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHiNE2 SFORMAT SOPQUAL 1 15 16 Command lt qual_num gt lt clock_id gt qual level Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem SQUal SQUal MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SQUal qual num clock id qual level The SQUal slave qualifier command allows you to specify the level qualifier for the slave clock 112 3 4 1 through 4 for HP 1660A HP 1661A HP 1662A or 1 or 2 for HP 1663A J K L M N P OFF LOW HIGH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SQUAL 1 J LOW MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SQUal qual num The SQUal query returns the qualifier specified for the slave clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SQUal clock id qual level NL OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SQUAL 1 15 17 Command lt N gt lt value gt TTL ECL Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem THReshold THReshold MACHine 1 2 SFORmat THReshold lt N gt TTL ECL lt value gt The THReshold command allows you to set the voltage threshold for a given pod to ECL TTL or a specific voltage from 6 00 V to 6 00 V in 0 05 volt increments 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 through 8 for the HP 1660A 1 through 6 for the HP 1661A 1 through 4 for the HP 1662A and 1 through 2 for the HP 1663A
322. ranch has been reached Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Command Types As shown in chapter 1 Header Types there are three types of headers Each header has a corresponding command type This section shows how they relate to the command tree System Commands The system commands reside at the top level of the command tree These commands are always parsable ifthey occur at the beginning of a program message or are preceded by a colon START and STOP are examples of system commands Subsystem Commands Subsystem commands are grouped together under a common node of the tree such as the MMEMORY commands Common Commands Common commands are independent of the tree and do not affect the position of the parser within the tree CLS and RST are examples of common commands Tree Traversal Rules Command headers are created by traversing down the command tree For each group of keywords not separated by a branch one keyword must be selected As shown on the tree branches are always preceded by colons Do not add spaces around the colons The following two rules apply to traversing the tree A leading colon the first character of a header or a terminator places the parser at the root of the command tree Executing a subsystem command places you in that subsystem until a leading colon or a terminator is found The parser will stay at the colon above the keyword where the last header term
323. range values Ie TAKenbr anch J space au NOSTore rm TAKenbranch gt TPOS i t ion space STAR gt END Ve Posrstore 9 gt J percent 01660583 TPOSi tion SWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram 18 3 Table 18 1 Selector Example SWAVeform Subsystem SWAVeform SWAVeform Parameter Values Parameter Value number of samples integer from 8191 to 8191 label name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters bit id OVERlay lt bit_num gt ALL bit_num integer representing a label bit from 0 to 31 range_values integer from 10 to 5000 representing 10 x states Division mark_type x o xo TRIGger percent integer from 0 to 100 SWAVeform MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform The SWAVeform State Waveform selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings in the State Waveform menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM RANGE 40 18 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example SWAVeform Subsystem ACCumulate ACCumulate MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACCumulate ON 1 torr 0jj The ACCumulate command allows you to control whether the waveform display gets erased between
324. re 35 4 BYTE format 35 4 byte transfer 35 4 C Cable RS 232C 3 3 CAPability command 9 7 CARDcage 9 8 CA Talog command 11 9 CENTer 31 8 CENTer command 18 6 23 8 center screen voltage 29 6 CESE command 9 9 CESR command 9 10 channel display 29 2 CHANnel Subsystem 29 2 channel_number 29 4 30 4 31 5 32 4 34 4 35 8 chart display 19 2 CLEar command 16 12 20 5 22 12 Clear To Send CTS 3 5 clearing the display 30 9 CLOCk command query 15 6 CLRPattern command 17 8 18 6 23 9 24 8 CLRStat command 18 7 23 9 CMASK command query 20 5 CME 6 5 COLumn command query 17 7 24 7 Combining commands 1 9 Comma 1 12 Command 1 6 1 16 CLS 8 5 ESE 8 6 OPC 8 11 PRE 8 13 RST 8 14 SRE 8 15 TRG 8 17 WAT 8 19 ACCumulate 18 5 19 4 23 7 30 4 30 7 ACQMode 21 5 ACQuisition 16 9 22 9 ARM 13 5 ASSign 13 5 AUToload 11 8 BASE 25 5 BEEPer 9 6 BRANch 16 10 22 9 CENTer 18 6 23 8 CESE 9 9 CLEar 20 5 CLOCK 15 6 CLRPattern 17 8 18 6 23 9 24 8 CLRStat 18 7 23 9 CMASk 20 5 COLumn 17 7 24 7 COMPare 20 4 CONDition 34 5 CONNect 30 5 COPY 11 10 20 6 COUNt 28 4 DATA 10 5 20 7 26 4 DELay 14 5 18 7 23 9 33 4 34 7 DELete 12 5 DOWNload 11 11 Index 1 Index DSP 10 6 EOI 9 11 FIND 16 13 22 13 FORMat 35 10 GLEDge 22 14 HAXis 19 5 HEADer 1 16 10 8 NITialize 11 13 NPort 12 6 NSert 12 7 14 6 18 8 23 10 30 5 LAB
325. re for the modules in slot A through E for an 16500A logic analysis mainframe However the 1660 series logic analyzers have only two slots A and B therefore only the first and second parameters of the last five parameters will be relevant A zero in any of the last eight parameters indicates that the corresponding software is not currently installed The name returned for software options and module software is the same name that appears in the field in the upper left corner of the menu for each option or module SYSTEM lt option gt 0 lt option gt 0 INTERMODULE 0 lt module gt 0 lt module gt 0 lt module gt 0 lt module gt 0 lt module gt 0 lt NL gt Name of software option Name of module software OUTPUT XXX OPT Command lt pre_mask gt Example Query Returned format lt mask gt Example Common Commands PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable PRE lt mask gt The PRE command sets the parallel poll register enable bits The Parallel Poll Enable Register contains a mask value that is ANDed with the bits in the Status Bit Register to enable an ist during a parallel poll Refer to table 8 4 for the bits in the Parallel Poll Enable Register and for what they mask An integer from 0 to 65535 This example will allow the 1660 series logic analyzers to generate an ist when a message is available in the ou
326. re information on the LOAD command This program demonstrates the basic command structure used to program the 1660 series logic analyzers Initialize instrument interface SYSTEM HEADER ON Turn headers on SYSTEM LONGFORM ON Turn longform on MMEM LOAD CONFIG TEST E Load configuration file MENU FORMAT 1 Select Format menu for machine 1 RMODE SINGLE Select run mode START Run the measurement Figure 1 1 Introduction to Programming Instruction Syntax Instruction Syntax To program the logic analyzer remotely you must have an understanding of the command format and structure The IEEE 488 2 standard governs syntax rules pertaining to how individual elements such as headers separators parameters and terminators may be grouped together to form complete instructions Syntax definitions are also given to show how query responses will be formatted Figure 1 1 shows the three main syntactical parts of a typical program statement Output Command Device Address and Instruction The instruction is further broken down into three parts Instruction header White space and Instruction parameters INSTRUCTION 1 d OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM MENU DISPLAY 2 OUTPUT COMMAND DEVICE ADDRESS INSTRUCTION HEADER WHITE SPACE INSTRUCTION PARAMETERS 21650838 Program Message Syntax Output Command The output command depends on the language you choose to use Throughout this guide
327. rentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed See figure 12 2 on page 12 11 for a detailed example integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 10 GT LT lt duration_time gt OCCurrence lt occurrence gt greater than less than real number from 8 ns to 5 00 seconds depending on sample period integer from 1 to 1048575 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 22 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER FIND1 ANYSTATE GT 10E 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER FIND3 NOTA AND NOTB OR G OCCURRENCE 10 22 13 Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt lt label_name gt lt glitch_edge_ spec gt TTRigger TTRace Subsystem GLEDge MACHine 1 2 TTRigger FIND4 The FIND query returns the current time qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHine 1 2 TTRigger FIND lt N gt lt condition mode gt lt occurrence gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER FIND lt N gt GLEDge MACHine 1 2 TTRigger GLEDge lt N gt label name glitch edge spec The GLEDge glitch edge command allows you to define edge and glitch specifications for a given label Edge specifications can be R rising F falling E either or don t care Glitch specifications consist of G glitch or don t care Edges and glitches are sent in the same string with the right most string character sp
328. resents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term Since the pattern parameter may contain don t cares and be represented in several bases it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number All 10 terms A through J are available to either machine but not both simultaneously If you send the TERM command to a machine with a term that has not been assigned to that machine an error message Legal command but settings conflict is returned A B C D E F G H I J string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters Bfo 1 x 0 0 1 2 3 2 5 6 7 x H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F x 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TERM A DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TERM B ABC HHBXXXX1101 22 20 Query Returned Format Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TIMER MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TERM term id gt lt label_name gt The TERM query returns the specification of the term specified by term identification and label name MACHine 1 2 STRAce TERM lt term_id gt lt label name gt lt pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TERM B DATA TIMER MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TIMER 1 2 time value The TIMER command sets the time value for the specified timer The limits of the timer are 400 ns to 500 seconds in 16 ns to 50
329. ries do not use any parameters Instruction Header The instruction header is one or more keywords separated by colons The command tree in figure 4 1 illustrates how all the keywords can be joined together to form a complete header see chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions The example in figure 1 1 shows a command Queries are indicated by adding a question mark to the end of the header Many instructions can be used as either commands or queries depending on whether or not you have included the question mark The command and query forms of an instruction usually have different parameters 1 6 Introduction to Programming Instruction Terminator When you look up a query in this programmer s reference you ll find a paragraph labeled Returned Format under the one labeled Query The syntax definition by Returned format will always show the instruction header in square brackets like SYSTem MENU which means the text between the brackets is optional It is also a quick way to see what the header looks like White Space White space is used to separate the instruction header from the instruction parameters If the instruction does not use any parameters white space does not need to be included White space is defined as one or more spaces ASCII defines a space to be a character represented by a byte that has a decimal value of 32 Tabs can be used only if your controller first converts them to sp
330. rmat lt time_value gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem TAVerage TAVerage MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the value of the average time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TAVerage time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM TAVERAGE TMAXimum MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMAXimum time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM TMAXIMUM 23 19 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Command lt time_val gt lt percent gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem TMIN imum TMINimum MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMINimum time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TWAVEFORM TMINIMUM TPOSition MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay time val POSTstore lt percent gt The TPOSition command allows you to control where the trigger point is placed The trigger point can be placed at the start center end at a percentage of po
331. rogramming and Documentation Conventions Command Set Organization Alphabetic Command Cross Reference continued Command VMAX VMIN VMODe VOLume VOTime VPP VRUNs VTOP VXTime WIDTh XAUTo XCONdition XINCrement XORigin X0Tag X0Time XPATtern XREFerence XSEarch Subsystem Command Subsystem MEASure MEASure MARKer XSTate SLISt TLISt WLISt XTAG SLISt TLISt XTIMe TWAVeform WLISt MARKer MMEMory YINCrement WAVeform MARKer MEASure YORigin WAVeform YREFerence WAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform MARKer MEASure MARKer SYMBol MARKer TLISt TWAVeform WAVeform WAVeform SLISt TLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt MARKer SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform Command Set Organization The command set for the 1660 series logic analyzers is divided into 28 separate groups common commands mainframe commands system commands and 23 sets of subsystem commands Each of the 28 groups of commands is described in a seperate chapter in Parts 2 through 4 Commands Each of the chapters contain a brief description of the subsystem a set of syntax diagrams for those commands and finally the commands for that subsystem in alphabetical order The commands are shown in the long form and short form using upper and lowercase letters As an example AUToload indicates that the long form of the command is AUTOLOAD and the short form of the command is AUT Each of the commands contain
332. s Making a State analyzer measurement 1210 kXkkXkkkkkkxkkkkkkxk k k k k VIEW THE RESULTS k k kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk 1220 Display the State Listing and select a line number in the listing that 1230 allows you to see the beginning of the listing on the logic analyer 1240 display 1250 1260 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SLIST COLUMN 1 SCOUNT DECIMAL 1270 OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 7 1280 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SLIST LINE 16 1290 1300 END 36 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 Programming Examples Making a State Compare measurement Making a State Compare measurement This program example acquires a state listing copies the listing to the compare listing acquires another state listing and compares both listings to find differences This program is written in such a way you can run it with the E2433 60004 Logic Analyzer Training Board This example is the same as the State Compare example in chapter 3 of the E2455 90910 Logic Analyzer Training Guide o kx kx STATE COMPARE EXAMPLE kk KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KK kk kk kk k for the 1660 Series Logic Analyzers pkckckckckckckckckckckckck ok SELECT THE LOGIC ANALYZER kkkk kc k kk k ck kc k kk kkk Select the module slot in which the logic analyzer is installed Always a 1 for the 1660A series logic
333. s an overlapped command An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress OUTPUT XXX STOP 10 SYSTem Subsystem Introduction SYSTem subsystem commands control functions that are common to the entire 1660 Series logic analysis system including formatting query responses and enabling reading and writing to the advisory line of the instrument The command parser in the 1660 series logic analyzer is designed to accept programs written for the 16500A logic analysis system with a 16550A logic analyzer module and a 16532A oscilloscope module Refer to figure 10 1 and table 10 1 for the System Subsystem commands syntax diagram The SYSTem Subsystem commands are e DATA e DSP e ERRor e HEADer e LONGform e PRINt e SETup 10 2 SYSTem Subsystem gt sysTem gt y Data space gt block_data gt DATA gt DSP gt space string space space HEADer space e OFF O gt Ont I HEADer gt jo 4 Fe LONGiorm gt space eorr e LoNGtorm gt gt PRINI A gt space ScReen gt DISK gt pathname gt gt BTF gt gt CF gt gt PCX gt etes gt O C pathname gt CD O O
334. s the current voltage and channel selection for the B marker MARKer BVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER BVOLT CENTer MARKer CENTer TRIGger X O The CENTer command allows you to position the indicated marker TRIGger X or O at the center of the waveform area on the scope display The CENTer command adjusts the timebase delay to cause the trace to be centered around the indicated marker S DIV remains unchanged OUTPUT XXX MARKER CENTER X MSTats MARKer MSTats on orr o The MSTats command allows you to turn statistics ON or OFF in the auto marker mode When statistics is turned on Min X O Max X O and Mean X O times are displayed on screen When off X O Trig X and Trig O times will be displayed on screen OUTPUT XXX MARKER MSTATS ON 31 8 Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt Example MARKer Subsystem OAUTo MARKer MSTats The MSTats query returns the current setting MARKer MSTats 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER MSTATS OAUTo MARKer OAUTo MANual CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt The OAUTo command specifies the automatic placement specification for the O marker The first parameter specifies if automarker placement is to be in the manual mode or on a specified channel I
335. scope will trigger on the first transition that makes the pattern specification true for every input the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELay command When EXIT is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELay command When RANge is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELAY command The first event in the sequence will occur when the specified pattern is true for a time greater than that indicated by the first duration term and less than that indicated by the second duration term All other pattern true occurrences in the event count are independent of the pattern duration range time When GT greater than is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELAY command The first event in the sequence will occur when the specified pattern is true for a time greater than that indicated by the trigger specification All other pattern true occurrences in the event count are independent of the pattern duration time 34 5
336. special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office Certification Agilent Technologies certifies hat this product met its published specifications at he time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are raceable to the United States ational Institute of Standards and Technology to he extent allowed by the nstitute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other nternational Standards Organization members About this edition This is the second edition of he 1660A AS Series Logic Analyzer Programmer s Guide Publication number 01660 97033 Printed in USA Edition dates are as follows First edition October 1994 Second edition January 2000 ew editions are complete revisions of the manual Many product updates do not require manual changes and manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes Therefore do not expect a one to one correspondence between product updates and manual updates
337. st store or at a value specified by delay The post store option is the same as the User Defined option when setting the trigger point from the front panel The TPOSition command is only available when the acquisition mode is set to manual real number from 0 to 500 seconds integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM TPOSITION CENTER 23 20 Query Returned Format lt time_val gt Example Query Returned Format valid runs total runs Example TWAVeform Subsystem VRUNs MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger setting MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay lt time_val gt POSTstore lt percent gt lt NL gt real number from 0 to 500 seconds OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM TPOSition VRUNs MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform VRUNS The VRUNSs query returns the number of valid runs and total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform VRUNs valid runs total runs NL Zero or positive integer zero or positive integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TWAVEFORM VRUNS 23 21 Command Example Query Returned Format Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem XCONdition XCONdition
338. stote low volue FE DT state high volue label_name label low volue E nn label_high_value a Vaxis Je space label_nome I low value na gt high value is VAXis 16510503 SCHart Subsystem Syntax Diagram 19 3 Table 19 1 Selector Example Command SCHart Subsystem SCHart SCHart Parameter Values Parameter Values state_low_value integer from 8191 to 8191 state_high_value integer from state low value to 48191 label name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters label low value string from 0 to 2 1 HFFFF label high value string from label low value to 27 1 HFFFF low value string from 0 to 2 1 4HFFFF high value string from low value to 2 1 HFFFF SCHart MACHine 1 2 SCHart The SCHart selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings found in the State Chart menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART VAXIS A 0 9 ACCumulate MACHine 1 2 SCHart ACCumulate ON 1 OFF 0 The ACCumulate command allows you to control whether the chart display gets erased between each individual run or whether subsequent waveforms are allowed to be displayed over
339. t H YORIgin M YREF erence WAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram Cont d 16530 SX06 WAVeform Parameter Values Parameter Value channel an integer from 1 to 2 35 8 Query Returned Format lt count gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt Example WAVeform Subsystem COUNt COUNt WAVeform COUNt The COUNt query returns the count last specified in the ACQuire Subsystem WAVeform COUNt lt count gt lt NL gt 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM COUNT DATA WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt DATA The DATA query returns the waveform record stored in a specified channel buffer The WAVeform SOURce command is used to select the specified channel The data is transferred based on the FORMAT BYTE WORD or ASCII chosen and the RECORD specified FULL or WINDOW Since WAVeform DATA is a query it cannot be used to send a waveform record back to the scope from the controller If a waveform record is saved for later reloading into the oscilloscope the SYSTem DATA command should be used WAVeform DATA 800008000 block data gt lt NL gt An integer from 1 to 2 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM DATA An example using the DATA command can be found in Chapter 36 Programming Examples 35 9 Command Example Query a Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt points gt Examp
340. t Example DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem SETup block length specifier section 8 lt length gt The total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits section header section data gt lt section data gt 16 bytes in the following format 10 bytes for the section name 1 byte reserved 1 byte for the module ID code 32 for the 1660 series logic analyzer 4 bytes for the length of section data in number of bytes that when converted to decimal specifies the number of bytes contained in the section The RTC_INFO section is described in the RTC_INFO Section Description Format depends on the section The total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data So when calculating the value for length don t forget to include the length of the section headers OUTPUT XXX SETUP block data SYStem SETup The SYStem SETup query returns a block of data that contains the current configuration to the controller SYStem SETup block data NL See Transferring the logic analyzer configuration in Chapter 36 Programming Examples for an example 26 16 lt block_length gt section name section length section data Byte Position 1 DATA and SETup Commands RTC_INFO Section Description RTC_INFO Section Description The RTC_INFO section contains the real time ofthe acquired data Be
341. t OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY ACCUMULATE 30 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command DISPlay Subsystem CONNect CONNect DISPlay CONNect on OFF o The CONNect command sets the Connect Dots mode When ON each displayed sample dot will be connected to the adjacent dot by a straight line The waveform is easier to see in this mode When OFF only the sampling points will be displayed OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY CONNECT ON DISPlay CONNect The CONNect query reports if connect is on or off DISPlay CONNect 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY CONNECT INSert The INSert command inserts waveforms into the current display Time correlated waveforms from the logic analyzer may also be added to the current display The waveforms are added just below any currently displayed signals Only two oscilloscope waveforms can be displayed at any time The first parameter is optional and specifies the module from where the waveform is to be taken The module number is the same as the slot number in which the master card is installed If a module is not specified the current module is assumed The second parameter is the label of the waveform that is to be added to the current display The label names depend on the slot in which the acquisition cards are installed To insert a waveform from the oscilloscope to the oscilloscope display DISPlay INSert lt module number gt
342. t TVoDe gt space gt off gt H TMoDe N VMODe space ON vmope gt vor ime gt space gt channel_ Runs gt I R Vx ime Ae space w channels m P XAUTO gt space gt vANua gt channel_ a type gt v ievel OO MARKer Subsystem Syntax Diagram Cont d e slope Sehens tm 31 4 MARKer Subsystem Y XAUTo Figure 31 1 xT IMe space gt marker_time XTIMe X0T ime 16532816 MARKer Subsystem Syntax Diagram Cont d Table 31 1 MARKer Parameter Values Parameter Value channel An integer from 1 to 2 marker time time in seconds from trigger marker to X or O marker It arg time in seconds that specifies the less than It RUNTil time gt arg time in seconds that specifies the greater than gt RUNTil time inrange gt time in seconds specifying the lower limit of the INRange runtime inrange It time in seconds specifying the upper limit of the INRange runtime level level in volts that specifies marker position outrange gt time in seconds specifying the lower limit of the OUTRange runtime outrange It time in seconds specifying the upper limit of the OUTRange runtime V level percentage of waveform voltage level ranging from 10 to 90 of the Vtop to Vbase voltage or a specific voltage level type ABSolute or PERCent slope positive or negative slope occurrence integer from 1 to 100 31 5 lt
343. t MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt percent gt lt NL gt percent integer from 1 to 100 Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM TPOSition 18 11 18 12 19 SCHart Subsystem Introduction The State Chart subsystem provides the commands necessary for programming the Chart display of 1660A series logic analyzers The commands allow you to build charts of label activity using data normally found in the Listing display The chart s Y axis is used to show data values for the label of your choice The X axis can be used in two different ways In one the X axis represents states shown as rows in the State Listing display In the other the X axis represents the data values for another label When states are plotted along the X axis X and O markers are available Because the State Chart display is simply an alternative way of looking at the data in the State Listing the X and O markers can be manipulated through the SLISt subsystem Because the programming commands do not force the menus to switch you can position the markers in the SLISt subsystem and see the effects in the State Chart display The commands in the SCHart subsystem are e ACCumulate e HAXis e VAXis 19 2 SCHart Subsystem Figure 19 1 C G yv SCHart ef Fe accumu ate e space EN e I ACCumu late Hari spoce L ce
344. t The first one listed will match the highest numbered pod assigned to the machine you re using Each pod specification after that is assigned to the next highest numbered pod This way they match the left to right descending order of the pods you see on the Format display Not including enough pod specifications results in the lowest numbered pods being assigned a value of zero all channels excluded If you include more pod specifications than there are pods for that machine the extra ones will be ignored However an error is reported anytime more than 13 pod specifications are listed The polarity can be specified at any point after the label name Because pods contain 16 channels the format value for a pod must be between 0 and 65535 ga When giving the pod assignment in binary base 2 each bit will correspond to a single channel A 1 in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is assigned to that pod and bit A Q in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is excluded from the label For example assigning B1111001100 is equivalent to entering from the front panel A label can not have a total of more than 32 channels assigned to it string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters POSitive NEGative format integer from 0 to 63 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order format integer
345. t command is a root level command it will always appear as the first element of a compound header The WLISt subsystem is only available when one or more state analyzers with time tagging on are specified OUTPUT XXX WLIST XTIME 40 0E 6 14 4 Command lt delay_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt delay_value gt Example WLISt Subsystem DELay DELay MACHine 1 2 WLISt DELay delay value The DELay command specifies the amount of time between the timing trigger and the horizontal center of the the timing waveform display The allowable values for delay are 2500 s to 2500 s Real number between 2500 s and 42500 s OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST DELAY 100E 6 MACHine 1 2 WLISt DELay The DELay query returns the current time offset delay value from the trigger MACHine 1 2 WLISt DELay time value NL Real number between 2500 s and 2500 s OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 WLIST DELAY 14 5 Command module spec label name bit id Examples WLISt Subsystem INSert INSert MACHine 1 2 WLISt INSert module spec label name bit id OVERlay ALL The INSert command inserts waveforms in the timing waveform display The waveforms are added from top to bottom up to a maximum of 96 waveforms Once 96 waveforms are present each time you insert another waveform it replaces the last waveform The first para
346. t to the TD line on the controller Internal pull up resistors in the logic analyzer assure the DCD DSR and CTS lines remain high when you are using a three wire interface Extended Interface with Hardware Handshake With the extended interface both the software and the hardware can control the data flow between the logic analyzer and the controller This allows you to have more control of data flow between devices The logic analyzer uses the following connections on its RS 232C interface for extended interface communication Programming Over RS 232C Extended Interface with Hardware Handshake e Pin7 SGND Signal Ground e Pin2 TD Transmit Data from logic analyzer e Pin3 RD Receive Data into logic analyzer The additional lines you use depends on your controller s implementation of the extended hardwire interface e Pin4 RTS Request To Send is an output from the logic analyzer which can be used to control incoming data flow e Pin5 CTS Clear To Send is an input to the logic analyzer which controls data flow from the logic analyzer e Pin6 DSR Data Set Ready is an input to the logic analyzer which controls data flow from the logic analyzer within two bytes e Pin8 DCD Data Carrier Detect is an input to the logic analyzer which controls data flow from the logic analyzer within two bytes e Pin20 DTR Data Terminal Ready is an output from the logic analyzer which is enabled as long as the logic analyzer is turned
347. tax Diagram The MARKer Subsystem commands are e AVOLt e TMAXimum e ABVolt e TMINimum e BVOLt e TMODe e CENTer e VMODe e MSTats e VOTime e OAUTo e VXTime e OTIMe e VRUNS e RUNTIil e XAUTo e SHOW e XTIMe e TAVerag e XOTime e 31 2 MARKer Subsystem Figure 31 1 N E Care AVOLE space CHANNEL z level M AVOLE gt ABVOLt gt K e ABvolt Je space CHANNEL_ eC V level AS wm BVOLt gt Center space e IRIGger Tone space eorr gt TMODe stats space eor gt I MSTats oAuTo space MANuoI CHANne A iype Lec gt v level Lec slope gt occur rence Guns OT IMe gt space gt marker_time gt A 16532S09 Y MARKer Subsystem Syntax Diagram Figure 31 1 MARKer Subsystem 16530815 Y gt RUNT I spoce eorr gt L It_arg AD atoro LO inronge t gt QUTRange 1 m outrange_ot LO outrange_It Fe Runti 1 gt e show e space SAWP le gt Mei TAVerage de rL TMAX i mum gt TMINi mum g
348. te RELat ive for tags OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST COLUMN 4 1 A HEX MACHine 1 2 TLISt COLumn col num The COLumn query returns the column number label name and base for the specified column MACHine 1 2 TLISt COLumn col num module num MACHine 1 2 label name lt base gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST COLUMN 4 CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 TLISt CLRPattern X O ALL The CLRPattern command allows you to clear the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST CLRPATTERN O 24 8 Query Returned Format lt line_number gt lt label_name gt pattern string Example Command line num mid Screen Example TLISt Subsystem DATA DATA MACHine 1 2 TLISt DATA line number label name gt The DATA query returns the value at a specified line number for a given label The format will be the same as the one shown in the Listing display MACHine 1 2 TLISt DATA line number label name pattern string NL integer from 8191 to 8191 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters 4B 0 1 X 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 X 82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F X folaj2 3 4islel7 sjo OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST DATA 512 RAS LINE MACHine 1 2 TLISt LINE line num mid screen The LINE command allows you to scroll the timing analyzer listing vertically Th
349. tem COPY MACHine 1 2 COMPare CMASk label name The CMASk query returns the state of the bits in the channel mask for a given label in the compare listing image MACHine 1 2 COMPare CMASk label name care spec A string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters A string of characters l 32 characters maximum An indicator that tells the logic analyzer that it cares about this bit An indicator that tells the logic analyzer that it does not care about this bit don t care OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE CMASK DATA COPY MACHine 1 2 COMPare COPY The COPY command copies the current acquired State Listing for the specified machine into the Compare Reference template It does not affect the compare range or channel mask settings OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE COPY 20 6 Command lt label_name gt lt line_num gt lt data pattern gt Examples COMPare Subsystem DATA DATA MACHine 1 2 COMPare DATA lt label name line num data pattern line num data pattern data pattern The DATA command allows you to edit the compare listing image for a given label and state row When DATA is sent to an instrument where no compare image is defined such as at power up all other data in the image is set to don t cares Not specifying the lt label_ name gt parameter allows you to write data patterns to more than one label for the given line number Th
350. th the simple command header the syntax is lt function gt lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt RMODE SINGLE lt terminator gt Compound Command Header Compound command headers are a combination of two or more program keywords The first keyword selects the subsystem and the last keyword selects the function within that subsystem Sometimes you may need to list more than one subsystem before being allowed to specify the function The keywords within the compound header are separated by colons For example to execute a single function within a subsystem use the following subsystem function white space data terminator SYSTEM LONGFORM ON To traverse down one level of a subsystem to execute a subsystem within that subsystem use the following subsystem subsystem function white space data terminator MMEMORY LOAD CONFIG FILE Example Introduction to Programming Duplicate Keywords Common Command Header Common command headers control IEEE 488 2 functions within the logic analyzer such as clear status The syntax is lt command header gt lt terminator gt No white space or separator is allowed between the asterisk and the command header CLS is an example of a common command header Combined Commands in the Same Subsystem To execute more than one function within the same subsystem a semicolon is used to separate the functions lt subsystem
351. the Xand Y references X and Y origins and X and Y increments These values are read from the waveform preamble see the PREamble command or by the queries of these values Conversion from Data Value to Voltage The formula to convert a data value returned by the instrument to a voltage is voltage data value yreference yincrement yorigin Conversion from Data Value to Time The time value of a data point can be determined by the position ofthe data point As an example the third data point sent with XORIGIN 16ns XREFERENCE 0 and XINCREMENT 2ns Using the formula time data point number xreference xincrement xorigin would result in the following calculation time 3 0 Ans 16ns 22ns Conversion from Data Value to Trigger Point The trigger data point can be determined by calculating the closest data point to time 35 6 WAVeform Subsystem Data Conversion Figure 35 3 zs waveform mC 24 e cow wm DATA FORMo t space FORMat gt POINts gt gt PRE amb le gt Record space eru gt source gt space gt channel_ gt _ seenioa a gu WAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram 35 7 Figure 35 3 Table 35 1 WAVeform Subsystem Data Conversion Y c XINCrement H XORIgin c XREFerence Me YINCremen
352. the previous waveforms 19 4 Example Query Returned Format Example Command SCHart Subsystem HAXis OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART ACCUMULATE OFF MACHine 1 2 SCHart ACCumulate The ACCumulate query returns the current setting The query always shows the setting as the character 0 off or 1 on MACHine 1 2 SCHart ACCumulate 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART ACCUMULATE HAXis MACHine 1 2 SCHart HAXis STAtes state low value gt lt state high value gt lt label name gt label low value label high value gt The HAXis command allows you to select whether states or a label s values will be plotted on the horizontal axis of the chart The axis is scaled by specifying the high and low values The shortform for STATES is STA This is an intentional deviation from the normal truncation rule state low value state high value label name label low value label high value Examples Query Returned Format Example SCHart Subsystem HAXis integer from 8191 to 8191 integer from state low value to 8191 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string from 0 to 2 1 HFFFF string from label low value to 277 1 HFFFF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART HAXIS STATES 100 100 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART HAXIS READ 511 511 MACHine 1 2 SCHart HAXis The H
353. the search criteria for the O marker MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSEarch occurrence lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OSEARCH OSTate MACHine 1 2 TLISt 0STate The OSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the O marker resides 8191 to 8191 If data is not valid the query returns 32767 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSTate state num NL an integer from 8191 to 8191 or 32767 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OSTATE 24 13 Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Command Example TLISt Subsystem OTAG OTAG MACHine 1 2 TLISt OTAG lt time_value gt The OTAG command specifies the tag value on which the O Marker should be placed The tag value is time If the data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OTAG 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OTAG The OTAG query returns the O Marker position in time regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 for time tagging or returns 32767 for state tagging MACHine 1 2 TLISt OTAG lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OTAG REMove MACHine 1 2 TLISt REMove The REMove command removes all labels except the leftmost label from the listing menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST REMOVE 24 14 Command
354. the waveform display before building a new display OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 SWAVEFORM REMOVE TAKenbranch MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore The TAKenbranch command allows you to control whether the states that cause branching are stored or not stored This command is only available when the acquisition mode is set to manual OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM TAKENBRANCH STORE 18 9 Query Returned Format Command lt percent gt Example SWAVeform Subsystem TPOSition MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TAKenbranch The TAKenbranch query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM TAKENBRANCH TPOSition MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt percent gt The TPOSition command allows you to control where the trigger point is placed The trigger point can be placed at the start center end or at a percentage of post store The post store option is the same as the User Defined option when setting the trigger point from the front panel The TPOSition command is only available when the acquisition mode is set to manual integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM TPOSITION CENTER 18 10 SWAVeform Subsystem TPOSition Query MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger setting Returned Forma
355. ther 7 or 8 bits depending on the application The 1660 series logic analyzer supports 8 bit only 8 Bit Mode Information is usually stored in bytes 8 bits at a time With 8 bit mode you can send and receive data just as it is stored without the need to convert the data 3 9 EN See Also Programming Over RS 232C RS 232C Bus Addressing The controller and the 1660 series logic analyzer must be in the same bit mode to properly communicate over the RS 232C This means that the controller must have the capability to send and receive 8 bit data For more information on the RS 232C interface refer to the Agilent Technologies 1660 Series Logic Analyzer User s Reference For information on RS 232C voltage levels and connector pinouts refer to the Agilent Technologies 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Service Guide RS 232C Bus Addressing The RS 232C address you must use is dependent on the computer or controller you are using to communicate with the logic analyzer HP Vectra Personal Computers or compatibles If you are using an HP Vectra Personal Computer or compatible it must have an unused serial port to which you connect the logic analyzer s RS 232C port The proper address for the serial port is dependent on the hardware configuration of your computer Additionally your communications software must be configured to address the proper serial port Refer to your computer and communications software manuals for more informatio
356. there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MARKER TAVERAGE time value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER TAVERAGE 31 12 Query Returned Format lt time value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time value gt Example MARKer Subsystem TMAXimum TMAXimum MARKer TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MARKer TMAXimum time value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMAXIMUM TMINimum MARKer TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MARKer TMINimum time value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMINIMUM 31 13 Example Query Returned Format lt state gt Example MARKer Subsystem TMODe TMODe MARKer TMODe OFF ON AUTO The TMODe command allows you to select the time marker mode The choices are OFF ON and AUTO When OFF time marker measurements cannot be made When the time markers are turned on the X and O markers can be moved to make time and voltage measurements The AUTO mode allows you to make automatic marker placements by specifying channel slope and occurrence count for each marker Also the Statistics mode may be used when
357. tion 20 which contains the number of acquisition chips in the instrument For example if the value in byte position 20 is 4 the instrument is an 1660A Values 3 2 and 1 represent the 1661A 1662A and 1663A respectively 26 10 DATA and SETup Commands Acquisition Data Description Byte Position clock Pod 8 Pod 7 pod 6 pod 5 pod p pod 3 pod 2 pod 17 lines 177 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 195 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 unused in the 1661A 1662A and 1663A 2 also unused in the 1662A and 1663 A 3 also unused in the 1663A 4 The headings are not a part of the returned data Row x is the highest number of valid rows specified by the bytes in byte positions 101 through 126 in all modes and when neither analyzer is in glitch mode In the glitch mode row x is the larger of 1 The highest number of valid rows specified by the bytes in byte positions 101 through 126 or 2 2048 the highest number of valid rows for the pods assigned to the timing analyzer when one or more glitches are detected The clock line bytes for the 1660A which also includes 2 additional data lines D are organized as follows XXXX XXPN xxDD MLKJ The clock line bytes for the 1661A and 1662A are organized as follows XXXX XXXX XXXX MLKJ The clock line bytes for the 16
358. tion to transfer instrument configuration data This is useful for e Re loading to the logic analyzer e Processing data later e Processing data in the controller This chapter explains how to use these commands The format and length of block data depends on the instruction being used the configuration of the instrument and the amount of acquired data The length of the data block can be up to 409 760 bytes in the 1660A The SYSTem DATA section describes each part of the block data as it will appear when used by the DATA instruction The beginning byte number the length in bytes and a short description is given for each part of the block data This is intended to be used primarily for processing of data in the controller Do not change the block data in the controller if you intend to send the block data back into the logic analyzer for later processing Changes made to the block data in the controller could have unpredictable results when sent back to the logic analyzer 26 2 DATA and SETup Commands Data Format Data Format To understand the format of the data within the block data there are four important things to keep in mind e Data is sent to the controller in binary form e Each byte as described in this chapter contains 8 bits e The first bit of each byte is the MSB most significant bit e Byte descriptions are printed in binary decimal or ASCII depending on how the data is described For ex
359. tive pulse width 32 2 Overshoot 32 3 Peak to peak 32 2 Period 32 2 Positive pulse width 32 2 Preshoot 32 3 Risetime 32 2 measurement source 32 10 measurement statistics 31 8 MENU command 9 12 20 10 M M ESE command 9 14 ESR command 9 16 minimum voltage measurement 32 12 MINus 30 8 MMEMory subsystem 11 2 MMODe 31 14 31 15 MMODe command query 17 10 23 11 24 10 Mnemonics 1 13 4 3 MODE 33 5 34 11 MODE 33 5 34 11 Module commands 27 2 moving the X marker 31 19 MSB 6 6 MSG 6 5 MSI command 11 16 MSS 6 4 MSTats 31 8 MSTats 31 9 Msus 11 3 multiple measurements 32 5 Multiple numeric variables 1 21 Multiple program commands 1 14 Multiple queries 1 21 Multiple subsystems 1 14 N AME command query 13 7 negative width time measurement 32 7 ew Line character 1 7 L 1 7 4 5 ormal mode 28 3 35 2 otation conventions 4 5 number of averages 28 3 umeric base 1 19 umeric bases 1 12 umeric data 1 12 umeric variables 1 19 WIDth 32 7 WIDth 32 7 o O Marker placement 31 9 31 10 O marker voltage level 31 16 OAUTo 31 9 OAUTo 31 10 occurrence 31 5 OCONdition command query 23 12 24 11 OFFSet 29 6 offset voltage 29 4 29 6 Index 4 Index OFFset 29 6 offset argument 29 4 OPATtern command query 17 11 23 13 24 11 OPC 6 5 Operation Complete 6 6 OR notation 4 5 OSEarch command query 17 12
360. tothe trigger marker time in seconds from trigger marker to X marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER XTIME 1E 6 31 19 MARKer Subsystem XTIMe Query MARKer XTIMe The XTIMe query returns the time in seconds between the X marker and the trigger marker Returned Format MARKer XTIMe lt xmarker time gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MARKER XTIME 31 20 32 MEASure Subsystem Introduction The commands queries in the Measure Subsystem are used to make automatic parametric measurements on displayed waveforms Measurements are made on the displayed waveform s specified by the SOURce command If the source is not specified the last waveform source specified is assumed Measurements are made in the following manner Frequency The frequency of the first complete cycle displayed is measured using the 50 level Period The period of the first complete cycle displayed is measured at the 50 level Peak to Peak The absolute minimum and the maximum voltages for the selected source are measured Positive Pulse Width Pulse width is measured at the 5096 level of the first displayed positive pulse Negative Pulse Width Pulse width is measured at the 50 level of the first displayed negative pulse Risetime The risetime of the first displayed rising edge is measured To obtain the best possible measurement accuracy select the fastest sweep speed while keeping the rising edge on the display The
361. tput queue When a message is available the MAV Message Available bit in the Status Byte Register will be high Output XXX PRE 16 PRE The PRE query returns the current value of the register lt mask gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 through 65535 representing the sum of all bits that are set OUTPUT XXX PRE Common Commands RST Reset Table 8 4 1660 Series Logic Analyzer Parallel Poll Enable Register Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 15 8 Not used 7 128 Not used 6 64 MSS Master Summary Status 5 32 ESB Event Status 4 16 MAV Message Available 3 8 LCL Local 2 4 Not used 1 2 Not used 0 1 MSB Module Summary RST Reset The RST command is not implemented on the 1660 series logic analyzer The 1660 series logic analyzer will accept this command but the command has no affect on the logic analyzer The RST command is generally used to place the logic analyzer in a predefined state Because the 1660 series logic analyzer allows you to store predefined configuration files for individual modules or for the entire system resetting the logic analyzer can be accomplished by simply loading the appropriate configuration file For more information refer to chapter 11 MMEMory Subsystem Command lt mask gt Example Query Returned Format lt mask gt Example Common Commands SRE Service Request Enable SRE Service Request Enable SR
362. turns the value of the average time between the X and O Markers If the number of valid runs is zero the query returns 9 9E37 Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 TLISt TAVerage time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TLIST TAVERAGE TMAXimum MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O Markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMAXimum time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI TLIST TMAXIMUM 24 16 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt Example TLISt Subsystem TMINimum TMINimum MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O Markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMINimum time value NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST TMINIMUM VRUNs MACHine 1 2 TLISt VRUNs The VRUNs query returns the number of valid runs and total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 TLISt VRUNs lt valid_runs gt lt total_r
363. tus of the LOCKout command LOCKout 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX LOCKOUT MENU MENU lt module gt lt menu gt The MENU command puts a menu on the display The first parameter specifies the desired module The optional second parameter specifies the desired menu in the module defaults to 0 Table 9 5 lists the parameters and the menus Selects module or system integer 0 selects the system 1 selects the logic analyzer and 2 selects the oscilloscope 2 1 and 3to 10 unused Selects menu integer Mainframe Commands MENU Example OUTPUT XXX MENU 0 1 Table 9 5 Menu Parameter Values Parameters Menu 0 0 System RS 232 GPIB 0 2 System Disk 0 3 System Utilities 0 4 System Test 1 0 Analyzer Configuration 1 1 Format 1 1 2 Format 2 1 3 Trigger 1 1 4 Trigger 2 1 5 Waveform 1 1 6 Waveform 2 1 7 Listing 1 1 8 Listing 2 1 9 Mixed 1 10 Compare 1 1 11 Compare 2 1 12 Chart 1 1 13 Chart 2 2 0 Channel 2 1 Trigger 2 2 Display 2 3 Auto measure 2 4 Marker 2 5 Calibration Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt enable value Example Query Returned Format Example Mainframe Commands MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable MENU The MENU query returns the current menu selection MENU lt module gt lt menu gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MENU MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable MESE lt N gt enable value
364. uns gt lt NL gt zero or positive integer zero or positive integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST VRUNS 24 17 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt Example TLISt Subsystem XCONdition XCONdition MACHine 1 2 TLISt XCONdition ENTering EXITing The XCONdition command specifies where the X marker is placed The X marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the XPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XCONDITION ENTERING MACHine 1 2 TLISt XCONdition The XCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TLISt XCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XCONDITION XOTag MACHine 1 2 TLISt XOTag The XOTag query returns the time from the X to O markers If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt X0Tag XO time NL real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI1 TLIST XOTAG 24 18 Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt Example Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt TLISt Subsystem XOTime XOTime MACHine 1 2 TLISt XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X to O markers If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XOTime lt XO_time gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XOTI
365. up Commands for additional information when using the logic analyzer or chapter 35 WAVeform Subsystem when using the oscilloscope module OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM DATA block data block length specifier section 8 lt length gt The total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits section header section data 16 bytes described in the Section Header Description section in the individual modules command section The format depends on the type of data Query Returned Format Example Command lt string gt SYSTem Subsystem DSP Display SYSTem DATA The SYSTem DATA query returns the block data The data sent by the SYSTem DATA query reflects the configuration of the machines when the last run was performed Any changes made since then through either front panel operations or programming commands do not affect the stored configuration SYSTem DATA lt block_data gt lt NL gt See chapter 36 Programming Examples for an example on transferring data DSP Display SYSTem DSP lt string gt The DSP command writes the specified quoted string to a device dependent portion of the instrument display A string of up to 68 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM DSP The message goes here 10 6 Query Returned Formats lt error_number gt lt error_string gt Examples SYSTem Subsystem ERRor ERRor
366. us gt The AUToload command controls the autoload feature which designates a set of configuration files to be loaded automatically the next time the instrument is turned on The OFF parameter or 0 disables the autoload feature A string parameter may be specified instead to represent the desired autoload file If the file is on the current disk the autoload feature is enabled to the specified file A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit Specifier not needed by 1660 series 16500A lt msus gt is accepted but no action is taken OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD OFF OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD FILE1 A OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD FILE2 INTERNALO MMEMory AUToload The AUToload query returns 0 if the autoload feature is disabled If the autoload feature is enabled the query returns a string parameter that specifies the current autoload file The appropriate slot designator is included in the filename and refers to the slot designator A for the logic analyzer or B for the oscilloscope Ifthe slot designator is _ underscore the file is for the system MMEMory AUToload 0 lt auto_file gt lt msus gt lt NL gt lt auto_file gt Example Query MMEMory Subsystem CATalog A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the fol
367. us reporting allows you to use information about the instrument in your programs so that you have better control of the measurement process For example you can use status reporting to determine when a measurement is complete thus controlling your program so that it does not get ahead of the instrument This chapter describes the status registers status bytes and status bits defined by IEEE 488 2 and discusses how they are implemented in the 1660 series logic analyzers Also in this chapter is a sample set of steps you use to perform a serial poll over GPIB The status reporting feature available over the bus is the serial poll IEEE 488 2 defines data structures commands and common bit definitions There are also instrument defined structures and bits The bits in the status byte act as summary bits for the data structures residing behind them In the case of queues the summary bit is set if the queue is not empty For registers the summary bit is set if any enabled bit in the event register is set The events are enabled via the corresponding event enable register Events captured by an event register remain set until the register is read or cleared Registers are read with their associated commands The CLS command clears all event registers and all queues except the output queue If CLS is sent immediately following a program message terminator the output queue will also be cleared Status Reporting Figure 6 1 EVENT
368. veform data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM DATA ENTER 707 USING 10A Headers 36 28 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 490 500 510 Programming Examples Transferring waveform data in Byte format ENTER 707 USING B Waveform ENTER 707 USING B Lastchar pkckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ok Print the waveform data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PRINT Header Header PRINT PRINT Press CONTINUE to display waveform data PRINT PRINT Waveform PRINT PRINT Lastchar END 36 29 Programming Examples Transferring waveform data in Word format Transferring waveform data in Word format This program sets up the oscilloscope module to move oscilloscope waveform data from the 1660 series to a controller in Word format 10 Transferring Waveform Data 20 Word Format 30 40 CLEAR 707 50 pkokckckckckckckckckckckckckok Select the Oscilloscope kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk 60 70 OUTPUT 707 SELECT 2 80 90 pk k kk kkkkkkkk Set EOI on and Headers Off kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkx k 100 OUTPUT 707 EOI ON 110 OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF 120 130 pkk kk kk kk kkkkkk Get up the Oscilloscope ckckckckckckckckckck ckckckck kock kk kk kk 140 150 OUTPUT 707 ACQUIRE TYPE AVERAGE 160 OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM SOURCE CHANNEL 1 170 OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM FORMAT WORD 180 OUTPUT 707 WAVEFORM RECORD FULL 190 200 pkkkckkkkkkkkkkkk Start Waveform Acquisition kkkk
369. y a range recognizer term for the specified machine Since a range can only be defined across one label and since a label must contain 32 or less bits the value of the start pattern or stop pattern will be between 253 and 0 Because a label can only be defined across a maximum of two pods a range term is only available across a single label therefore the end points of the range cannot be split between labels When these values are expressed in binary they represent the bit values for the label at one of the range recognizers end points Don t cares are not allowed in the end point pattern specifications 16 14 STRigger STRace Subsystem RANGe label name String of up to 6 alphanumeric characters start pattern B 0 1 ed 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 stop pattern B o 1 8 amp 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 828 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 Examples OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER RANGE DATA 127 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER RANGE ABC B00001111 HCF UL Query MACHine 1 2 STRigger RANGe The RANGe query returns the range recognizer end point specifications for the range Returned Format MACHine 1 2 STRAce RANGe lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE

Agilent Technologies 1660AS TV Converter Box User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents